Home

CBL Interactive (CBLi)

Contents

1. Description This command sets the focus window to the next main window i e one that is an immediate child of the desktop window e g instances of CBLe SELCOPY Interactive CBLVCAT Interactive or any list windows dialogs created directly from the desktop menu bar or command line The ring is maintained in creation sequence and wraps round from the first created to the last created See Also PREVMAINWINDOW NEXTWINDOW PREVWINDOW MDINEXT MDIPREV NEXTWINDOW Syntax gt gt NEXTWINDOW gt lt NW Description This command sets the focus window to the next window in the ring of all windows The ring is maintained in creation sequence and wraps round from the last created to the first created POWER Syntax gt gt POWer SSS gt lt power_command Description For VSE only use the POWER command to open a POWER Command Output window and optionally execute a VSE POWER command The Power Command Output window may also be opened via the File menu of the CBLi main window menu bar If CBLIINI variables System VSESMLogon No i e no Security Manager is active and System TrustedUser No then POWER commands are restricted to PDISPLAY operations only Parameters power_command Any supported VSE POWER command 2009 07 20 16 03 29 CBL Interactive CBLi 153 CBLi Command Line Interface POWER This parameter is placed in the POWER Comma
2. SD U E V VC Be Open a new window containing a zoomed vertical display of the entry s fields Particularly useful for list windows that have a large number of displayed columns Assigned to PF2 by default Columns Displayed List VSE Standard Labels The VSE Standard Label window may be opened via the following to display all permanent and temporary file labels e Select Allocated Files from the LIST menu in the CBLi Main Menu e Enter the CBLi command LA on the command line of any window Where information for individual fields are uninitialised then the null indicator 1 is displayed e g If EXTNO field is null then no extents have been associated with the label 2009 07 20 16 03 29 CBL Interactive CBLi 74 List Windows List VSE Standard Labels Standard Labels View Back Forward FDB Edit Refresh Help Command gt DDName gt PN PT File S YSUCT2 USER BDL CAT SYSWK2 USER CAT SYSWK7 VTAM TRACE FILE VSESP JIOB MANAGER FILE VSESP USER CATALOG DOS WORKFILE SYSOBD1 REC DOS WORKFILE SYS002 REC WSESP USER CATALOG WSESP USER CATALOG MOCT EXT FICE BOTER CON MUET EXT FILE BGO MERA CON MUET EXT FILE BGO YER CON VSAMCat Wol SYSWK1L SYSWK1L SYSWK1L SYSWK1L SYSWK1L VSESPUC SYSWK1 VSESPUC SYSWK1 BB SYSWK1L CATWK1 SYSWK1 SYSWK2 SYSWKS SYSWK1L SYSWK1L SYSWK1L SYSWK1L SYSWK1L SYSWK1L SYSWK1 OVER OVER 44444 HHHHDHHHHDDDPDPHHPLPO H Figure 46
3. EDIT 3 Ho CTX EDITALL Description CMDTEXT extracts the text at the cursor position and either executes it as a command or places it on the command line for editing and or execution By default this command is assigned to function key PF4 Its prime use is from within the CBLe file editor and provides the user with a facilty to store commonly used or difficult to remember commands as plain text within any editable file While it is recommended to create dedicated command files using a filetype CMX both for specific tasks e g hlq MONTHLY REPORT CMX and for one for each user with various task sections e g userid CMX commands may also be included as comment data in JCL program source and configuration files The text selected for execution can span multiple lines using the continuation character backslash W X E0 allowing both for very long commands and the chaining of multiple commands using the command delimiter character See below Note The selected text may extend beyond the text visible in the window i e text that would be displayed if the window is made wider or scrolled may also form part of the CMDTEXT selected text string Some characters within the line of command text is given special treatment 1 or symbol X 4F Used to partition a single line of command text into separately executable commands and or sections of comment data This character marks the limits th
4. This parameter is placed in the Volume field of the VTOC File List window filter Note The filter parameter is not yet implemented for VSE Select only catalog entries that match the specified filter mask The filter mask supports the following wild cards A single asterisk indicates that either a qualifier or one or more characters within a qualifier can occupy that position An asterisk can precede or follow a set of characters A double asterisk indicates that zero or more qualifiers can occupy that position A double asterisk cannot precede or follow any characters it must be preceded or followed by either a dot or a blank oe single percent sign indicates that exactly one character can occupy that position Up to 8 percent signs can be specified in each qualifier A filter that does not contain an asterisk wild card will be appended with to list those data sets whose names begin with the filter string This parameter is placed in the Filter field of the VTOC File List window 2009 07 20 16 03 29 CBL Interactive CBLi 148 CBLi Command Line Interface LV See also LX Command List VTOC entries by Extent Examples LV CBLM02 CBL SELC LV CBLM02 SYS AX A B Syntax gt gt LVOL gt lt o LISTVOL volume Description Use the LVOL List Volumes command to open a DASD Volumes List window and optionally display the attributes of sel
5. List Windows List VTOC Files A single percent sign represents exactly one character other than dot period within a DSN qualifier Up to 8 percent signs can be specified in each qualifier A filter field that contains neither asterisk nor double asterisk wild cards will have a wildcard string of automatically appended and so list all those data sets whose names begin with the filter string Prefix Line Commands The following prefix line commands are available blank Prefix line command M if entry is a PDS PDSE library prefix line command E otherwise The ENTER key must be pressed with the cursor on the line containing the PD S Open the CBLe text editor to to perform SDATA BROWSE on the entry Copy the entry lo Delete the entry User will be prompted to verify the deletion Open the CBLe text editor to edit this entry For MVS only open the FSU File Search Update Window to perform an advanced search and optionally update the contents of the entry 1 Open an IDCAMS Command window and issue an IDCAMS LISTCAT forthe entry las For MVS only list dataset enqueues major name SYSDSN for this entry IR Rename the entry Open the SDE BROWSE EDIT Dialog Window to browse or edit the entry s data within a Structured Data Environment window view Opens the general file utilities menu to ultimately generate specific line commands in a temporary CMX file Open the CBLe text editor to View
6. Output From FSUUNDO NBJ2 DEV FSU D2008357 T132545 FOREGROUND UPDATE EXTENDED Dataset Member RecordNumber 2008 12 22 13 35 PAGE 1 NBJ JCL FSU CBLINST 42 Member Updated Record Old Changed data starts at Pos 037 LOAD EXEC PGM IEBCOPY REGION 4M 66DDCC44 44 4 4CECC4DCD7CCCCDDE6DCCCDD7FD444444444444444444444444444444444444444444 11361400000057530774E9523678B957965E44000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 Record New LOAD EXEC PGM IEBCOPY REGION 0M 66DDCC44 44 4 4CECC4DCD7CCCCDDE6DCCCDD7FD4 44444444 444444444444444444444444444444444 11361400000057530774E9523678B957965E04000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 E A hile ie LS a Bote le te aygie ow Al ech Ua piel il adas Meee Dataset Member RecordNumber 2008 12 22 13 35 PAGE J NBJ JCL FSU CBLINS01 9 Member Updated Record Old Changed data starts at Pos 037 LOAD EXEC PGM IEBCOPY REGION 4M 66DDCC44 44 4 4CECC4DCD7CCCCDDE6DCCCDD7FD444444444444444444444444444444444444444444 11361400000057530774E9523678B957965E44000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 Record New LOAD EXEC PGM IEBCOPY REGION 0M 66DDCC444444CECC4DCDICCCCDDE6DCCCDD7FD444444444444444444444444444444444444444444 11361400000057530774E9523678B957965E04000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 ed Los A A O 6 628 cedo 8 Sp ees EARL a ele Sree pid ters a re UD re a ars os NBJ JCL FSU CBLINSO1 88 Record not found Record Expected GETMEMS EXEC PGM IEBCOPY REGION 4M
7. SELCOPY Interactive intercepts output to SYSPRINT SYSLST and displays it in the SYSPRINT window instead For this reason SYSPRINT or SYSLST does not need to be allocated and no output is written to the system spool The contents of the SYSPRINT window scroll automatically to display any new output to SYSPRINT SYSLST Data written to the SYSPRINT window is maintained until the SELCOPY Interactive session is closed Therefore so long as the SELCOPY Interactive session is not closed the job may be re run any number of times without loosing the SYSPRINT SYSLST output from a previous run The SYSPRINT window is an edit view which supports execution of CBLe commands and macros This allows the user to manipulate highlight and locate data in the view e g LOCATE TAG ALL CHANGE SET ZONE etc Unless SELCOPY options NOPRINT or NOPCTL are specified in the control statements the input statements and their selection ids are also written to SYSPRINT Similarly unless SELCOPY options NOPRINT NOPSUM or NOPTOT are specified in the control statements the summary totals are written to SYSPRINT at end of me SELCOPY SYSPRINT NBJ3 SELCOPY SSDEMOBL File View Go Steplver StepInto ReRun ind Command ta A rise If dirf then then if bWN Pov 0 NNN urr P N Wi goto pds pdsloope pos lstr CUBE cvbc cvbc Plog fr log_rtne ret INPUT RECNO SECESELE ID Figure 8 SELCOPY SYSPRINT Window SQL Log Window
8. Warning SELCOPY execution ended with RC 112 One or more data sets have been altered between the time of execution of the original File Search Update job and this execution of FSUUNDO Figure 63 FSUNDO EXTENDED Output with UPDATE 2009 07 20 16 03 29 CBL Interactive CBLi 107 System Windows CBLi can display current status information about the environment in which it is running System information windows are as follow 1 Operating System 2 CBLi Storage Stats 3 CBLi Module List 4 CBLi SVC 5 CBLNAME Operating System Window The Operating System window may be opened via the following e Select Operating System from the System menu in the CBLi Main Menu e Enter the CBLi command SYSI on the command line of any window Note Not implemented for VSE Use PF7 and PF8 to scroll down and up respectively through the window contents Sustem LinkList APFList Tasks Storage Programs Help Operating system 2 05 Operating system release 1 9 0 VM guest machine id CPU serial number 0A000048 CPU model 1247 Number of online CPUs 2 System name ADCD Nucleus mame ITEANUCOL Primary JES mame JES2 Master catalog CATALOG Z219 MASTER DFP release 3 3 2 TAM release 6 1 9 RACF release 7 74 0 RACF dataset mame SYS1 RACFDS VM guest Real storage megabytes 1536 Expanded storage megabytes Maximum address spaces 355 PRISM indicator GTF active RACF active IPL volume IPL unit Last IPL date
9. e Select Programs from the Operating System window menu e Enter the CBLi command SYSPGM on the command line of any window The Loaded Programs window is a List Window and supports standard List window features i e Field Descriptor Block Edit and Selecting Sorting and Filtering Note Not implemented for CMS and VSE Loaded Programs View Back Forward Command gt Q aa m a i Refresh Help 1 iS in m 1 ESOS SE 122056 122056 sels i Name BPXWREXX BPXWREXX EBERBEE EXIT CBLXREXX DB DBXXREXX EAGRTPRC EAGRTXIN AModeSi Auth Rent CDLoad N N DOPRRRRRE I NEPNFPNOOrFFD DFDADOLOOD OnMmopoo nn w T o TN o omm 01000000000 Mocorrerrerren SF30ommMMMMMO SOPNFWWREE S0oOonNPNac0o0053 SDODJIDOA DOM 200004000000 S00T70T000w00u0n 1000000 O00 I 0000000000 000000000 Nococococon 2000T7O0NmMePrRD 000000000 DOPRRRRNN EA ALAK EA AXZ AX Figure 70 Loaded Programs window Columns Displayed The data displayed is 2009 07 20 16 03 29 CBL Interactive CBLi 112 System Windows Loaded Programs Window BitFlag CMS nucleus extension SERVICE attribute EndCmd BitFlag CMS nucleus extension ENDCMD attribute BitFlag CMS nucleus extension IMMCMD attribute CBLi Storage Statistics Window The Storage Statistics window may be opened via the following e Select CBLi Storage Stats from the System menu in the CBLi Main Menu e Enter the CBLi command SYSSTOR on the command line of any wi
10. 2009 07 20 16 03 29 CBL Interactive CBLi 177 CBLIVTAM commands Examples MSG F8 DATA Q VIM0O211 Applid CBLIVTAM has 2 active sessions User Terminal Session JGE1 D20001 30000002 NBJ1 D20101 12000003 Syntax gt gt STOP gt lt Description Stop the CBLIVTAM job Examples F CBLIVTAM STOP MSG F8 DATA STOP QUERY 2009 07 20 16 03 29 CBL Interactive CBLi 178 CBLi Dump Files CBLi dump files are supported for CBLi running in MVS environments only In order to assist CBL software engineers to correct any defects encountered in the CBLi system and programs CBLi dump files exist to store formatted storage dumps By default the System AbendTrap variable is set ON in the CBLi SYSTEM CBLIINI file Therefore in the event of a program check or program abend occuring which ultimately halts the CBL interactive environment a message is sent to the user and control is passed to CBLi s abend handler routines If AbendTrap is set OFF any abnormal program end is handled by the operating system Each time the CBLi abend handler is called a new dump file is allocated with DSN prefix qualifier s determined by the System DumpDSNPrefix variable in the SYSTEM or USER CBLIINI file DumpDSNPrefix USER CBLIDUMP is default The remainder of the dump file DSN is of the form Dyyyyddd Thhmmssx representing the current date and time Dump files are allocated as physical sequential data sets wit
11. 2e000000Gd PRERERERNNNDO MIN NNNNWOOo I Ve WQoopowhhs m in rra Mocococonop Mococoooooo 10 10 10 10 LO LO LO LO LO w COS Bunnor anmnoo PWUONP SE he ODA bn SO DOoOmo SERTO MFREO TENKE SFYSM SLMAI NFUIN a San i el Ue n d Alime d Figure 72 Module List window CBLVCAT SVC window The CBLVCAT SVC window may be opened via the following e Select CBLi SVC from the System menu in the CBLi Main Menu e Enter the CBLi command SVC on the command line of any window The CBLVCAT SVC window displays information about the CBLVCAT SVC required to perform CBLVCAT LISTVCAT catalog listings Note Not valid for CMS and VSE vYCII0171 Checking the status of the CBLYCAT Interactive SYC svc 109 esr 222 module 16X00222 vYCIIO018I SYC module 16X00222 found in the static LPA EP 32BB3578 Address 02BB35718 Length 00000100 VCIIO211 SVC module 16X00222 is the CBLYCAT interactive SYC Id CBLYSWC Assembled 2003 08 13 15 20 Level 010 VCIIO2Z3I SYC module IGXO0222 is installed in the SVC table Figure 73 CBLVCAT SVC window 2009 07 20 16 03 29 CBL Interactive CBLi 114 CBLVCAT SVC window The CBLNAME storage display window does not display areas of storage outside the loaded CBLNAME module and the data may The CBLNAME window is a storage display window containing the CBLNAME module loaded by CBLi The window is opened by not be updated by the user selecting CBLNAME from the System menu item i
12. Assigned to PF2 by default Columns Displayed The data displayed is Job name Enqueue Major Name Queue TATUS Status of Enqueue COPE Scope of Enqueue S eserve Must complete me Number of owners 2009 07 20 16 03 29 CBL Interactive CBLi n Ole z o O IE Z S lt m i O Z 80 List Windows List MVS Job Enqueues wrx mt Number of waiters exclusive S lwrsH int Number ot waiters shared SS names inp Rn tength E List MVS Job Enqueues The Job Enqueue List window may be opened via the following e Select Job Enqueues from the LIST menu in the CBLi Main Menu e Enter the CBLi command LJQ on the command line of any window The Job Enqueue List window displays outstanding MVS enqueues held by a given job Note Not implemented for VSE JobName gt LAC al Slslislilia o artes ceea aka ple alle Hana eal iain sl lalo Lac SPFUSER EX OWN STEP LAC SYSDSN SHR OWN SYSTEM LAC SYSDSN EX OWN SYSTEM LAC SYSDSN SHR OWN SYSTEM LAC SYSDSN OWN SYSTEM LAC SYSDSN OWN SYSTEM LAC SPFEDIT OWN SYSTEMS Lac SYSDSN OWN SYSTEM SYSDSN OWN SYSTEM SYSDSN OWN SYSTEM SYSDSN OWN SYSTEM SYSDSN OWN SYSTEM SYSDSN OWN SYSTEM SYSDSN OWN SYSTEM SYSDSN OWN SYSTEM SYSDSN OWN SYSTEM SYSDSN OWN SYSTEM SYSDSN OWN SYSTEM FO FS PSPS PS ATAT A AT E e e E E E eS E E SE SR SR RE ET ET le al E ES al l OAV OAHeannereroaneqde VSCPCTSCFFSCFFCOF0000 CPSCVOVCFSCTOCFOOO000 PREQPEQPEPR WIPER N Ww 01 07 w SWS w b AN 0 UN N YN
13. List Windows List MVS Allocated Files Open the CBLe text editor to to perform SDATA BROWSE on the entry Copy the entry Ds Delete the entry User will be prompted to verify the deletion Open the CBLe text editor to edit this entry Open the FSU File Search Update Window to perform an advanced search and optionally update the contents of the entry 1 Open an IDCAMS Command window and issue an IDCAMS LISTCAT forthe entry la llLstdatasetenqueues major name SYSDSN for this entry Open the SDE BROWSE EDIT Dialog Window to browse or edit the entry s data within a Structured Data Environment window view Unallocate the DD name Opens the general file utilities menu to ultimately generate specific line commands in a temporary CMX file Open the CBLe text editor to View edit read only this entry Open an Execute CBLVCAT window and issue a LISTVCAT operation for the entry Perform a compress of an MVS PDS library to reclaim disk space occupied by replaced back level members This action performs an IEBCOPY to itself No action is taken for PDSE entries however the IEBCOPY dialog is opened with an error message if executed against any non PDS E Open the volume statistics window for the volume containing the entry Open a drop down menu containing valid prefix command functions for the list window entry Position the cursor on the required function and hit lt Enter gt to action the command Assigned to PF4 by default
14. length and origin values with or without enclosing parentheses offset and length define the record length field in the record data while origin defines the start of the record data to which the record length is applied Lrecl Specify the maximum record length of input records belonging to all HFS files that match the HFS path fileid masks specified in the INPUT field Default for rec and its effect on input records is as supported by the SDE CLI command EDIT Ignore Case Bypass case sensitivity for the name portion of all specified HFS path fileid masks specified in the INPUT field The name portion of the HFS path is the character string at the end of the path that follows the last slash of the fileid or is the entire path name if is not specified Recurse SubDirs For all HFS path names specified in the INPUT field recursively search files within all sub directories found within each HFS path specification FIND Insert arguments to be translated into a single SDE FIND operation If enabled only those input records that satisfy VIEW and WHERE filtering are passed to the FIND operation otherwise FIND operates on all input records Records that contain the FIND string are passed to the next stage of processing which if enabled is the CHANGE operation Otherwise the records are displayed in the FIND output report For Structured File Search amp Update a numeric search string will be treated as a signed numeric
15. 0 0 0 0 0 L Figure 65 LPA Modules window Columns Displayed The data displayed is LPDE or CDE element address LPDE or CDE chain pointer RBP NI At2 N3 At Link List Window The Link List window may be opened via the following e Select LinkList from the Operating System window menu e Enter the CBLi command SYSLL on the command line of any window The Link List window is a List Window and supports the standard List window features i e Field Descriptor Block Edit and Selecting Sorting and Filtering The contents of each library may be displayed in a List Library Members window by hitting the enter key on the required entry Note Not valid for CMS and VSE 2009 07 20 16 03 29 CBL Interactive CBLi ow NNNNEPNEPNED 109 MNN NN t System Windows Link List Window View Back Forward FDB Edit Refresh Help Command gt iN m pu 1 2 3 4 5 6 Y 8 9 Figure 66 Link List window Columns Displayed The data displayed is Link list sequence number Link list library name APF List Window The APF Authorised Program Facility List window may be opened via the following e Select APFList from the Operating System window menu e Enter the CBLi command SYSAPF on the command line of any window The APF List window is a List Window and supports the standard List window features i e Field Descriptor Block Edit and Selecting Sorting and Filtering The contents of e
16. 2009 07 20 16 03 29 CBL Interactive CBLi 147 CBLi Command Line Interface LQ The Enqueue List window may also be opened via the List menu of the CBLi main window menu bar Note Not implemented for CMS or VSE Parameters queuename The major name queue name of the ENQ resource This is a 1 8 character upper case name For example dataset allocations are ENQueued with resource name SYSDSN This parameter is placed in the Queue Name field of the Enqueue List window resourcename This is a 1 256 character case sensitive minor name resource name You need only enter the prefix of the resources you are interested in All resources for the given queue with resource beginning with this value are listed This parameter is placed in the Resource Name field of the Enqueue List window See also LJQ Command Examples LO SYSDSN SYS1 List Enqueues for queue name SYSDSN for resource names starting with upper case SYS1 Syntax Soest LV E ce gt lt U LISTVTOC volume tas filter Description Use the LV List VTOC Files command to open a VTOC File List window and optionally list by data set name entries contained in a DASD volume s Volume Table of Contents VTOC The VTOC File List window may also be opened via the List menu of the CBLi main window menu bar Note Not implemented for CMS Parameters volume The 1 6 character volume id containing the required VTOC
17. COMMANDLINE Sa dodo gt lo CLN z windowname 4 de SHOW ze K TOP B y HIDE 4 de BOT E ARO Popa SSS Se gt lt z PROMPT prompt Be 3 SCROLL pene NOSCROLL Description If this command is issued with no parameters or with the window name parameter only then a dialog box is opened in which the user can define the characteristics of the command line of the specified window Prompt gt iz Eire Position gt BES Top or Bottom visible BEE Yes or No Lines EE 1 9 Scrol OEE Yes or No Figure 78 Command Line Dialog Window If parameters other than the window name are supplied then the specified change is made to the command line Parameters windowname The window name containing the command line If not supplied then the window in which the command is issued via a command line or function key is assumed SHOW HIDE Show or hide the command line TOP BOT Show the command line at the top or the bottom of the window PROMPT The character string following the PROMPT keyword is used as the prompt prefixing the command line input area in the window SCROLL NOSCROLL For CBLe only show or hide the ISPF Edit style scroll entry field For INTERFACESISPF the default is SCROLL For INTERFACE CBLE the default is NOSCROLL 2009 07 20 16 03 29 CBL Interactive CBLi 126 CBLi Command Line Interface COMMANDLINE CURSORSELECT Syntax gt gt CURSORSELECT gt lt
18. Edit job number then hit ENTER gt reverse apostrophe X 79 This character is treated as a null and all occurences are removed from the command text Its purpose is to allow alignment of alike items purely for readabilty e g gt e my jcl Job_01 Edit DSN my jcl Job_01 gt e my output Job_01 backslash X EO If the last non blank character on the whole line is Y then the line of command text is continued onto the next line e g gt alloc reuse f OUTDD new dsn CBL TEST OUTPUT space 1 1 cyl unit 3390 vol DATTOB recfm F B lrecl 80 blksize 0 gt sub my jcl Job_01 e my output Job_01 e CBL TEST OUTPUT Note In the above example semi colon is the command delimiter The command text selected by CMDTEXT is identified by starting at the cursor position and searching to the left for a lt gt l character or the start of the line This determines the left extent of the command string The right extent of command string is then determined by starting at the cursor and searching to the right for a character or the end of the line of text Parameters null If the left command string delimiter is a lt character then execute the command string Otherwise place the command string on the command line If the left command string delimiter is a lt character then place the command string on the command line Otherwise execute the command string EDITALL Place the w
19. PXFMTYPE PXFMVOL PXFMUSER PXFMFLG1 PXFMRCFM PXFMSTAT PXFMLNE PXFMFLSH PXFMCPYG PXFMFLG2 PXFMNSEP PXFMJBO PXFMCMPT PXFMNODE PXFMORGN PXFMSUBS PXFMDDND PXFMDDNT PXFMQNUM PXFMSECN PXFMDIST PXFMMACN PXFMMAC1 PXFMMAC2 PXFMMAC3 Execute POWER PXEMMACA PXFMMACS PXEMMACS PXFMMAC7 PXEMMACS PXFMMAGS The data displayed for other POWER commands is Prefix Commands SHARED SYSID 4 ACC CNT SHARED SYSID 5 ACC CNT SHARED SYSID 6 ACC CNT SHARED SYSID 7 ACC CNT SHARED SYSID 8 ACC CNT SHARED SYSID 9 ACC CNT Text Power Display Output 2009 07 20 16 03 29 CBL Interactive CBLi 45 Create ALIAS The Create ALIAS Dialog window may be opened via the following e Select Create Library ALIAS from the FILE menu in the CBLi Main Menu e Enter the CBLi command ALIAS DLG on the command line of any window e Enter the List window prefix command A against an entry in a Library List The Create ALIAS dialog provides a simple interface to create a new PDS or PDSE library member alias Note that aliases for load library members are created using the binder to relink the module being aliased This will result in an update to the module s TTR Command gt Library not found reenter Library JGE CBLINST DO70919 EXE COPY Member I160 Alias gt CBLAVTAM New alias name Load Library Fields Entry gt VCIAVTAM Entry Point name Optional parameters AMode gt AMode for this Entry Point AType
20. See SELCOPY Interactive SELCOPY Interactive SDB An Intergrated Development Environment for SELCOPY SELCOPY DeBug that runs as an MDI application under CBLi Storage Display Window A CBLi window containing hexadecimal and character display of areas of storage 2009 07 20 16 03 29 CBL Interactive CBLi 191
21. TSO format TO DIZ E D Z e 2 E gt gt 2 ls lx 2 2 S z Q 3 Sis gt D oO ie Cc D 2 a Function Keys Window The Function Keys window may be opened via the following e Select Function Keys from the System menu belonging to the window for which function keys are to be displayed e Enter the CBLi command KEYS on the command line of the window for which function keys are to be displayed The Function Keys window displays the current PFKey table settings for a CBL3270 window CBLi maintains function key tables at 5 levels i e Window Class Default TitleBars and Borders The function actioned by any PFkey is determined by these levels as discussed in the topic Function Keys The function key table for any of the levels may be displayed and updated by first selecting the desired level from the Function Keys menu 2009 07 20 16 03 29 CBL Interactive CBLi 7 Getting started with CBLi Function Keys Window All the displayed fields other than the Key field are enterable Changes made to the table are only obeyed once the user has confirmed saved the changes on exit of the Function Keys window Command gt KEY DELAY PFOA sos lineadd duplicate right retrieve sos linedel spltjoin mark box mark line ECommand copy ECommand move ECommand delete overlaybox PrevMainWindow undo redo ECommand reset DUDVVVVVVVVVVVVVVIDD A 0 0 00 0 0 a 0 a a o TN NNPRRRRRRRRROCODOOOOO P 0100 J00Mb0NP0100
22. Za pds2 pos marr then then then else then then loop Lstr A sesse taau Total Members tect at hot matl at mat unml at unm An add 1 to totl at tot PBarr marre d1 add 1 to matl at mat space z print from pdsin len 8 type flag eom log from pdsin len 8 add 1 to unml at umm type pec Senco O 40 0 cho Hes Ustr i5 fmt 229 Lstr 339 fmt zz9 Lstrt 66 fmt zz9 to to ta len lstrl The SQL log window may be opened via the following 2009 07 20 16 03 29 CBL Interactive CBLi type b 8 at pdsin b b Matching Scrotll gt Csr Waa A ots 1 to total field step marre Scan ar 1 to match field Space 2 lines Print matching member na Do not read data records Log mismatching member nm 1 to mismatch field Get next record aa ae members A EEY Mis matching 18 Executing SELCOPY SQL Log Window e Select SQL log from the View menu in the SELCOPY Main Menu e Enter the SELCOPY Interactive CLI command WINDOW SQL A SELCOPY job that submits SQL statements to a DB2 data base also writes detailed information about the SELCOPY SQL processing to a data set allocated to ddname CBLSQLOG SELCOPY Interactive intercepts output to CBLSQLOG and displays it in the SQL Log window instead Because of this CBLSQLOG does not need to be allocated to display this information The SQL Log window is an edit view which supports execution of CBLe
23. becomes DEV 4w DEV OEM TRSPAN becomes DEV OEM TRSPAN DEV SPA becomes DEV SPAF 2 Otherwise a wildcard string of is appended e g DEV OEM TRSPAN becomes DEV OEM TRSPAN DEV SPAS becomes DEV ASPAS AM SYS1 219 becomes YSL E 219 4 men Wien Note that a warning message is displayed if the high level qualifier of the fileid mask is asterisk or double asterisk A fileid mask of this type would result in all catalogs being searched which would take some time to execute and would use a large amount of system resources 0 For VSE systems the fileid mask is a valid CBLVCAT LISTCAT KEY parameter string i e entries with file name beginning with the specified string or if prefixed by slash entries with file name containing the specified string See the CBLVCAT User Manual If no fileid mask is specified all entries will be selected Note that wild cards are not supported within the VSE fileid mask however the end of the fileid mask Wwe asterisk is tolerated if placed at Catalog gt Nominate a specific catalog in which to search for the requested entry For MVS systems this is a catalog DSN Specifying a catalog DSN is unneccessary if an alias exists for the fileid mask high level qualifier HLQ in the master catalog In this case the appropriate catalog DSN will automatically be inserted in this field If the HLQ contains a wild card then all matching aliases are in
24. edit read only this entry VC Open an Execute CBLVCAT window and issue a LISTVCAT operation for the entry Perform a compress of an MVS PDS library to reclaim disk space occupied by replaced back level members This action performs an IEBCOPY to itself No action is taken for PDSE entries however the IEBCOPY dialog is opened with an error message if executed against any non PDS E gt Open the volume statistics window for the volume containing the entry Open a drop down menu containing valid prefix command functions for the list window entry Position the cursor on the required function and hit lt Enter gt to action the command Assigned to PF4 by default Open a new window containing a zoomed vertical display of the entry s fields Particularly useful for list windows that have a large number of displayed columns Assigned to PF2 by default Columns Displayed The data displayed is Vol Volume serial number n Dataset name g Data set organisation RecFm Record format Lrecl Logical record length Blksz Block Size lu Allocation unit 2009 07 20 16 03 29 CBL Interactive CBLi 70 n gt List Windows List VTOC Extents List VTOC Extents The VTOC Extent List window may be opened via the following e Select VTOC Extents from the LIST menu in the CBLi Main Menu e Enter the CBLi command LX on the command line of any window The VTOC Extent List window displays all information in a DASD volume s Vo
25. ees e e e a e mutes eect et cadralece teeta hathiasel dices 127 O nossetiueage aweauenpte A 128 DPRAGBORDERMINU S Wpperrrc eee em eserere mee rrerster cre rrrerh a caso 128 DRAGBORDERPLUS aiar crab vdeetedias cried m vee rE E a E escasas 129 D E E E E E urbe cercndancas cine E on mecntusumianel eae 130 E E E EE E A E revert E T T A A E rere pret 131 ERASE seirer on S SE a a o ada oir lid 132 Mascaras T E E E cas aca 132 FORWARD sissioni ise Eeoae Er EE EAr A RE EEE E Ea E E E a e A eg attend 132 a e e A ER A E a E E E E E EE 133 Le O E E E A E E AE E crete A E EEE A E E AN A A T E E a E E A 137 2009 07 20 16 03 29 ii CBL Interactive CBLi Contents CBLi Command Line Interface ERF MONE eas eas fac aces has Saws bee AO a isa 151 MDIRRE A Saas sce E A a E cegucecstequet aden aa eopetdnegs tuslsvadesigtosscsaucastensecsets ss 151 A a E a E AE EEA EO E E EE EE eotauensesemet relat susaead 152 MOVE WINDOW sta aE a R E E S SNE E AE E iia EA 153 NEXTMAINWINDOW iritira e E E ii 153 NEX TWINDOW onrera osaera iE A EE EEE EEO AEEA EEPE ads peseta 153 POWER sizis ones SEER E EE E E NEE E ES 154 SETCOLOUR srai enS a A ENEA a E TA ati vile aecees 161 SE FOCUS A E SEA va ns N sad E a T N EIR 161 BASU S E e de MEET eer 172 A A A E O E 173 USS command Saarin a seweuacnsavanianandasinentannnaue auceuadeeucencusensassnsnnaasinsunabadednaapousdasnesuneensandeueudsaavad maananmiaiaantasaues 173 USS CHDIR eria a EE E A Ea E a EE EEG 173 U
26. eh BOBPPBBPRBRWE No PARTKEY_COLSEQ PARTKEY _ORDERING RELCREATED REMARKS SCALE SOURCETY ung BUS here J n bonne NN FP N e e FOOMOMEFEMTMEEROMEPOOERMOMNFOREREREMORMSAERM Ree NNNNhN FOOOOMEANNEENFOOBNONE PVVPSCSCSCTOOSCSCSCOCTCOOOSCOOOOOOOOOO00000000 53 79 a2 83 82 81 ag 14 80 84 00 43 11 o a4 48 50 82 15 02 57 47 76 60 30 31 61 13 han Figure 28 DB2 SQL FDB Window 2009 07 20 16 03 29 CBL Interactive CBLi 39 Executing IDCAMS The IDCAMS Command window may be opened via the following e Select Execute IDCAMS from the File menu in the CBLi Main Menu e Enter the CBLi command AMS on the command line of any window e Enter the CBLi prefix command I where supported by a List type window The IDCAMS Command window allows the user to enter any IDCAMS command and view the output in the the window display area The IDCAMS Command window is essentially a List window and has the same charactersitics as List windows For example filtering is supported to display new views of the data IDCAMS Command LISTCAT ALL ENTRYC EBL CBL1I MBRLIST KSDS CMP m View Back Forward FDB Edit Refresh Help Command gt AMSCommand gt LISTCAT ALL ENTRY CBL CBLI MBRLIST KSDS CMP STEM SERVICES 32760 UNCTION COMPLETED HIGHEST CONDITION CODE WAS UY C ENTRY CBE CoE tT MBRETST RSDS CMEJ CBL CBLI MBRLIST KSDS CMP USERCAT CBLCAT CREATION EXPIRATION SMSDATA STORAGECLASS MANAGEMENT
27. gt BAck eee RS gt lt BACKWARD Description Use the BACKWARD command to scroll the window contents backwards by a page SOOOoCooo Ali 20090204 20090204 m nner naamnooA BEWONNERE Br SPE e pe a a e NOAA ba EPA 1E415E00 1E47F478 Note that BACKWARD is the same as UP CURSOR where the cursor is outside the display area 2009 07 20 16 03 29 CBL Interactive CBLi 121 CBLi Command Line Interface BACKWARD BOTTOM Syntax gt gt BOTTOM gt lt BOT Ta Description Use the BOTTOM command to display the bottom lines of the data in the focus window The last line of the data becomes the last line of the display area Note that the CBLi BOTTOM command acts differently to the BOTTOM command available in a CBLe text editor window BROWSE Syntax gt gt Browse fileid SDE BROWSE Opts gt lt Description For VSE and CMS systems BROWSE is a synonym for VIEW Use the BROWSE command to open a Structured Data Environment SDE BROWSE window view to browse a page of data from the specified fileid If the CBLe text editor main window has been stopped BROWSE will start the CBLe main window and open an edit view for the user s HOME CMX file before opening the SDE browse window for the requested file Use BROWSE instead of VIEW to browse large data sets Unlike EDIT and VIEW BROWSE does not need to
28. is assumed SHOWWATTR Syntax gt gt SHOWWATTR gt lt Description Use the SHOWWATTR command to open the Window Attributes window to display the attributes of all open windows The Window Attributes window is essentially a List window and has the same charactersitics as List windows For example select sort and filter to display new views of the data are supported Window Attributes View Back Forward FDB Edit Refresh Command gt SY Width Depth X0 YO CAWidth CADepth 1 a 1 60 Sil 2 1 mE 43 63 36 we 43 Te 43 ut we 43 68 34 we 40 ine 41 m COnrW DOPOR ort Name Figure 81 Window Attributes Window Columns Displayed 2009 07 20 16 03 29 CBL Interactive CBLi 162 CBLi Command Line Interface SHOWWATTR SIZEWINDOW Syntax gt gt SIZEWINDOW TO D n Wem gt lt EE pol SZW windowname BY D n Description Use SIZEWINDOW to resize the specified window to an absolute depth and or width or to a depth and or width relative to the window s current size The window depth and window width are the number of rows and columns respectively that are displayed in the window s displayable area Note that the window s displayable area includes items such as the title bar and command line but do not include the window s horizontal and vertical borders which occupy an additional 2 rows and 4 col
29. lc key cbl type c Generate CBLVCAT catalog report V lt CBL VVC CTL REPVTOC Generate CBLVCAT report by executing control statements located in PDS member REPVTOC of CBL VVC CTL V lt PRD2 CBLVCAT REPVTOC CTL Generate CBLVCAT report by executing control statements located in VSE LIBR member REPVTOC of sublibrary PRD2 CBLVCAT Syntax gt gt View a ata rt nr O O O O O O O gt lt Al Browse fileid gt 1 PROFILE macroname NOPROFile HFS Opts Notes 1 BROWSE is a synonym of VIEW for VSE and CMS systems only Description Use the VIEW command to open a CBLe text edit window view to edit a file in read only mode If the CBLe text editor main window has been stopped VIEW will start the CBLe main window before opening the read only edit view of the requested file A file edited in read only mode has Read Only in the title bar of the document window view Read write edit may be invoked using the CBLi EDIT command Parameters fileid The fileid of the file to be viewed For MVS fileid may be the DSN of a sequential or VSAM data set the member name with or without the library DSN of a PDS PDSE member or an HFS file name If member name is specified without a library DSN the DSN of the library member in the current edit view is used For VSE fileid is the member name of a LIBR library in lib sublib mn mt format For CMS f
30. n_lines Scroll down a specified number of lines The line that is n_lines below the current line becomes the first line of the scrolled display DRAGBORDERMINUS Syntax gt gt DRAGBORDERMINUS gt lt Description Window resizing command DRAGBORDERMINUS is intended to be assigned to PFKeys at the Border level see CLl command KEYS DRAGBORDERMINUS moves the window s border closer to the top left corner of the 3270 display area When the cursor is positioned on a horizontal border the border is dragged one row upwards when on a vertical border the border is dragged one column to the left and when on a corner the border is dragged both one row upwards and one column to the left The border will not be positioned outside the display area in which it is defined e MDI child window borders cannot be dragged outside its parent s client area and all other windows cannot be dragged outside the 3270 display area Similarly CBLi will not allow the window borders to be dragged so that the window is smaller than 3 rows x 8 columns By default DRAGBORDERMINUS is assigned to Border PFKeys F7 and F10 DRAGBORDERPLUS Syntax gt gt DRAGBORDERPLUS gt lt Description Window resizing command DRAGBORDERPLUS is intended to be assigned to PFKeys at the Border level see CLI command KEYS DRAGBORDERPLUS moves the window s border away from the top left corner of the 3270 display area When the
31. 0 y T Figure 52 Job Enqueue List window displaying outstanding enqueues for Job LAC JobName gt The name of the job for which the ENQueues are to be listed Prefix Line Commands The following prefix line commands are available Open a drop down menu containing valid prefix command functions for the list window entry Position the cursor on the required function and hit lt Enter gt to action the command Assigned to PF4 by default gt Open a new window containing a zoomed vertical display of the entry s fields Particularly useful for list windows that have a large number of displayed columns Assigned to PF2 by default Columns Displayed The data displayed is 2009 07 20 16 03 29 CBL Interactive CBLi 81 List Windows List HFS Path wm umber of owners S E lwrex int Mumberotwiaiters exclusive S lwrsH int Number of waiters shared S S names Im frame List H The HFS FS Path Path List window displays the contents of the specified HFS directory path and optionally its sub directories It may be opened via the following The HFS Select HFS Path Details from the LIST menu in the CBLi Main Menu Enter the CBLi command LP on the command line of any window Enter the CBLi command LD with an HFS path argument on the command line of any window Path List window displays file directory and link names contained in the specified HFS path together with stored information for each directory entry No
32. 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 O D000ZS 0 0 Rows Inserted 1 DBZ CPU 000000 069964 seconds eee CBLS O7I 16 56 56 Sel 4 EXECUTE INSERT SQL Code 0 000033 insert into sq11525 values First row 1 1 0 1 5 1 1 0 01 0 001 000034 5 001 3 0 001 9 9 Figure 9 SELCOPY SQL Log Window WTO Log Window The WTO log window may be opened via the following e Select WTO log from the View menu in the SELCOPY Main Menu e Enter the SELCOPY Interactive CLI command WINDOW WTO SYSLOG output to the Operator s Console TSO CMS or ICCF user terminals is intercepted by SELCOPY Interactive and is displayed in the WTOLOG window instead The WTO Log window is opened automatically when SYSLOG output is received This may be warning error messages returned by SELCOPY or output generated by a SELCOPY LOG operation The WTO Log window is an edit view which supports execution of CBLe commands and macros This allows the user to manipulate highlight and locate data in the view e g LOCATE TAG ALL CHANGE SET ZONE etc WTOLOG NBJ SELCOPY EMOO1 WTOLOG Command Law atesealensatecnnZecnatescncenaatansstessatessscessetasnsGsacetennstensstenssGens 000000 k k Top of File 000001 Program about to start 000007 About to enter Loop 000003 Exit Loop 000004 SELCOPY GOTO CANCEL CONDITION MET 000005 go REL 2 02 nga TIME ERROR 513 JOB NBJ 17 13 WED 14 JAN 2009 0000056 End of File Figure 10 SELCOPY WTO Log
33. 16 03 29 CBL Interactive CBLi 104 Utility Windows FSUUNDO Sample Terse Report Output Output From FSUUNDO NBJ2 DEV FSU D2008357 T132545 FOREGROUND VERIFY TERSE Verify Only No data sets will be updated CBLINST Member Updated CBLINSO1 Member Updated CBLINSO1 188 Record not found EQAWIVP1 Member Updated IEBCOPY1 51 Data Mismatch WARNING Record Found lst Diff at Pos 046 gt lt GETMEMS EXEC PGM IEBCOPY REGION 0M Get 66CCEDCDE4 4 4CECC4DCD7CCCCDDE6DCCCDD7FD4444444774C8A47774444444444444444444444444 11753454200057530774E9523678B957965E040000000BB07530BBB0000000000000000000000000 Record Expected GETMEMS EXEC PGM IEBCOPY REGION 0M 66CCEDCDE444CECC4DCD7CCCCDDE6DCCCDD7FD444444444444444444444444444444444444444444 11753454200057530774E9523678B957965E04000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 AED A ta Olt od plan A AS A BUND a Sie oy Scola a Whelan coda NBJ JCL FSU IEBCOP02 Member Updated Records undone Records already undone Files updated Errors Verify Only No data sets have been updated Warning SELCOPY execution ended with RC 112 One or more data sets have been altered between the time of execution of the original File Search Update job and this execution of FSUUNDO Figure 62 FSUNDO TERSE Output with VERIFY 2009 07 20 16 03 29 CBL Interactive CBLi 105 Utility Windows FSUUNDO Sample EXTENDED Output
34. 2 CBLLIB2 CBO70128 ALLOOOGO1 HTML S 4 2843 CBLLIB2 CBO70128 ANDOGOOO1 HTML Ss 4 13300 CBLLIB2 CBO70128 APPENDO1 HTML Ss al 4530 a 1154 lol 1 0 151 Vv e Lib SubLib Member Typ Figure 49 Library List window displaying all members of VSE sub library CBLLIB2 CB070128 2009 07 20 16 03 29 CBL Interactive CBLi 76 List Windows List Library Members Library List UCBL JCLUS View Back Forward FDB Edit Refresh Help Command gt Library gt CBL JCL S Member Alias YY MM IniSize Mods SELCLCTL 1 1 200270741 7 T 0 SELCLKED SELCMIJO1 SELCNAMT SELCPDSX 00 00 00 Y 22mm MURE vO m i nr No 0 nn o bon now oe TUT mmmmmmmm on nad EAE AE T E E a ate ce ae ae E a 000000000 OOOO cooooooom 1 00 MNAE MS pa pa pa pa pa EEE ps ps ps pa MN NNNNNN NNN hh 000000000000 2000000000000 MNN NN S N tam ene ae ae el ne ey te e ey anda SOOOSS00O0R00R AAA Bye NANA NANA MOOPRPEPEOORNEN TO hhh hu oO pe oo NN 000000000000 000000000000 MNN 01 11 M 09 N M n he ee Ne DO0000o0OO talons MN A APE EEE EB BBORE SPOONNWOE ONN NEPRPPRBNNNEUPE HANVS AWW VOW NEPPOPNNNNE SE Na mm OWN 000000000000 E t Member m Figure 50 Library List window displaying members of MVS PDSE CBL JCL whose names begin with S Library gt The name of the library for which the contents are to be listed 0 For MVS the library parameter is a PDS or PDSE dataset name and optionally one or more member name mask
35. 2 is governed by the IDCAMS ALTER command See DFSMS Access Method Services for Catalogs For HFS files specification of a leading dot period or slash in the HFS path name is mandatory in order to distinguish it from an MVS data set name Both fileid1 and fileid2 may be specified as an absolute or relative HFS path and may reference a file name directory name hard link or symbolic link For VSE sequential files may only be renamed if the CBL software product CBLVCAT is licensed CBLi uses CBLVCAT s MOD operation to perform the rename Parameters volid For VSE sequential disk files this is the volume serial number of the DASD volume on which the sequential file resides catdsn For VSE VSAM files this is the full fileid of the VSAM catalog to which the VSAM managed file belongs fileidl The current fileid in full of the file to be renamed For HFS this may be an absolute or relative path name fileid2 The new fileid to be assigned to the file For HFS this may be an absolute or relative path name Examples rename cbl ssc ctl sstest sstest0l Rename an MVS PDS E member rename cbl jcl cblins01 cbl jcl install Rename an MVS PDS E member ren cbl cbli test file nbj test data Rename an MVS sequentail or VSAM data set rename SYSWK1 CBL SELCOPY NAM CBL SELCOPY NAM NEWNAME Rename a VSE sequential disk file CBLVCAT must be licensed rename VSESP USER CATALOG CBL TEST KSDS CBL TEST KSDS NEW
36. 200811191244 OpSys 2 0S 1 9 0 User NBJ2 SpBUDEUE SECCORY STORAGE Work Area NBJI2 SELCOPY SSBEMOO1 S SPRINT 133 V SEQ Size 123 A J2 SELCOPY SSDEMOO1 TRACE p MEC EC E A Size 1 Alt 0 0 2 L SSC CTL SSDEMOOI1 219054 POSE Size 96 ALt 0 0 0 e A MBJS CBET EMI ao ESER Size 76 Alt 0 0 0 Libraro List CEL o JEL CBL JCL APEWTOR BHE F PESE Size 9 ALt 0 0 50 Execute CBLYCAT Execute CBLYCAT CBL CMX NBJ2 252 Y PDSE Size 333 ALt 2 252 Figure 1 Window List window Function Keys Function key command tables are maintained for keys F1 F24 at the following levels When a function key is pressed the command to process is selected as follows If the cursor is in the caption or border of a window then the appropriate function key table is searched lf no command is assigned to the key then no command is processed the default table is not searched The function key table of the window with the cursor is searched If no command is assigned then the class table for the window with the cursor is searched lf no command is assigned then the default table is searched lf no command is assigned then the search is repeated for the parent window of the cursor window and so on up the window hierarchy until the desktop window is reached ookONM Function keys settings may be displayed and updated using the Function Keys window or the KEYS command CBLi Main Window On starting CBLi the main window is openend SELCOPY
37. 25 10 18 OR Ramsay c EXEC WORD 1 20 AND c IKJEFTO1 NEXT AND REGION NEXT FIND c REDEFINES WORD OR OCCURS WORD OR filler 12 80 EMP_NAME Where logical AND is used each execution of a FIND operation will perform a scan for the search string within the entire width of selected record data and is not subject to the position within that record of a previous successful FIND operation For Structured File Search any fields referenced by field name or field reference number within a find_parms combination must exist within the record type specified by the VIEW parameter or default record type if VIEW is not specified Similarly referenced fields must also exist within the subset of fields specified by the SELECT parameter FIND is mandatory if WHERE and CHANGE parameters are omitted INPUT fileid_mask Specifies one or more HFS Path name DSN and or PDS E member fileid masks to be searched Multiple fileid_mask arguments may be specified with one or more intervening blanks Note that only cataloged data sets are selected by a fileid mask A single fileid_mask may be in one of the following formats 1 A pre allocated DDNAME non HFS which may represent one or more concatenated data set and or library e g SYSEXEC 2 An absolute or relative HFS Path name Wild card characters percent representing a single characters and asterisk representing zero or more characters are
38. 66CCEDCDE444CECC4DCD7CCCCDDE6DCCCDD7FD444444444444444444444444444444444444444444 11753454200057530774E9523678B957965E44000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 ASA Sarg dee elo fe Sepsis A BELG Rael be sh pee Gu DS Sl a odo Dataset Member RecordNumber 2008 12 22 13 35 PAGE 1 NBJ JCL FSU EQAWIVP1 24 Member Updated Record Old Changed data starts at Pos 046 COMPILE EXEC PGM IGYCRCTL PARM REGION 4M 6 6CDDDCDC4CECC4DCD7CCECDCED 6DCDD74775 6DCCCDD7FD444444444444444444444444444444444 113647935057530774E97839333B7194EDDDDB957965E44000000000000000000000000000000000 Record New COMPILE EXEC PGM IGYCRCTL PARM REGION 0M 6 6CDDDCDC4CECC4DCD7CCECDCED6DCDD747756DCCCDD7FD444444444444444444444444444444444 113647935057530774E97839333B7194EDDDDB9I57965E04000000000000000000000000000000000 AN DLE 49 A pring Aaa Sabie yr eden Oe a OE o waa arse eye ele NBJ JCL FSU EQAWIVP1 203 Member Updated Record Old Changed data starts at Pos 043 LKED EXEC PGM HEWL PARM MAP REGION 4M 66DDCC4444CECC4DCD7CCED6DCDD77DCD7 6DCCCDD7FD444444444444444444444444444444444444 113254000057530774E8563B7194ED417DB957965E44000000000000000000000000000000000000 Record New LKED EXEC PGM HEWL PARM MAP REGION 0M 66DDCC4444CECC4DCD7CCED6DCDD77DCD7 6DCCCDD7FD444444444444444444444444444444444444 113254000057530774E8563B7194ED417DB957965E04000000000000000000000000000000000000 pan eta ess OE EE Giese DE DS BAD wih ono PES Hae Aa
39. A member name mask supports the following wild cards i A single asterisk represents an entire member name or zero or more characters within a member name mask A single percent sign represents exactly one character within a member name mask Up to 8 percent signs can be specified in each member name mask If specified the member name mask must immediately follow the PDS E DSN and be enclosed in parentheses Multiple member name masks all specified within the single set of parentheses must be separated by one or more blanks and or a comma e g LL DEV OEM CBL202 CBLI HELP HTML S ANS WIN R 0 For VSE the library parameter can be 1 A library name In this case the statistics for the library are listed e g LL CBLLIB men 2 A library name and sublibrary name In this case the sublibrary name may be a mask containing asterisk wild cards as supported by VSE Librarian The statistics for all sublibraries which fit the sublibrary name mask are listed e g LL CBLLIB TEST 3 A library name sublibrary name and member name and type In this case the member name and type may be a mask containing asterisk wild cards The statistics for all members which fit the mask are listed e g LL CBLLIB TESTO1 Z Prefix Line Commands For MVS systems the following prefix line commands are available o Derete the entry User willbe prompted to verify the deletion oo 2009 07 20 16 03 29 CBL Interactive C
40. AAG ar Geel OR A odie OME amp pve peters LABIO Dataset Member RecordNumber 2008 12 22 13 35 PAGE 1 NBJ JCL FSU TEBCOPY1 51 Data Mismatch WARNING Record Found lst Diff at Pos 046 gt lt 2009 07 20 16 03 29 CBL Interactive CBLi 106 Utility Windows FSUUNDO GETMEMS EXEC PGM IEBCOPY REGION 4M Get 6 6CCEDCDE4 4 4CECC4DCD7CCCCDDE6DCCCDD7FD4444444774C8A47774444444444444444444444444 11753454200057530774E9523678B957965E440000000BB07530BBB0000000000000000000000000 Record Expected GETMEMS EXEC PGM IEBCOPY REGION 4M 66CCEDCDE444CECC4DCD7CCCCDDE6DCCCDD7FD444444444444444444444444444444444444444444 11753454200057530774E9523678B957965E44000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 JA LA GLY A lets Miele EA ene GRA OS OSS Sup ener a Ba eal Bien ple LO Dataset Member RecordNumber 2008 12 22 13 35 PAGE 1 NBJ JCL FSU IEBCOP02 7 Member Updated Record Old Changed data starts at Pos 037 UNLOAD EXEC PGM IEBCOPY REGION 4M 6 6EDDDCC44 4 4CECC4DCD7CCCCDDE6DCCCDD7FD444444444444444444444444444444444444444444 11453614000057530774E9523678B957965E44000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 Record New UNLOAD EXEC PGM IEBCOPY REGION 0M 66EDDDCC4444CECC4DCDICCCCDDE6DCCCDD7FD444444444444444444444444444444444444444444 11453614000057530774E9523678B957965E04000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 IN A NA NO NR ame oe ON RA RN Records undone 5 Records already undone 0 Files updated 4 Errors 2
41. APF List window may also be opened via the System menu of the CBLi main window menu bar Note Not valid for CMS and VSE SYSCOMMAND Syntax gt gt SYSCOMMAND command gt lt a SYS g a SYSTEM E 150 CMS E ae eee Description Pass the command directly to the local CMS or TSO environment for execution When a command is issued in a CBLi window the following occurs 1 If the command is recognised as a CBLi command it is executed by CBLi 2 If the command is not recognised as a CBLi command it is passed to the CMS or TSO environment 2009 07 20 16 03 29 CBL Interactive CBLi 165 CBLi Command Line Interface Parameters command Valid CMS or TSO command or expression Example cms query dasd Pass the command query dasd to CMS SYSI Syntax gt gt SYSI gt lt SYSINFO Description Use the SYSI command to open the Operating System window The System Information window may also be opened via the System menu of the CBLi main window menu bar SYSLL Syntax gt gt SYSLL gt lt Description Use the SYSLL command to open the Link List window The Link List window may also be opened via the System menu of the CBLi main window menu bar Note Not valid for CMS and VSE SYSLPA Syntax gt gt SYSLPA gt lt Description Use the SYSLPA command to open the LPA Modules
42. BLe SET Option DE AuxDSNPrefix AUXDSNPREFIX DE LoadWarning LOADWARNIN IMAXCOBOLRG ISDE MaxCOBOLRG MAXCOBOLR D R MAXPLAR SDE MaxStor MAXTOR D Display CBLIINI Fileids and Variables The CBLe function QUERY INIFILE displays the active SYSTEM and USER CBLIINI fileids The CBLe function QUERY INIVAR displays all SYSTEM and USER CBLIINI variables For CBLe REXX macros the active CBLIINI files and the variables set within may be displayed using the EXTRACT function with arguments INIFILE and INIVAR respectively e g To display the active CBLIINI file variables and their values execute the following from the CBLe command line imm extract inivar do i l to inivar 0 msg inivar i end Alternatively use the QX CBLe REXX macro found in the CBL distributed macro library qx inivar CBLi variables may also be referenced as text edit environment variables from within CBLe text edit window views by enclosing the variable name in percent symbols Environment variables are substituted with their equivalent values when used in CBLe CLI commands executed via the following e The CBLe command line e A CBLe CMX file e g the HOME CMX file e A CBLe REXX macro When referenced as a text edit environment variable the CBLiINI variable should include the type of CBLIINI file SYSTEM or USER as the first qualifier e g SUSER Edit LoadWarning USER System PF12 SYSTEM System CmdText 2009 0
43. Command VCAT Command listucat key nbj type c gt Ee eel a a S G a q A ell CBLI DEMO KSDS 56 0 Cc 2 Ix ab CBLI DEMO YO000A KSDS KSDS R 34 Ix CBLIDEMO VO0000 KSDS KSDS 00 CBLIDEMO VO0O000 KSDS oO ll CBLIDEMO V0001 KSDS a toil e Op PeeeeyrerreRRERRRONPERRRNEAONoRNRAE CBLIDEMO V0009 KSDS CBLIDEMO V0010 KSDS ENNY OWNAON 0 I TOOMWWNF Nono AanNoN oo SS AIDA ARAN CBLITEST KSDS DDIR o ll FSU D2008325 7T113835 OUTPUT FSU TEST ESDS FSU TEST KSDS pun JONO NN FSU TEST KSDS2 hi KSDS EPNUWNENOOJEANOMENOP A AONO SELCOPY DEMO KSDS e m w m TEST KSDS O ll NBJ2 DDIR Ra NBJ2 DEV FSU NBJ2 DEV FSU NBJ2 DEV FSU NBJ2 DEV FSU JEBENE W E He Figure 24 CBLVCAT LISTVCAT Raw Data Window 2009 07 20 16 03 29 CBL Interactive CBLi 33 Executing CBLVCAT Raw Data Window vol cb1m05S m View Back Forward FDE Edit Refresh Help Command gt WCAT Command listutoc vol cb1m05S gt GrSIZE Ola alt oS Soc saa hh IL 41115 YSEXEC 00999 m m PREEBBBB 4HO NNNPRRR J MACLIST APF ASM BACKUP ASM PDS 0000000 000 10000000 ono finite ole Tears Qu un Qu pun Od Pu pun 20000000 poof NWSOMNWREE Movee ONJ 9000 0 co E co id e A e in io a SA 000000000000 OoPo00000o0o0o0oo WnorRRBAIIN 000b0 bhLoONooonyrrRPR PP CB CB CB el ene ee PRE WNN oro bbnmun 0 0000000 go SISI DODOPPRR
44. Figure 17 SELCOPY TRACE Window Point and Shoot Popup Menu All CBLe type SELCOPY Interactive windows including the SYSIN SYSIPT and SYSPRINT SYSLST windows support the point and shoot options popup menu The popup menu is opened using the SDBPOPUP edit macro defined on PF4 by default The cursor position within the edited data identifies the focus text to be referenced in items of the point and shoot menu when it is opened Command else Garr Garr marre Next input po Show Pos marre Barr marre Barr marre lt edit gt marre Barr marre Barr marre lt edit gt Edit Keys Figure 18 SELCOPY Point and Shoot Popup Menu Window The menu enables the user to quickly and easily perform the following commonly used tasks CmdText Execute the CBLe CMDTEXT command against the command string text at the focus position Show Pos expression Execute the SELCOPY Interactive CLI command WINDOW POS expr to open a POS storage display window starting at the position defined by expression Show POS entries exist for POS expressions determined by the token on which focus was placed when the menu was opened Possible expressions are 1 The focus token that forms part of a larger positional expression 2 If applicable the full positional expression containing the focus token Show Pos expression lt edit gt Same as the Show Pos entry but instead of executing the WINDOW POS expr command directly it is placed at the edi
45. H A 2381 38 E SYSA SYSA CBLNAMEA 809 cy qe 3 H A Tens 2i al SYSA SYSA CBLVVJIO7 815 BE 3 H A 104 at 1 SYSA SYSA CEEWARC a air ty EE 3 D A a Feb 2 1 SYSA CICSIECF 920 a E 3 H A da ra 10 1 SYSA SYSA CICSIECF 18193 a L 3 H A 308 10 1 SYSA SYSA CICSICCF 1038 a L 3 H A 349 Us 1 SYSA SYSA CICSICCF 1657 B E 3 H A 2178 38 1 SYSA SYSA CICSICCE 1112 E 3 H A 260 1 SYSA SYSA CICSICCF 1118 BSE 3 H 260 1 SYSA SYSA Line 1 0 2 Col Wi sel k ort JobName Number Sfx Figure 32 POWER Command Output window for PDISPLAY LST POWER Command gt Specify the VSE POWER command Note that POWER commands relating to cross partition usage e g PDISPLAY STATUS are not supported Prefix Commands The following prefix line commands are supported for PDISPLAY RDR LST or PUN output only Command blank Prefix Line command E The ENTER key must be pressed with the cursor on the line containing the required entry Delete the entry User will be prompted to verify the deletion li Open the CBLe text editor to edit this entry If an entry is password protected then it may be edited by any user so long as the password is supplied A pop up window will prompt the user for the password Non password protected entries may only be edited if either of the following are true e System TrustedUser Yes in the CBLIINI file e System VSESMLogon Yes in the CBLIINI file and the TO or FROM attributes match the current user s userid Note
46. List Standard Labels Window for VSE DDName gt Select only Label Names that begin with the specified Character string Prefix Line Commands The following prefix line commands are available Command po For VSAM cataloged files only open an IDCAMS Command window and issue an IDCAMS LISTCAT for the entry For VSAM cataloged files only open an Execute CBLVCAT window and issue a LISTVCAT operation for the entry Open a drop down menu containing valid prefix command functions for the list window entry Position the cursor on the required function and hit lt Enter gt to action the command Assigned to PF4 by default gt Open a new window containing a zoomed vertical display of the entry s fields Particularly useful for list windows that have a large number of displayed columns Assigned to PF2 by default Columns Displayed ksze ims ISAM CKD DTFSD BLKSIZE override o Burse int VSAMACBandIDCAMS DEFINE BUFSP override loisize_ int samFBADIFSDCISIZE override ooo Ewtalloo int Number of allocated tracksiblocks 7 Eno ins Extent Sequence Number 7 basta int Start of extent relative trackiblock number lo char Jopencodetorfiey e S E 2009 07 20 16 03 29 CBL Interactive CBLi 75 List Windows List Library Members ovise char pen cisposition Estos ui VBRMSAMRECOROS prina ston ouae RetPeriod int Retention period in number of days Default7 lkecsize_____ Im VSAM ISAM Recordsize o List Library Members Th
47. N 6 0 0 13 SYSi LAC3 SYSDSN SHR OWN SYSTEM N N 6 0 0 13 erile EEE aE ar SYSDSN SHR OWN SYSTEM N N 6 0 0 lond cel B SYSDSN SHR OWN SYSTEM N N 6 0 0 ekani del Sete SYSDSN SHR OWN SYSTEM N N 6 0 0 ebci erk Ael IE SYSDSN SHR OWN SYSTEM N N 6 0 0 eb Shige _ HAC SYSDSN SHR OWN SYSTEM N N 6 0 0 eleni pel LAC3 SYSDSN SHR OWN SYSTEM N N 6 0 0 ebei eigenl Eo ele SYSDSN SHR OWN SYSTEM N N 6 0 0 alte a NBJ2 SYSDSN SHR OWN SYSTEM N N 6 0 0 13 SYSi E 1 Figure 51 Enqueue List window displaying outstanding enqueues with resource name beginning SYS1 in queue SYSDSN Queue Name gt The major name queue name of the ENQ resource This is a 1 8 character upper case name For example dataset allocations are ENQueued with resource name SYSDSN Resource Name gt This is a 1 256 character case sensitive minor name resource name You need only enter the prefix of the resources you are interested in All resources for the given queue with resource beginning with this value are listed Prefix Line Commands The following prefix line commands are available Open a drop down menu containing valid prefix command functions for the list window entry Position the cursor on the required function and hit lt Enter gt to action the command Assigned to PF4 by default gt Open a new window containing a zoomed vertical display of the entry s fields Particularly useful for list windows that have a large number of displayed columns
48. RACF user id Figure 64 MVS Operating System window The MVS Operating System menu consists of the following items PA Open LPA Modules Window LinkList Open Link List Window APFList Open APF List Window Open Task List Window Open Allocated Storage Windows Open Loaded Programs Window LPA Modules Window The LPA Link Pack Area Modules window may be opened via the following e Select LPA from the Operating System window menu e Enter the CBLi command SYSLPA on the command line of any window The LPA Modules window is a List Window and supports the standard List window features i e Field Descriptor Block Edit and Selecting Sorting and Filtering 2009 07 20 16 03 29 CBL Interactive CBLi 108 System Windows LPA Modules Wind Note Not valid for CMS and VSE View Back Forward Refresh Help Command gt D a a I i m I o wy N yn lt Name lt ERAS IFGO239I 00E07000 FLMS7C IVTSMCES IGWAMCS1 oo00000000 00000000005 bbbbbbribnm SEEROOOOGOONn SBPTNODAWMNON DON 0000000001 MNococooooon Sanoennenees Soneonnenecon Tobobrkoboor ORPOSOR O0O0O0OJ OMODWVODOD 1 0000000001 000000000 5000000000mn 00000000017 000000000 1 0000000001 0000000001 AOO9S29000 1 0000000001 20000N0N0N0Z 200000000 mu 2eeonenent DO0So0comnoIni DODOROLAOn 1 2eeecoeneg 000000000 PREBBRBBBED 00 00 00 00 00 00 co 00 co rt 0000000007 0 0 a 0 0 0 a a a 1 Focococono i Mooo0000000 I 3 0 0 0
49. The sort direction is given as A for ascending or D for descending If the sort direction is not provided it defaults to ascending Commas must be used to separate multiple column sort specifications whereupon intervening blanks are permitted SELECT Clause Any valid SELECT clause used to select column headers WHERE Clause Any valid WHERE clause used to filter list rows Sorting with the Cursor A quick way of sorting a list view is to place the cursor on the heading of the column on which you want to sort and then press the lt Enter gt key For fields that contain timestamps and or datestamps the first time the sort is actioned on the column header the data is arranged in descending order For all other column fields the data is initially arranged in ascending order Subsequent sorting on a column header using this method will reverse the order in which data in that column was last sorted List Entry Location A list may be scrolled to display rows beginning at a particular entry simply by overtyping the first column of the first row in the list display area with a string appropriate to that particular field Partial strings may be entered but residue from the overtyped field should be deleted or blanked over otherwise it is included as part of the typed string Similarly strings entered in lower case are automatically upper cased Each field entry within the first column starting at the row following the the first row of the
50. Thereafter the user s access privilage is verified prior to performing any action on potentially protected resources e g listing PDS E library contents and editing data sets In addition to this the security administrator can restrict users access to the following CBLi features using RACF profiles CBLi Feature Access to the Operating System information available via the System menu item on the main F or via the commands SysI SysLPA SysLL SysAPF SysTask SysStor SysPgm and CBLNAME UserTSO Log on to CBLi under TSO and ISPF 2009 07 20 16 03 29 CBL Interactive CBLi 11 Getting started with CBLi Security Considerations Restrictions are implemented via options in the CBLi SYSTEM site wide CBLIINI file and cannot be overridden by an individual s USER CBLIINI file These options must be entered in the RACF section of the CBLIINI file and are as follow ceum Verito Bestia _ _ __ _ _ With RACF ResourceCheck YES in effect users without a minimum of READ access to the specific resource will be rejected In addition to these CBLiINI options RACF or an equivalent security package must be active and a RACF profile must exist that includes the resource name The resource name may be generic for example the profile CBLI with UACC READ would permit all users access to all resources Note that MVS system symbols may be used in the resource names These will be resolved when reading the system CBLIINI
51. an entry is password protected then it may be edited by any user so long as the password is supplied If CBLIINI variable System VSESMLogon No i e no Security Manager is active then EO is only successful if the entry is password protected and the password is specified as a parameter to EO Note Not yet implemented for MVS Parameters jnm The required Job Name jno The required Job Number Note that when a job is submitted using the CBLe SUBMIT command the job number is displayed in the job submitted confirmation message class The required List Class userid The userid of the user that owns the job For VSE this must be the userid on either the TO or FROM LST queue attributes Default is the current user s userid passwd The password to be used when editing a password protected queue entry If the entry is password protected and no password is specified then EO will fail Examples eo LIBRDEL 1551 S View list output for job LIBRDEL having job number 1551 and belonging to list class S For successful operation the job must have TO or FROM LST queue attributes equal to the userid of the current user and CBLIINI variable System VSESMLogon Yes eo CICSICCF 201 A SYSA SECRET View list output for job CICSICCF having job number 201 a TO or FROM attribute of SYSA and belonging to list class A The queue entry is password protected with password SECRET 2009 07 20 16 03 29 CBL Interactive CBLi 130 CBLi Command Line Interfa
52. and members of PDS E libraries whose DSNs match the specified fileid mask are filtered so that only records that are of the record type FX_Part_02 and match the FIND and WHERE criteria are processed by the CHANGE operation SELECT indicates a subset of fields eligible to be searched updated and displayed in the output report Both the FIND and CHANGE arguments further restrict string location update to text within the field Part_Description only 25 Opi cust Description Use the HELP command to open the Help Window and optionally link directly to help on a specific CLI command Where topic is not specified or not found the relevant table of contents is displayed The Help window may also be opened via the Help item of the window s menu bar Parameters topic Display help on a specific topic If topic is enclosed in single or double quotes the string is treated as the fileid of an HTML data set to be browsed This may be the fully qualified fileid of an HTML document or the name of a PDS member that exists in the defualt HELP library Examples HELP Open the Help window contents page HELP CBLe Open the Help window at the CBLe command page H OEM CBL HTML TEST Open a specific HTML document library member H WINSIZEW Open the CBLi Help member name WINSIZEW 2009 07 20 16 03 29 CBL Interactive CBLi 137 CBLi Command Line Interface HELP HOME Syntax oo HOME 3 A Se A ee gt lt Description
53. and or FIND parameters If none of VIEW WHERE and FIND have been specified then CHANGE operates on all records in the specified data set search chain Each change_parms specification is a combination of parameters supported by the SDE CLI command CHANGE For Unstructured File Search i e no SDE Options field references other than 1 or Record that are specified within change_parms are invalid If multiple change_parms combinations are specified each group of CHANGE parameters must be enclosed in parentheses Multiple change_parms combinations must also be separated by either logical AND or logical OR operators Note that a combination of both AND and OR logical operators is invalid If logical operator AND is used CHANGE will execute all the change_parms operations If logical operator OR is used CHANGE will execute each change_parms operation in turn until one successfully changes the data e g FSU INPUT OEM CHANGE c DB8F c DB9G PREFIX ALL AND c CBLI c CBLI160 ALL FSU INPUT DEV USERO1 JCL FIND c EXEC WORD 1 20 CHANGE c IEWL c BIND WORD FIRST 16 80 FSU INPUT DEV TEST DATAX3 USING DEV SDO DATAX3 CH Jo Smith c JS 2 5 OR J W Smith c JS 2 5 Where logical AND is used a change made by a change_parms specification may itself be changed by a subsequent change_parms specification within the same execution of FSU Also each execution of a CHANGE operation will perform a scan for
54. be opened via the prefix command V on any list window entry containing a volser field DASD Volume TOC Extents Command gt volume CBLMOS Device 3390 Address GAAS Cylinders Tracks 150 Tracks Extents 1 Track Cytls DSCBs Trk 50 Track Len Free DSCBs 7152 SMS Indexed Y Frag Index Free IX recs 292 Percent Used Percent Used 5 Cylinders Cylinders 3834 Tracks Tracks 12510 Extents Figure 83 DASD Volume Statistics Window Parameters volser The volume serial number of the volume for which statistics are to be displayed This parameter is placed in the Volume field of the DASD Volume Statistics window Examples VOLSTATS Z2RES1 2009 07 20 16 03 29 CBL Interactive CBLi 171 CBLi Command Line Interface VOLSTATS WINDOWLIST Syntax gt gt WINDOWLIST gt lt WL Description Use this command to open the Window List window which lists all open windows The Window List window may also be opened via the Window item of the CBLi main window menu bar By moving the cursor to the line containing a window and pressing enter the user can close the window list and make the selected window the focus window WINDOWNAMES Syntax gt gt WINDOWNAMES gt lt WN Description This command toggles the display of window names in the title bar When the window names are displayed they are shown left justified in the title bar followed by
55. command SELCOPY Loop Break in The nature of SELCOPY execution is such that statements are executed sequentially or as directed by logic flow operations e g GOTO PERFORM until either the last control statement of the SYSIN SYSIPT input is encountered or a GOTO GET operation is executed When one of these conditions occur and at least one input e g READ and one output e g WRITE PRINT UPDATE operation exists then processing is passed back to the first run time control statement in the control deck 2009 07 20 16 03 29 CBL Interactive CBLi 15 Executing SELCOPY SELCOPY Loop Break in This looping through the control statements will continue until one of the following occurs 1 End of File condition is encountered following an attempted READ of the prime input file and no IF EOF condition exists for the file 2 No further output operations are eligable for execution as a result of a explicit or implicit STOPAFT value e g STOPAFT 50 is implied for LOG output operations and STOPAFT 1 is implied for operations executed based on a true IF INCOUNT condition for equality 3 GOTO EOJ or GOTO CANCEL operation is executed 4 A Selection Time Error is encountered If none of these conditions occur then it is possible to introduce an infinite loop in SELCOPY control statement processing The SELCOPY Interactive debugger may be used to identify the cause of this situation or any sequence of statements that cause the control stateme
56. commands are available Command blank Prefix Line command T The ENTER key must be pressed with the cursor on the line containing the volser Open the FSU File Search Update Window to perform an advanced search and optionally update the contents of the entry T Open the VTOC list window for the volume Open an Execute CBLVCAT window and issue a LISTVTOC operation for the entry Open the volume statistics window for the volume containing the file Open a drop down menu containing valid prefix command functions for the list window entry Position the cursor on the required function and hit lt Enter gt to action the command Assigned to PF4 by default C Open a new window containing a zoomed vertical display of the entry s fields Particularly useful for list windows that have a large number of displayed columns Assigned to PF2 by default Columns Displayed The data displayed for MVS is l UNIT Unit address OL Volume serial number 2009 07 20 16 03 29 CBL Interactive CBLi 59 o lt List Windows List DASD Volumes The data displayed for VSE is 2009 07 20 16 03 29 CBL Interactive CBLi 60 List Windows List Catalog Entries List Catalog Entries The Catalog List window may be opened via the following e Select Cataloged Files from the LIST menu in the CBLi Main Menu e Enter the CBLi command LC on the command line of any window For CMS the File List window is opened in place of the Catalog List
57. completed This ensures that the audit trail exists even if control is not returned from the system routine 2009 07 20 16 03 29 CBL Interactive CBLi 97 Utility Windows Command gt Record type Command Command 3 AN 2 113 CIA IT fsu where i gt gt o 0000041 A ey al tes tee 47 48 File Record type Summary RunType RecordsTot 3 4 BN 10 4 SOS a NE IDError F 34 zMember AN 2 8 gt UPDATE BN SESS 000002 Record type zDsn 3 AN 2 44 SS SRS Se les NBJ JCL FSU EngE BN 23 000003 BINDPKG v 37 117 zRecord H15 AN 38 80 type Hit zMember Zh 6 13 AN 14 8 AN 37 4 lt BINDPLAN BINDPLAN CBLINST CBLIN CBLI Record LOAD LOAD LOAD LOAD GETMEMS GETMEMS CBLICMX ololollo lo ololollo lo NOnononono OIOIOIOIOIO FORDE DOneHne mS Nvovavayv h DDODODONDONDO T la 0 0 0 a a Q N N N N N N S o o viu oorrrre Figure 59 File Search amp Update Output 3 PGM sTot HS 14 4 OS 53 rr Open Ty 1 BN 2 al EXEC EXEC EXEC EXEC EXEC EXEC File Search amp Update Output Command gt Record gt Record type Field 1 Summary RunType RecordsTot FilesTot Hits RecordsHit FilesHit LOErrors ChgErrors ChgRecsErr ChgFilesErr StructureName PO MM NM ho ho ho ho hob ENS PGM IEBCOPY REGION 4M PGM IEBCOPY REGION 0M PGM IEBCOPY REGION 4M PGM IEBCOPY REGION 0M PGM I
58. contents of the report entry as follows 1 If the entry contains the TYPE field USERCAT or ALIAS OF then prefix command VC is default 2 If the entry contains the TYPE field PDS or PDSE then prefix command M Member List is default 3 If the entry contains a fileid then prefix command E Edit is default 2 The VC prefix command performs LISTVCAT VTOC operations based on the contents of the entry fields as follow 1 If the entry contains the TYPE field USERCAT then a new report is generated for the entire contents of that catalog Otherwise only list the catalog entries that match the fileid 2 If the report entry also contains a VOLn volser field then generate a LISTVTOC report for entries that match the fileid in the volume s VTOC Columns Displayed VCAT output report line Raw Data Window The CBLVCAT Raw window may be opened via the following e Select Raw from the menu item of the Execute CBLVCAT window e Enter the CBLi command LVR on the command line of any window Where CBLVCAT arranges data in a printable report format the CBLV Raw Data window provides a list of all report field data accumulated by CBLVCAT in order to generate the report The CBLVCAT Raw window has the same characteristics as a CBLi List window including selecting sorting and filtering of row and column data and point and shoot sorting on column headers CBLYCAT Raw Listvucat key nb ij view Back Forward FDE Edit Refresh Hen
59. cursor is positioned on a horizontal border the border is dragged one row downwards when on a vertical border the border is dragged one column to the right and when on a corner the border is dragged both one row downwards and one column to the right The border will not be positioned outside the display area in which it is defined e MDI child window borders cannot be dragged outside its parent s client area and all other windows cannot be dragged outside the 3270 display area Similarly CBLi will not allow the window borders to be dragged so that the window is smaller than 3 rows x 8 columns By default DRAGBORDERPLUS is assigned to Border PFKeys F8 and F11 2009 07 20 16 03 29 CBL Interactive CBLi 128 CBLi Command Line Interface DRAGBORDERPLUS EDIT Syntax gt gt Edit te SS Se SSS SSS gt lt fileid a PROFILE macroname A NOPROFile n t HFS Opts E Description Use the EDIT command to open a CBLe text edit window view to edit a file read write If the CBLe text editor main window has been stopped EDIT will start the CBLe main window before opening the edit view of the requested file If the file has a VSE LIBR LOCK applied or an exclusive MVS SPFEDIT ENQ to a different job id then the Enqueue Failed pop up window is displayed containing message EDT015E prompting the user to edit the file in read only mode Read only edit may be invoked di
60. field is used 4 No scrolling parameter is specified and no Scroll gt field is present so a defualt of one line is used By default this command is assigned to function key PF8 Parameters windowname The window name of the window in which the display is to be scrolled If not supplied then the window in which the command is issued via a command line or function key is assumed CURSOR The line on which the cursor is positioned becomes the first line of the scrolled display If the cursor is positioned outside the display area or on the first line within the display area then DOWN PAGE is executed instead DATA Scroll down to display one page display window depth less one line of data The last line in the current display area becomes the first line of the scrolled display 2009 07 20 16 03 29 CBL Interactive CBLi 127 CBLi Command Line Interface DOWN HALF Scroll down half a page of data The line that is half way down the page of data in the current display area becomes the first record of the scrolled display MAX Scroll down to display the last page of data Where more than one page of data exists the last displayable line becomes the last line of the scrolled display Otherwise the first line of data becomes the first line of the scrolled display PAGE Scroll down to display the next whole page of data The line following the last line of the current display area becomes the first line of the scrolled display
61. file e g RACF DB2 CBLI amp SYSNAME DB2 Interactive SQL resource name Please see the distributed CMX file amp PREFIX CBLI CMX RACF for samples of commands useful in administering CBLi RACF resource restrictions CBLi Clipboard CBLi supports a clipboard facility to allow users to Copy Cut and Paste data between windows running in the CBLi environment that support clip board functions At this time clipboard facilities are only supported in CBLe and SDE edit and browse views e g Data copied to the clipboard from an edit view in the SELCOPY Interactive application may be pasted to an edit view in the CBLe text edit application Note that the CBLi clipboard is not associated with any other clipboard facility offered by the system 2009 07 20 16 03 29 CBL Interactive CBLi 12 Executing SELCOPY 1 Invoking SELCOPY Interactive 2 Load Library Search Chain 3 SELCOPY Interactive Windows 4 SELCOPY Interactive Commands 5 SELCOPY Interactive Function Keys Invoking SELCOPY Interactive The SELCOPY Interactive application window is started via the following e Select Execute SELCOPY from the File menu in the CBLi window main menu e Enter the CBLi command SELCOPY on the command line of any window See also the CBLe macro JCLCMxX which is a pre processor tool used to convert MVS JCL decks containing SELCOPY steps into a format suitable for input to SELCOPY Interactive Simply edit the JCL deck using CBLe
62. gt A Alias Type A Regular S SymLink P SymPath Alia cancel Figure 33 Create ALIAS Dialog window Library gt The DSN of the PDS E library This may be a LOAD Library Member gt The library member name for which an alias will be generated Alias gt The new alias name to be generated Entry gt For load library aliases only the symbolic name of the entry point address to be used AMode gt For a load library aliasses only the Addressing Mode for the entry point specified in Entry gt Valid arguments are 24 31 and ANY AType gt For a load library aliasses only the alias type to be generated Valid arguments are A Regular S SymLink P SymPath 2009 07 20 16 03 29 CBL Interactive CBLi 46 Execute IEBCOPY The IEBCOPY Dialog window may be opened via the following e Select Execute IEBCOPY from the FILE menu in the CBLi Main Menu e Enter the CBLi command IEBCOPYDIALOG on the command line of any window e Enter the List window prefix command C against a PDS E entry in a Dataset List or Catalog List or any entry within in a Library List The IEBCOPY Dialog provides an intuitive interface to copy PDS E libraries or individual members to a new or existing target library Select Copy to perform the IEBCOPY in the foreground or JCL to generate a batch job stream in a CBLe text edit view Having selected JCL the user can issue JOBCARD to insert a skeleton JOB statement before executing SUB t
63. handled by the CBLi window management software See the CBLe ALLOCATE command and where the SELCOPY statements form part of an MVS batch stream use the CBLe JCLCMX REXX macro to configure the environment prior to starting SELCOPY Interactive 2009 07 20 16 03 29 CBL Interactive CBLi 13 Executing SELCOPY Invoking SELCOPY Interactive SELCOPY File View Go StepOver StepInto ReRun Window Help SSDEMOG1 2 218 Y PDSE d A a unnatansa Seen a tenes Banaat 1 C1iC2D509 FOF14040 4040C1CZ ESFOF140 AMRA 0000365 Barr marr 000037 memloop Loop to build array of member names 000035 if Barr gt marr marrl 1 it Plog Array exceeded it eoj 000039 EE s09090 40404040 4040840 404094040 My 000040 17 40404 000091 33 40404 000092 49 40404 0000943 rd Pdsi_dsn ini dir into Barr Directory records only 65 40404 dl al AA 40404040 40405040 000094 pos Barr 8 Barr lreci 1 Blank rest of record fol 17 EZSS906E Y BAZ A4979795 99437440 Y 0000495 33 40400306 EeCeDSCS CiEZCS40 40409540 000046 if eof pdsi ithen dummy 49 C1E34097 40404040 40404040 40404040 E 000097 else Garr Barr marre Next input position ES 000045 then soto memloop IRC TO 000049 memloope Command Command MN pred 1 00000003 1 90000002 1 00000001 000OSZ print from marr Garr marre 1 Print array for debug SPRINT NBJZ SELCOPY EMOO1 SYSPRINT 000053 Command 000054 pos tot len totl gt F i Initialise to hex zeroes powotecostdeccstessetecs 000055 pos mat len matl
64. have a standard layout which consists of the following components Not all windows have all these components but where present they occupy the same relative position in the window and have the same function The Title Bar The title bar contains the title of the window The System Menu Button The system menu button is at the left end of the title bar If pressed the options of the system menu are displayed in a popup menu The Minimise Button The minimise button is at the right end of the title bar It is represented as a single minus sign in white reverse video If the window is minimised then the minus sign is replaced by a solid vertical bar representing restore The Restore Button The Restore button is displayed in place of the Minimise or Maximise button when a window is in a minimised or maximised state respectively It is represented by a solid vertical bar in white reverse video The Maximise Button The maximise button is at the right end of the title bar It is represented as a single plus sign in white reverse video If the window is maximised then the plus sign is replaced by a solid vertical bar representing restore The Close Button The close button is at the right end of the title bar It is represented as an x in red reverse video The Menu Bar The menu bar occupies one or more lines below the title bar It contains optional functions which can be invoked by moving the cursor to the menu item and pressing enter Some menu items
65. in each qualifier If the last character of the fileid mask is dot period then this marks the end of the low level DSN qualifier within the fileid mask The trailing is stripped and no wildcard string is appended to the fileid mask e g DEV becomes DEV DEV OEM TRSPAN becomes DEV OEM TRSPAN DEV SAMP becomes DEV SAMP If the last character of the fileid mask is not dot period then a default trailing wild card string is automatically appended to the fileid mask as follows 1 If the fileid mask is a single qualifier or the last character of the fileid mask is asterisk then a wildcard string of is appended e g DEV becomes DEV DEV becomes DEV DEV OEM TRSPAN becomes DEV OEM TRSPAN DEV SPA becomes DEV SPA 2 Otherwise a wildcard string of is appended e g DEV OEM TRSPAN becomes DEV OEM TRSPAN DEV SPAS becomes DEV SPAS sYs1 219 becomes SYS1 219 ER Note that a warning message is displayed if the high level qualifier of the fileid mask is asterisk or double asterisk A fileid mask of this type would result in all catalogs being searched which would take some time to execute and would use a large amount of system resources 0 For VSE systems the fileid mask is a valid CBLVCAT LISTCAT KEY parameter string i e entries with file name beginning with the specified string or if prefixed by slash entries with
66. in which the command is issued via a command line or function key is assumed MDINEXT Syntax gt gt MDINEXT gt lt Description For use in MDI applications only e g CBLe and SELCOPY Interactive this command sets the focus window to be the next MDI child window in the ring of MDI child windows The MDI application s ring of child windows is maintained in creation sequence and wraps round from the last created to the first created MDIPREV Syntax gt gt MDIPREV gt lt Description For use in MDI applications only e g CBLe and SELCOPY Interactive this command sets the focus window to be the previous MDI child window in the ring of MDI child windows The MDI application s ring of child windows is maintained in creation sequence and wraps round from the first created to the last created MINIMISE Syntax gt gt MINIMISE gt lt Io MIN windowname Description This command minimises the specified window This command is equivalent to selecting the Minimise Button of the window to be minimised Parameters windowname The window name of the window to minimise If not supplied then the window in which the command is issued via a command line or function key is assumed 2009 07 20 16 03 29 CBL Interactive CBLi 151 CBLi Command Line Interface MINIMISE MOVEWINDOW Syntax X 1 Y 1 a A a E Oe E gt gt MOVE
67. jZ O slo a e 2 jg jo J o O w Q O gt 2009 07 20 16 03 29 CBL Interactive CBLi 119 CBLi Command Line Interface ALIAS ALIAS Syntax Po a ee V A ALIAS f mendnnee Shes eeesesee library member alias gt lt AMODE 24 nee ANY ENTRY entry_name Description Use the ALIAS command to create a new PDS PDSE library member alias or open Create ALIAS dialog window Note that aliases for load library members are created using the binder to relink the module in being aliased This will result in an update to the module s TTR Use of the DLG parameter invokes the Create ALIAS dialog window which is also available through the A prefix command in a Library List window Parameters library member The PDS PDSE library member be be aliased alias The alias name to be added AMODE For a load library member used to specify the Addressing Mode for the new aliased entry point Valid arguments are 24 31 and ANY DLG Invoke the Create Alias dialog window ENTRY entry_name For a load library member used to specify the symbolic name of the entry point address to be used Examples lt alias JGE CBLINST D070919 EXE COPY I141 CBLI lt alias JGE CBLINST D070919 EXE COPY I141 CBLAVTAM entry VCIAVTAM lt alias JGE CBLINST D070919 EXE COPY I141 CBLIVTAM entry VCIRV
68. m4 E o e e le cle de eo de I ca ci de le a a a a A TUT TT MNN bum Figure 3 Function Keys Window Columns Displayed PFKeys 01 24 Non enterable field DELAY Determine whether the associated command is executed immediately when the function key is hit or merely placed on the local command line Valid entries are Y or N BEFORE Determine whether the associated command is executed before or after any other CBL3270 screen input e g a command line command or prefix area command Valid entries are Y or N untitled The command s associated with the PFKey For CBLe a number of commands may be issued if separated by an appropriate separator character Default Function Keys The CBLi Window Class and Borders function keys are unassigned by default The CBLi Default function keys are assigned to the following unless overridden by the SYSTEM USER CBLi INIFILE Display data at the top of a scrollable window Display data at the bottom of a scrollable window Close the window in which the cursor is positioned N B not necessarily the current focus window CmdText Issue command at the cursor position if prefixed by lt less than otherwise place text on the command line Pre Sooo U O Scroll up the file so that the current focus line becomes the last line of the display Scroll down the file so that the current focus line becomes the first line of the display NextMainWindow Place focus on the next main wind
69. of the CHANGE search string within the input record is to be changed Since each execution of CHANGE operates on the full width of selected data within the record NEXT and PREV CHANGE parameters are equivalent to FIRST and LAST respectively and so are not included as CHANGE options Unlike execution of CHANGE in an SDE edit window CHANGE for the File Search amp Update utility processes one record at a time not the entire file Therefore FIRST and LAST does not refer to the first and last occurrence in the file but the first and last occurrence within the selected data width of the input record CHANGE ALL is selected by default If CHANGE FIRST or LAST is required then enter in the appropriate parameter field Note that these fields are mutually exclusive from Specify a single SDE CHANGE format search string to Specify a single SDE CHANGE format replace string Start Col Specifies the start or only position or field column within the input records from which the scan for the change search string will begin Record data in positions or columns before the start column is not searched If a numeric value is entered then it is treated as a position in the input records For a structured file search i e a structure is specified via the USING field Start Col may contain a field name e g Emp_Name or a field reference number e g 5 instead of a position If a multiple field range or a more complex combination of field reference
70. or single or double quotes but are only mandatory if the value itself contains a single or double quote or an asterisk The outer encompassing quotes are not stored as part of the variable s value A null value is also acceptable Comments may be included by prefixing the comment text with an asterisk either the whole line or after the setting of a variable The case of the variable names is ignored The case of the variable values may or may not be significant depending on the use of the variable There is no check for duplication of variable setting The last value set in the CBLIINI file takes precedence Sections each starting with a nnnnn first level variable name may be in any order Furthermore sections may be split i e nnnnn lines may be repeated e g System Edit System Assign CBLIINI Variables CBIiINI variables may be inserted using either of the following methods e Execute the CBLe CLI command SET INIVAR The variable is set with immediate effect and gets automatically inserted in the USER CBLIINI file when the CBLi session is ended normally e Manually edit the changes in the relevant USER or SYSTEM CBLIINI file and save The alterations are not immediate and will only take effect when CBLi is re started The following CBLiINI variables are updated automatically when the CBLi session ends normally if the associated CBLe SET command has been issued during the session BLiINI Variable
71. or Dataset List window and displays information about files residing on accessed mini disks Refer to documentation on List CMS Files For VSE the Catalog List window is supported only where the CBL software product CBLVCAT is installed and active The Catalog List window uses CBLVCAT to read the specified VSAM catalog records to obtain information about the cataloged files For MVS the Catalog List window displays the basic catalog entry information for ICF cataloged data sets The Dataset List window should be used to display more detailed information on cataloged data sets Entry CBL Catalog USERCAT CBLCAT Vol DevC FSe CBLMOZ DASD CBLMO3 DASD CBLMOBG6 DASD CBLMOY DASD CBLMOS DASD CBLMO4 DASD CBLMO4 DASD CBLMOS DASD CBLMOY DASD CBLMOY DASD CBLMOS DASD CBLMOS DASD CBLMOZ DASD CBLMOS3 DASD CBLMO 7 DASD Ort EDEry Yoe AMALL DA AMALL EBCDIC DA AMCUST DA AMSUPP DA AMSUPP DA COPY APAR DBTOOL APAR DBTOOL FTP APAR DBTOOL LST 143 DODOOOoOoOoOo0ooooa y opii Tii Me reee ee a pa e e pa a a Nococoococococococon DDIDDDDDDDDDDDDD a E Figure 39 MVS Catalog List Window View Back Forward FDB Edit Refresh Help Command gt Entry gt Catalog gt CBLUCT2 SSI lAs gt Solis sees Solel pos Saler GA EE SETE DBXRRDS RRDS Mola EE rol 6l 2383 k 0 C 160 3600 c 200 1 m T4 a NSM jJWVONSSrFoON ttt tttn Anttet CBL CBL CBL CBL CBL CBL CBL CBL CBL CBL
72. or PDS members and subsequently produce a report of those records where a data string was found and optionally updated Furthermore it may be necessary to locate and change only values in particular fields within records that are mapped by a defined structure e g a COBOL or PL 1 copy book and match specific criteria e g In a structured file containing employee data find all records where the employee name is Smith and where salary is greater than 20 000 The FSU File Search and Update utility allows users to perform these tasks and more via an intuitive dialog window or the CBLi CLI command FSU The functionality and features provided by the structured data environment SDE are used by FSU to perform the advanced record selection and update Consequently the FSU utility is only available to users who have a licensed version of SELCOPY installed and operational on their system A report of records found and or records updated is presented to the user in an SDE window view During execution a progress window is displayed which allows the user to interrupt processing using the Attention key FSU File Search Update Window The FSU File Search Update window may be opened via the following e Select File search update from the Utilities menu e Execute the command FSU with no parameters from the command line of any window e Execute the prefix command F from an Execute CBLVCAT or file List type window 2009 07 20 16 03 29
73. required catalogs are searched and the last catalog searched placed in the Catalog gt field An asterisk may be specified to imply the default catalog name This need only be specified if the types parameter is to be used For VSE systems this is a disk label assigned to the VSAM catalog for which entries are to be listed Default for both MVS and VSE is the master catalog The catalog string is placed in the Catalog field of the Catalog List window types Specifies the catalog entry types required Default is all types One or more of the following types may be specified with no intervening blanks Bo o o 0 MVS Generationdatagroup gt gt Cluster Alternate Index MVS Generation data set Roo VSAM PATH Default is to display entries of all types The types string is placed in the Types field of the Catalog List window See Also LD Examples le CBL C List MVS cataloged entries matching the fileid mask CBL C Le CBL SYS A List MVS non VSAM cataloged entries matching the fileid mask CBL SYS le IJSYSCT U List user catalogs in the VSE VSAM master catalog le VSESPUC CICS List all files containing the string CICS in the VSE VSAM catalog VSESP USER CATALOG fl CBL EXEC List CMS files that match the fileid mask CBL EXEC A 2009 07 20 16 03 29 CBL Interactive CBLi 142 CBLi Command Line Interface LD Syntax gt gt LD se s o Sn a Poses esSsesee
74. shoot options provided through the PF4 key SdbPopup MVS JCL decks SELCOPY Interactive handling of MVS JCL decks can be acheived using the JCLCMX pre processor tool JCLCMX is a REXX macro that must be be run from within the CBLe file editor Simply edit the JCL deck using CBLe then key in JCLCMX from the edit command line The tool will generate a CBLi ALLOC command corresponding to each DD statement and a CALL command corresponding to each EXEC statement Where EXEC PGM SELCOPY is encountered the appropriate SELCOPY Interactive invocation command is generated The commands generated by JCLCMX are not immediately executed but presented to the user in separate editable CMX files one for each job step ready for individual point and shoot execution using the PF4 key CMDTEXT in the standard CBLi fashion Parameters CTL selcctl The full fileid or an already defined DD FILEDEF DLBL of the file containing the SELCOPY control statements LIB libpath For MVS SELCOPY jobs only a list of load libraries to be included before the current environment s search library chain This is equivalent to supplying a JCL STEPLIB statement in a batch job and so may be used to control which SELCOPY module is executed and also any routines executed via the SELCOPY CALL statement Libpath may be one of the following 0 A DDname which has been pre allocated to one or more load libraries 0 One or more load library DSNs separated by commas s
75. specification SELECT select_clause For Structured File Search only SELECT specifies the fields within the selected record type that are to be included within the FSU FIND and CHANGE operations SELECT also provides the order in which fields are to be searched by the FIND and CHANGE operations The select_clause specification is identical to that supported by the SDE CLI command SELECT If SELECT is not specified then all fields will be searched in the order in which they occur within the record type RTO definition An error message is returned if FIND find_parms and or CHANGE change_parms include references to fields not included by SELECT select_clause UPDATE NOUPDATE NOUPDATE indicates that records that would be altered by the CHANGE operation are not to be written to disk so allowing the user to first verify that the changes are correct in the output report before re running the FSU command with UPDATE If UPDATE is specified records altered by the CHANGE operation are written to disk replacing the previous copy of the record Default is NOUPDATE USING STRUCTURE struct_name Indicates that Structured File Search is to be used by specifying the Structure Definition Object SDO to be applied to the selected input files The struct_name specification is identical to that supported by the USING parameter of the SDE CLI command EDIT Where USING is not specified Unstructured File Search is used VIEW record_type For Structured Fi
76. specified by the VIEW parameter or default record type if VIEW is not specified However unlike FIND and CHANGE WHERE may reference fields that do not exist within the subset of fields specified by the SELECT parameter 2009 07 20 16 03 29 CBL Interactive CBLi 136 CBLi Command Line Interface FSU WHERE is mandatory if FIND and CHANGE parameters are omitted Examples Use of the CLI FSU command may result in long command streams Therefore it is recommended that any FSU command should be entered as text in your HOME command centre CMX data set lt sdata fsu input XRVHC PROCLIB SYS1 PROCLIB find DSN710 Report any member records within the specified PROCLIB libraries that contain the string DSN710 lt sdata fsu input XRVHC PROCLIB SYS1 PROCLIB change DSN710 DSN810 ALL For member records within the specified PROCLIB libraries report records that contain the string DSN710 followed by the records appearance after replacing all occurrences of DSN710 to DSN810 Members records are not updated lt sdata fsu INPUT SAR22 TEST FX USING SAR22 FX100 COBOL COPYBK SDO VIEW FX_Part_02 SELECT Part_ID Serial_No Batch_No Part_Description WHERE Batch_No gt 730 AND Fault_Type gt gt RTB OR Quantity lt 200 FIND c Nut PREFIX Part_Description CHANGE screw bolt WORD Part_Description NOUPDATE aaa aaa s A Structured File Search and Replace Records from data sets
77. supported in the name portion of the HFS path The name portion of the HFS path is the character string at the end of the path that follows the last slash of the fileid or is the entire path name if is not spe cified Beacuse FSU supports comment specification text enclosed between and Where the HFS file name wild card asterisk is to be used following a directory separator slash the HFS path must me enclosed in single quotes apostrophes or double quotes e g u ibmuser tmp Search all files in this directory 3 A DSN Mask and optionally a Volume Mask and or multiple PDS E Member Masks in the following format volmask data set name mask membmask membmask Fileid masks must not be enclosed in quotes TSO prefix is not used Wild card characters percent asterisk and double asterisk are supported See SDE FSU File Search Update Window documentation for use of wild cards in the Volume DSN and Member masks Similarly one or more member masks may be specified between a single pair of parentheses Multiple PDS E member masks must be separated by a commma and or one or more intervening blanks e g DI EV88 CBL S ELC MAN XM J All sequential VSAM and PDS E data sets that match a specified fileid mask are selected for input If one of these data sets is a PDS E library then all members of that library will be se
78. systems programmer to establish this When configured there should never be any need to toggle back to TSO screen management The supplied REXX macro CBLII may be used to run CBLi as an ISPF application with applid CBLI If CBLi is not defined as an ISPF application then when ISPF screen manager is used CBLi function key definitions will be interpreted differently to those defined in CBLi In this case it is recommended that passing control to ISPF should only be carried out temporarily to perform ISPF explicit functions Toggling between ISPF and TSO screen management may also be achieved via the Use TSO ISPF item of the System Menu Parameters ispf_command ISPF command to be issued 2009 07 20 16 03 29 CBL Interactive CBLi 138 CBLi Command Line Interface ISPF Examples ISPF Set TSO as the screen manager if current screen management is done by ISPF or set ISPF as the screen manager if current screen management is done by TSO ISPF SPLIT Set ISPF as the screen manager if not already so and execute ISPF SPLIT command so that the screen is split at the current cursor position ISPFUTIL Syntax gt gt ISPFUTIL gt lt e 7 Description When running CBLI in ISPF the CBLi command ISPFUTIL starts the ISPF Utility Selection Panel The ISPF panel is started as a full screen application which returns control to CBLi only after it is closed The ISPF Utility Selection Panel may also be started via th
79. that VSE Basic Security Manager BSM alone does not impose access restrictions on the VSE POWER Delete Kill the entry without prompting for verification 2009 07 20 16 03 29 CBL Interactive CBLi 43 Execute POWER Prefix Commands Columns Displayed The data displayed for PDISPLAY ALL LST PUN RDR is Type TARGET DESTINATION USER REMOTE ID ORIGINATING USER REMOTE ID CENTURY OF CREATION DATE REATION DATE OF QUEUE ENTRY TART TIME OHHMMSSF TOP TIME OHHMMSSF ECORD LENGTH RECORD TYPE TAPE BAM VOLUME NUMBER USER INFORMATION CONTROL FLAG 1 RECORD FORMAT PAPER STATUS BYTE NUMBER OF LINES CARDS SPOOLED FLASH IDENTIFIER COPY GROUPINGS CONTROL FLAG 2 NUMBER OF SEP PAGES CARDS ORIGINAL JOB NUMBER COMPACTION TABLE NAME TARGET DESTINATION NODE NAME RIGINATING NODE NAME UBSYSTEM NAME EXTERNAL WRITER ID EXT DUE DATE NEXT DUE TIME QUEUE ENTRY NUMBER QUEUE ENTRY SECURITY ZONE SECNODE OUTPUT DISTRIBUTION CODE NON SHARED ACCESS COUNT SHARED SYSID 1 ACC CNT SHARED SYSID 2 ACC CNT SHARED SYSID 3 ACC CNT 2009 07 20 16 03 29 CBL Interactive CBLi 44 OB NAME OB NUMBER OB SUFFIX NUMBER UEUE IDENTIFIER R L P YSTEM ID TARGET PROCESS RIORITY DISPOSITION IN EXEC CLASS NUMBER OF RECORDS SPOOLED NUMBER OF PAGES SPOOLED NUMBER OF COPIES FORMS IDENTIFIER obName Number Cards O Form o DM O O T 0 Z E 3 O From 5 Date tart top PXFMRLEN
80. the configuration of windows within the SELCOPY Interactive MDI environment The user can save and subsequently restore the characteristics of the current MDI child window or all currently open MDI child windows Alternatively the user can select the default configuration for the current or all SELCOPY Interactive MDI child windows Default Restore Save Figure 21 SELCOPY Window Layout Popup Menu Edit Keys Debug Keys Certain default PFKey assignments for CBLe text edit differ to defaults set up for the SELCOPY Interactive environment This entry enables the user to toggle between the CBLe Edit default keys and SELCOPY Interactive Debug keys as follow PFKey eit ________ ewig SELCOPY Interactive Commands You can issue SELCOPY Interactive commands from the command line at the Command gt prompt Most SELCOPY Interactive main window menu options have a command line equivalent Command Description Key STEPINTO Step Trace Into sub routines STEPOVER Step Trace Over sub routines Track a SELCOPY POS expression Open a specified SELCOPY Interactive window See SELCOPY Interactive Function Keys for complete list of default PFKeys 2009 07 20 16 03 29 CBL Interactive CBLi 24 Executing SELCOPY SELCOPY Interactive Commands BREAKPOINT Syntax gt gt BReakpoint gt lt Description Use the BREAKPOINT command to set or unset a permanent BReak point at the focus s
81. this item or hit PF2 to generate the SDE FSU CLI command syntax see below for the parameters entered by the user The generated FSU command is displayed in a temporary CBLe text edit window in a format suitable for execution using CMDTEXT PF4 The user has the opportunity to edit the command prior to its execution and or copying it to the home CMX command centre for future reference and re execution GenerateCLI should be used where 1 One or more of the fields within the File Search Update window is not sufficiently large enough to contain the entered text 2 More than one FIND condition and or CHANGE condition is required The File Search 8 Update engine supports multiple FIND conditions and CHANGE conditions specified with intervening logical AND or logical OR operators Help Open the General Help for the File Search Update window Field Entries By default field entries are populated with arguments and options that were entered the last time the File Search Update window was used The current value of each field is stored as a CBLIINI variable when focus is removed from the dialog window These variables are subsequently saved under the FSU section of the USER CBLiINI data set when the CBLi session is ended normally Most field entries are optional and need to be enabled by entering in the activation field which precedes the field INPUT Identify the data sets to be searched This is achieved by entering one or more fil
82. to edit this entry Open the FSU File Search Update Window to perform an advanced search and optionally update the contents of the entr Delete Kill the entry without prompting for verification Rename the entry Open the SDE BROWSE EDIT Dialog Window to browse or edit the entry s data within a Structured Data Environment window view Opens the general file utilities menu to ultimately generate specific line commands in a temporary CMX file Open the CBLe text editor to View edit read only this entry Open a drop down menu containing valid prefix command functions for the list window entry Position the cursor on the required function and hit lt Enter gt to action the command Assigned to PF4 by default E F K SD 4 Open a new window containing a zoomed vertical display of the entry s fields Particularly useful for list windows that have a large number of displayed columns Assigned to PF2 by default Columns Displayed The data displayed is Name Filename Dir entry type Bytes Used Low Order Modified Data Modified Timestamp Permission Permissions as displayed for the LS shell command Path Path Owner Owner name Group Group name mt File Format Links Number of links HFS Mode nnn et user ID on execution GrpX BitFlag et group ID on execution Stick BitFlag Sticky Bit ile Serial Number INode ev Device ID DevMaj Major Device number DevMin Minor Device number Bytes Used High Order d finn O
83. value and an arithmetic compare will occur for numeric data fields For non numeric fields and unstructured file searches all search strings are treated as character data and a logical string compare is performed If more than one FIND search string is required enter details of the first search string in the FIND field then select GenerateCLI PF2 from the menu bar or simply hit PF2 to edit the FSU CLI command and add further FIND conditions Note that each group of FIND parameters that constitute a single FIND condition must be separated by either a logical AND or a logical OR and must be enclosed in parentheses e g FIND c James Kirk AND c Spock WORD If logical AND is specified all FIND conditions must be satisfied before the record is selected If logical OR is specified any of the FIND conditions must be satisfied before the record is selected FIND conditions separated by a mixture of logical AND and logical OR operators is not permitted If this is required the WHERE clause should be used in place of or in addition to the FIND The FIND fields are as follow FIND Specifies a single SDE FIND format search string In order to include a FIND operation and hence any of the other fields associated with FIND within the FSU operation the FIND field must be enabled by entering in the activation field Start Col Specifies the start or only position or field column within the input records from which t
84. when activated display popup submenus The menu items have the 3270 unprotected attribute so they can be selected by the tab key which tabs to enterable fields Any data entered into a menu item is ignored Menu items may be enabled or disabled When enabled they are displayed in white When disabled they are displayed in blue and selecting them will have no effect The Client Area The client area of a window is the main body of the window and its contents vary depending on the class of the window The Command Line The command line is an area of the window into which text commands may be entered Most menu items have a command line equivalent text command Pressing buttons The 3270 architecture is such that the host is only informed of user input when a certain class of key is pressed on the keyboard These keys are those with attention identifiers and typically consist of the function keys the enter key the Program Attention PA keys and a few other specialised keys Even when operating under the control of a workstation 3270 emulator the 3270 host application is not sensitive to mouse movements except in the case when the emulator allows the user to assign a particular 3270 function to the mouse buttons Because of this 3270 window buttons cannot be pressed in the same way as work station window buttons 3270 window buttons are pressed by 1 Moving the cursor to the button and 2 Pressing the enter key Window Focus The fo
85. within a Structured Data Environment window view Supported for MVS SELCOPY licensees only Issue a LISTVCAT operation against the entry with parameters TUNE and DEFINE For DASD Listwindows only open the VTOC list window for the volume entry Unallocate the MVS DD name or UNLOCK the VSE LIBR member entry Entries may only be unallocated or unlocked by the user that originally allocated or locked it Opens the general file utilities menu to ultimately generate specific line commands in a temporary CMX file ion usi ng point and shoot buy ent eri ng opt di on number Create CLI Command Line Interface i temp CMX file eat EDIT ALLOCate Exit utilities menu without action EQU VariableNamex Miscellaneous List ALLOCs for fileid Create DD card Create SELCOPY batch job Figure 38 File Utilities Menu Options are selected by entering the required option number at the command prompt or executing the equivalent PFKey Executable CLI line commands are generated using the selected entry fileid as follows 12 ALLOCate caidos f MYDDNAME reuse shr dsn fileid 6 Create DD card 7 Create SELCOPY batch job FILEUTIL EXEC PGM SELCOPY MYDDNAME DD DISP SHR DSN NBJ APFLIB SYSPRINT DD SYSOUT SYSIN DD option worklen 65536 NoRdw read MYDDNAME print len 100 type b stopaft 22 Open the CBLe text editor to View edit read only the entry Open an Execute CBLVCAT window and issue a LISTVCAT a
86. within the structure of the column data Length The length of the column data field within the structure Note that if one or more levels of indirection to the column data field exist then the structure contains an address field length 4 Title Descriptive name for the field column Displen The length of the longest entry displayed in the column Digits The number of decimal digits precision displayed for column data of numerical data type Scale The number of scale digits fraction digits displayed for column data of numerical data type Because the FDB window is itself a List window with its column data attributes referenced by an internal data structure it too may be described by an FDB and is subject to all supported list window functions SELECT SORT WHERE etc Field Descriptor Element View Back Forward FDB Edit Refresh Command gt Name Type Key Offset Length DispLen Di Int N 3 Decimal digits precision 2 Int No Field display length BitFlag Field is a key Ime Field length VChar Field name Int Field offset Int Decimal scale fraction digits VChar Field title Name Figure 36 FDB for FDB window Edit View The contents of the current list view may be edited and saved to disk e Select Edit from the list window menu bar 2009 07 20 16 03 29 CBL Interactive CBLi 50 List Windows Edit View e Enter the CLI command EDIT on the list window command line A CBLe text editor window is opened t
87. 1 Open an IDCAMS Command window and issue an IDCAMS LISTCAT forthe entry la llLstdatasetenqueues major name SYSDSN for this entry Open the SDE BROWSE EDIT Dialog Window to browse or edit the entry s data within a Structured Data Environment window view Open an Execute CBLVCAT window and issue a LISTVCAT TUNE DEFINE operation for the entry Opens the general file utilities menu to ultimately generate specific line commands in a temporary CMX file V Open the CBLe text editor to View edit read only this entry VC Open an Execute CBLVCAT window and issue a LISTVCAT operation for the entry Perform a compress of an MVS PDS library to reclaim disk space occupied by replaced back level members This action performs an IEBCOPY to itself No action is taken for PDSE entries however the IEBCOPY dialog is opened with an error message if executed against any non PDS E Open the volume statistics window for the volume containing the entry Open a drop down menu containing valid prefix command functions for the list window entry Position the cursor on the required function and hit lt Enter gt to action the command Assigned to PF4 by default T SD T z Open a new window containing a zoomed vertical display of the entry s fields Particularly useful for list windows that have a large number of displayed columns Assigned to PF2 by default For VSE systems the following prefix line commands are available Comma
88. 2 CBLEDIT 3 XEDIT VSE CBLIINI file example MacroPath LIB USER LIB1 SYS LIB2 SYS PROC PFnn cmd Where nn can be 01 24 PF1 PF9 also supported Set the default CBLe editor PFkeys for INTERFACE CBLe mode operation These apply to any CBLe edit window The following are the defaults set by the program quit k Macro DIOCK GOWN majo IMDINext oo 0 letha 2009 07 20 16 03 29 CBL Interactive CBLi 187 CBLIINI control file CBLIINI Standard Variables sos linedel Sp tjin mark DOX a a OD ECommand move block ommand delete block Indo SizeWarning nnn nnnK nnnM The maximum size number of bytes of a file that may be edited without opening the file size warning popup window This only applies to files where the size may be determined prior to its load into storage Then a popup message window prompts the user to continue or cancel the file edit The value can be specified as a number of bytes nnn a number of kilobytes nnnK or a number of megabytes nnnM The default value is 1M one megabyte UseDSNPrefix YES NO For MVS Only use a dataset name prefix for dataset names that are not enclosed in quotes If running under TSO then the current prefix in the TSO profile is used If running under VTAM then the default is the user s logon id This default can be changed with the edit command SET DSNPREFIX The prefix becomes the dataset high level qualifier Default value is NO RACF MVS Only ResourceCh
89. 2 JOB NBJZ 10 45 WED 14 002555 was SSAND 000003 BBCARDO1 002556 150 17 Should support LOWERCASE O00009 k End of File 002557 End of File Figure 5 SELCOPY Interactive Debug in 62x160 3270 Session 2009 07 20 16 03 29 CBL Interactive CBLi 14 Executing SELCOPY Load Library Search Chain Under MVS interactive execution of IMS SELCOPY programs in DLI and BMP region types is supported The following SELCOPY Interactive attributes relating to IMS SELCOPY programs may be specified as a parameter on the SELCOPY command or via the Run SELCOPY dialog window e The PSB name e The IMS region either DLI or BMP Default is DLI e The Subsystem name of the IMS Region to which the connection should be made Optional e IMS Application Group name Optional For IMS DLI regions IEFRDER DFSVSAMP must either be allocated or included in the SYSTEM or USER CBLIINI file for dynamic allocation by SELCOPY Interactive at execution time Load Library Search Chain The location of the SELCOPY program executed and any routines called by the SELCOPY operation CALL is determined by the standard search chain for the current environment Note The SELCOPY CALL operation is used to pass control to an external Assembler COBOL routine or any MVS program module developed using Language Environment For MVS systems only SELCOPY Interactive provides users with the ability to include additional libraries to the start of the search cha
90. 7 20 16 03 29 CBL Interactive CBLi 181 CBLIINI control file Display CBLIINI Fileids and Variables CBLIINI Standard Variables Any variable name may be assigned within the SYSTEN and USER CBLIINI files however certain standard CBLIINI variables are significant to the operation of the CBLi program The standard CBLIINI variables are as follow System AbendTrap ON OFF SYSTEM CBLIINI Only For diagnostic purposes only should a Program Check or Abend occur whilst running CBLi AbendTrap determines whether control is passed to the CBLi abend handler AbendTrap ON or back to the operating system AbendTrap OFF Default value is ON CmdLine TOP BOTtom Open all windows that have a command line with the command line at the TOP or BOTTOM of the window Default value is TOP CmdText filename The default command CMX file to display on startup of CBLi If this variable exists then the CBLe editor window is automatically opened at the start of CBLi to edit this file If the file is a PDS PDSE with member name SKEL then a member within the same PDS PDSE with name equal to the user s logon id will be edited If this member does not exist then the contents of the SKEL member are copied in though not automatically saved This file can be a VSE LIBR member CMS or MVS sequential file or an MVS PDS PDSE member There is no default MVS System symbols and the special variable USER or USER may be included in the fileid USER and USE
91. 7 i i Initialise to hex zeroes 002523 120 120 IF E gt 000056 pos unm Len unml Does the same thing 002524 vi eu Back Forward FOB Edit Refresh Help O00057 002525 Command gt 0000S 002526 0000SS 002527 pi EQUYa lue 000050 002528 CBL SSC CTL 000061 a 3 ir nto pdsin p rds only 002529 1N2 CBL SSC CTL FSO 0000562 L tn El 002530 mil 000053 then close pdsz Close input Library 002531 000064 then 0j End of job 002532 0000S 002533 000055 if data pds 002534 0000567 then print i PRINT data records 002535 Command gt OOO06S then write Write data records to DD 002536 000069 lt alloc f Show Pos pds2 Coutdd gt lla outdd 002537 ine Teese Se PtrName Address 000070 pds2 lt edit gt 002538 1821 000D4C3C 000071 if dir pds pdsz 002539 10791 GARR OOODEF14 pds2 lt edit gt 002540 E 50 aes SOOD4S6F R NBJZ SELCOPY iF ALT 0 OG gt 002541 S Track List 002542 M lvontescolas acosa Poo o Doo Poo 002543 Q AMEND 5700 Last byte reserved f if Break lt toggle gt 002544 k New comment 17 T Pdsin PRINT data reco 002545 EQU AMLEN AMEND Expanded record len if Goto EoJ 002546 13 rd Pdsin Dir Data reco 002547 if Window Layout 002545 SEND 13 rd Pdsin Dir Data 002549 Edit Keys 002550 002551 BITOZ EMOO1 WTOLOG ALtT 0 059 x ei SSBITOZ CTL N LEVEL 002 90 05 Josatesccdsasctacas abro ooo ro o Po 002554 Logical AND Data with Data 000007 SELCOPY REL 2 02 PARAM CARD ERROR 57
92. AM file tuning and generation of IDCAMS DEFINE job source Details on CBLVCAT output and control statement syntax is found in the CBLVCAT User Manual CBLi loads CBLVCAT and assumes control over its control statement input and report output functions This allows the user to specify CBLVCAT input statements directly at the VCAT Command prompt or indirectly via a control statement file and view the output in a window In order to direct input from a control statement file the fileid should be entered at the VCAT Command prompt and prefixed with a lt less than symbol If you are using the LISTVCAT DEFINE option then the generated IDCAMS control statements are displayed in a CBLe text edit window and may subsequently be saved to a file After execution of CBLVCAT control statements or control statement file the SYSPRINT MVS and CMS or SYSLST VSE output is presented in the display area of the Execute CBLVCAT window The Execute CBLVCAT window is essentially a List window with a single column i e SysPrint and has the same charactersitics as List windows For example the Execute CBLVCAT window supports Prefix Commands and filtering to display new views of the data 2009 07 20 16 03 29 CBL Interactive CBLi 30 Executing CBLVCAT CBLVCAT Interactive Window GELE match TS TECHT ce WAT de Le REY CEL gt AT FroaraHs CELY Le REY CEL CAT CELACT C2230 TYFE HREGS FGHT ALLOG TRACKS LHA KL RRF GISIZE EUFSF EXcP
93. BLi 77 List Windows List Library Members Execute the entry Invokes the TSO command EXECUTE using the entry name as input Open the FSU File Search Update Window to perform an advanced search and optionally update the contents of the entry frame window must be active for this operation to suceed Open the SDE BROWSE EDIT Dialog Window to browse or edit the entry s data within a Structured Data Environment window view Opens the general file utilities menu to ultimately generate specific line commands in a temporary CMX file Open the CBLe text editor to View edit read only this entry Open a drop down menu containing valid prefix command functions for the list window entry Position the cursor on the required function and hit lt Enter gt to action the command Assigned to PF4 by default Open a new window containing a zoomed vertical display of the entry s fields Particularly useful for list windows that have a large number of displayed columns Assigned to PF2 by default T SD T For VSE systems the following prefix line commands are available when a list of VSE libraries or sublibraries is displayed Command blank Prefix line command M The ENTER key must be pressed with the cursor on the line containing the library sub library M Opens another Library List window containing the library sub library contents Lock the VSE LIBR member VSE Onl Open a drop down menu containing valid prefix command f
94. CBL CBL CBL WIENEN NNNOTUWONWUFRRE nnn Figure 40 VSE Catalog List Window Entry gt Specify the fileid mask 0 For MVS systems the fileid mask represents a DSN mask that supports the following wild cards A single asterisk represents a DSN qualifier or zero or more characters within a DSN qualifier A double asterisk represents zero or more qualifiers within a DSN Double asterisk must be preceded or followed by either a dot period or a blank It cannot precede or follow an alphanumeric character oe A single percent sign represents exactly one character other than dot period within a DSN qualifier Up to 8 percent signs can be specified in each qualifier 2009 07 20 16 03 29 CBL Interactive CBLi 61 List Windows List Catalog Entries If the last character of the fileid mask is dot period then this marks the end of the low level DSN qualifier within the fileid mask The trailing is stripped and no wildcard string is appended to the fileid mask e g DEV becomes DEV DEV OEM TRSPAN becomes DEV OEM TRSPAN DEV SAMP becomes DEV SAMP If the last character of the fileid mask is not dot period then a default trailing wild card string is automatically appended to the fileid mask as follows 1 If the fileid mask is a single qualifier or the last character of the fileid mask is wildcard string of is appended e g asterisk then a DEV becomes DEV DEV
95. CBL Interactive CBLi 90 Utility Windows FSU File Search Update Window Te ae EELE GenerateCLI PF2 Help FIND and or CHANGE strings in multiple f WZ PDS CE members Press PF4 for immed exec PF2 to generate TITELE or PFS to exit ED dialog INPUT Fileid Mask or Fileid format volser jdataset name member inc wildcards Volume Mask amp DSN Mask CBL CBLI MBRLIST Member Mask HFS Recfms _ V Fmt EGE Lrecl Recurse SubDirs _ Ignore Case Enter Z to activate each of the options below Word Prefix Suffix ETHNO ceibes in Start Col SRCREC End Col and or CHANGE ALL 4 i Last from po Immediate UPDATE im Start Col End Col Specify optional SQL style SELECT WHERE Column SELECT MEMBER RECNO SRCREC Filter WHERE MEMBER gt gt EDT AND VER gt 130 Specify optional structure CopyBook overlay Structure LAC CBLI SDO MBRLIST u Vv Record type SOURCE Figure 58 File Search Update Dialog Window File Search Update window allows the user to search cataloged data sets HFS files and or PDS E members for a search string and optionally perform a CHANGE command to perform data update in place Field entries in the File Search Update dialog correspond to parameters specified on the SDE CLI command FSU which themselves correspond to SDE CLI commands that filter records columns and find or update fields within the selected data sets These parameters are INPUT FIND CHANGE and WHERE and additionally for structure
96. CLASS DATACLASS LBACKUP BWO TIMESTAMP 0 ASSOCIATIONS CBL CBLI MBRLIST KSDS CMP DATA INDEX CBL CBLI MBRLIST KSDS CMP INDEX DATA CBL CBLI MBRLIST KSDS CMP DATA IN CAT USERCAT CBLCAT HISTORY DATASET OWNER CREATION 2 EXPIRATION E Figure 29 IDCAMS Command window AMSCommand gt Specify valid IDCAMS command syntax Prefix Commands No prefix line commands are supported for IDCAMS Command windows Columns Displayed Asa ASA print control character 2009 07 20 16 03 29 CBL Interactive CBLi 40 New File Definition New files may be defined to the system from within the CBLi environment Non VSAM files and most commonly used VSAM elements can be defined by selecting the appropriate entry from the File menu of the CBLi main window menu bar e Allocate NonVSAM e Define KSDS e Define ESDS e Define RRDS e Define LDS e Define AIX e Define Path e Define Alias e Define Catalog Each selection opens a window containing enterable file characteristic fields Allocate NonVSAM Note Not yet implemented for CMS and VSE The Allocate nonVSAM window allows the user to supply the characteristics of the new data set prior to its allocation Select Define from the menu to action the allocation and optionally populate the data set CBLe text editor also opens the Allocate nonVSAM window when attempting to save a file with a data set name that has not yet been allocated NBJ DIRCMD 02009016 T180633 CMX SY
97. Compute Bridgend Ltd CBLi Reference and User Guide 8 Merthyr Mawr Road Bridgend Wales UK CF31 3NH Tel 44 1656 65 2222 Fax 44 1656 65 2227 CBL Web Site http www cbl com This document may be downloaded from http www cbl com cblidoc html CBL Ref c nbj ntmidoc td CBLi_Reference_and_User_Guide_FrontPage html 2009 03 04 17 56 37 CBL Interactive CBLi Contents Documentation NOES inci 1 MBOUP GEL Iiteracive dG BLU cai es aie es cee aca 1 System Envio TNS A scaner nor cdi rica ao 2 Getting started With od Ml RR eer seer ee rer ii entry peer Rr epee eter ey er terre rere et etre reer te ere reer ee a 2 Starting thierG BE PnOQra Tiisin n E EEEE ta a EEEE O AE SEI OE ES 2 Window ONCE OIG 5 2d cage cess cece E ESEE EEE E S ET aO 2 A a e oE aaa Aar Ea Eaa a Eaa e EON Na E A Aa EE AAA 3 SEE E AE o E E E E E E T E E EE E E E 3 Manipulating VIRC OWS isise eneon ian aain a SEED E EAEE ET 4 Window IAY OUt esaii caneca ia a ii ri iia 4 A a E a a a a a 4 A E E E E A E ER teas 5 Window NaMe Si ve sca cate cx enaa re a odiada 5 SATI OLETE E E APRE tt vt E EE A E PEET E E AE er A E E AN N a A 5 A EEE P E E E EE E A A A E E E A O TAO 6 FUNCION Sci ctra E sted 6 GBUMal Window susi aid da dai lido isis 7 SA E E E E A E T 7 EER CS a 11 61 s A E A E E A TE E E E S A g GB Li Mai MORMU nien a a a e reaa are ea e aeae E E EN 10 Storage Display WING OW eserine sei eiere er EEA E E EA ESEO E E KEES a 11 SS OUNILV OS
98. DE BROWSE EDIT Dialog Window to browse or edit the entry s data within a Structured Data Environment window view no U O O O D 5 w m x D O D O W T lt O gt 2 o w a 5 n Cc D E n 4 lt O gt 4 o O 2 g 5 S S D D 2 2009 07 20 16 03 29 CBL Interactive CBLi 34 Executing CBLVCAT Raw Data Window Perform a compress of an MVS PDS library to reclaim disk space occupied by replaced back level members This action performs an IEBCOPY to itself No action is taken for PDSE entries however the IEBCOPY dialog is opened with an error message if executed against any non PDS E Open a drop down menu containing valid prefix command functions for the list window entry Position the cursor on the required function and hit lt Enter gt to action the command Assigned to PF4 by default Open a new window containing a zoomed vertical display of the entry s fields Particularly useful for list windows that have a large number of displayed columns Assigned to PF2 by default Columns Displayed For LISTVTOC Output the data displayed is Name vos Pesca pump Teta Y w and high Cylin on oll erval Size 2009 07 20 16 03 29 CBL Interactive CBLi 35 Executing CBLVCAT Raw Data Window DEFINED Cha 1s defined EXPIRES Cha Sputch char Number of Control Interval sol SPLITCA Char Numberof onirol Ares i SEVL Char Highest CBLV E PAERE HIALLRBA FREEBYTE
99. Data in the work area may be altered at any point during the run by overtyping text in either the character or hexadecimal display A change to text in the one display will automatically be reflected in the other d 1 CiC2D5C4 FOF14040 4040C1C2 ESFOF140 G 40404040 CiC4CiFO F1404040 4040C1C4 C1FOF240 40404040 CiC4CiFO F3404040 90490C1C4 CIFOF4S40 40404040 C1C4C1FO F5404040 4040C1C4 CiFOF640 40404040 CiC4C1iFO F7404040 4040C1C4 CIFOFS40 40404040 CiIC4CiFO F9404040 4040C1C4 CiFiF040 40404040 CiC4CiFi F1i404040 4040C1C4 C4D3C9ES 40404040 C1D4C5Ds E44040490 4040C1D4 C5E74040 40404040 C1D4C5E7 DSC10440 4090C1D9 CSESFOF1 4 40404040 CiD9ICIES FOFZ4040 4040C1D9 CSIESFOFS 40404040 CiDSCSES FOF44040 4040C1D9 CSESFOFS 40404040 C1DICIES FOF640490 4040C1D9 CIESFOF 40404040 C1ESFOF1 40404040 4040C1ES FOFZ4040 G 40404040 CIESFOFS 40404040 4090C1E3 FoF99090 40404040 C1ESFOFS 40404040 ME 4040C1E3 FOF69090 40404040 C1iESFOF 40404040 4040C1ES FOFS4090 40404040 C1ESFOF9 409409090 4040C1ES F1F04040 G 40404040 C1ESF1F1 40404040 4040C1ES F1F24040 40404040 C1ESF1iF3 40404040 pa 4040C1E3 F1F99090 40404040 C1ESF1FS Figure 11 SELCOPY Work Area Window POS Expression Window The POS expression window may be opened using the SELCOPY Interactive CLI command WINDOW POS expr POS expression windows for special positions POS PARM DATE SQLCA SQLDA and SQLMA may be opened by selecting the Pos sub menu from the View menu in the SELCOPY Main Menu The POS wind
100. E TASK Syntax gt gt TASK pomname Sosa oss Soa a Su A eo a gt lt LIB libpath PARM parm Description For MVS only use the TASK command to start a program as a sub task of CBLi 2009 07 20 16 03 29 CBL Interactive CBLi 167 CBLi Command Line Interface TASK TASK commands are generated by the CBLe REXX macro JCLCMX to run non SELCOPY job steps of an MVS batch job in the environment in which CBLi is being executed i e TSO or VTAM Parameters pgmname The name of the program load module to be executed LIB libpath A list of load libraries to be included before the current environment s search library chain This is equivalent to supplying a JCL STEPLIB statement in a batch job and so may be used to define the location of the program module to be executed plus any modules called by the program Libpath may be one of the following 0 A DDname which has been pre allocated to one or more load libraries 0 One or more load library DSNs separated by commas semi colons or blanks Note that if blanks are used quotes must also be used to delimit the list of DSNs not the individual DSNs PARM parm Parameter string to be passed to the program This is equivalent to supplying the PARM parameter on an JCL EXEC statement in a batch job If the parm string contains blanks then quotes must be used to delimit the parm string Examples TASK TRSMAIN PARM UNPACK Start p
101. E Description For CMS the LC command opens the File List window in place of the Catalog List or Dataset List window and displays information about files residing on accessed mini disks For MVS and VSE the LC List Catalog entries command may be used to open a Catalog List window and optionally list basic information about entries in the catalog This is a less detailed list than that generated by the LD command For VSE the LC command is only supported where the CBL software product CBLVCAT is installed and active The LC command uses CBLVCAT to read the specified VSAM catalog records and obtain information about the cataloged files The Catalog List window may also be opened via the List menu of the CBLi main window menu bar Parameters entry Specifies the fileid mask which is placed in the Entry field of the MVS VSE Catalog List window or the File field of the CMS File List window 0 For MVS systems the fileid mask represents a DSN mask that supports the following wild cards A single asterisk represents a DSN qualifier or zero or more characters within a DSN qualifier A double asterisk represents zero or more qualifiers within a DSN Double asterisk must be preceded or followed by either a dot period or a blank It cannot precede or follow an alphanumeric character oe A single percent sign represents exactly one character other than dot period within a DSN qualifier Up to 8 percent signs can be specified
102. E is set as the default edit profile then useful edit buttons are added to the menu bar See the PROFILE and PROFIRST macros for a description of each button s use Note that SELCOPY analyses the control statements prior to execution and it is at this point that SELCOPY Interactive associates each operation in the SYSIN display with its appropriate selection id Therefore any alterations made to the SYSIN data during SELCOPY debugging must first be saved and the job re started before any further statement execution can take place The contents of the window scroll automatically in order to display the current statement in the SELCOPY execution As for any edit view CBLe commands and macros may be used to manipulate highlight and locate data in the view e g LOCATE TAG ALL 2009 07 20 16 03 29 CBL Interactive CBLi 17 Executing SELCOPY CHANGE SET ZONE etc SYSIN Window In addition to any CBLe edit highlighting during the course of execution control statements are highlighted as follow 1 Next executable SELCOPY statement Default highlight pink reverse video 2 Break Point Default highlight red reverse video Closing the SYSIN window also exits SELCOPY Interactive SYSPRINT Window The SYSPRINT window is opened automatically when SELCOPY Interactive is started It may also be opened via the following e Select Listing from the View menu in the SELCOPY Main Menu e Enter the SELCOPY Interactive CLI command WINDOW LIST
103. EBCOPY RE PGM IEBCOPY R EXEC PGM CBLAVARL EX In the FSU output displayed in Figure x the user has hit the PF2 key on the Summary record to display the record s fields in single view and also executed the following SDE SELECT command to restrict the fields displayed in records of record type Hit SELECT zMember zT zRecord FROM Hit FSUPROF Profile Macro When the output report SDE window is opened the default profile REXX macro FSUPROF is executed in addition to the standard SDEPROF profile macro By default FSUPROF allocates the PF1 key to execute macro FSUEDIT for this window only FSUEDIT allows the user to place the cursor on a Hit or IOError type record described below and then hit PF1 to perform an edit of the data set specified by the ZDSN and zMember fields and to scroll directly to the reported record If the file has an associated SDE structure SDO then SDE EDIT is performed using the structure Otherwise CBLe text edit is used The FSUPROF macro may be updated to configure alternate SDE settings for the FSU report window e g SET TYPE OFF may be included to suppress the data type description header lines See SDE Commands and SET QUERY EXTRACT documentation FSUOUT Macro The FSUOUT macro is used to display browse the saved output from a previous execution of the File Search amp Update utility e g FSUOUT DEV NBJ FSU D2008268 T114326 This executes the SDE EDIT command to display the specified F
104. Edit the user s personal command centre CMX file A new CBLe text edit session is opened if one is not already open IEBCOPYDIALOG Syntax gt gt IEBCOPYDialog gt lt Description The IEBCOPYDIALOG command may be used to open the Execute IEBCOPY dialog window to copy members between PDS E libraries The dialog window will be opened with fields populated with parameters entered by the user during the last invocation of the window Parameters IEBCOPYDIALOG has no parameters ISPF Syntax gt gt ISPF gt lt ispf_command Description When running in an ISPF environment the CBLi command ISPF either toggles between using TSO and ISPF to manage 3270 I O or executes an ISPF command When used to execute an ISPF command screen management is always handled by ISPF regardless of the current 3270 screen manager Note that when ISPF is the screen manager the menu item Swap is added to the CBLi Main Menu Selecting Swap will execute ISPF SWAP to display an ISPF split screen It is recommended that when running CBLi in an ISPF environment ISPF should always be used as the 3270 screen manager to take advantage of ISPF screen split etc In order to do this without disrupting PFkey assignments CBLi must run as an ISPF application with applid CBLI The CBLi Installation guide provides details and sample job streams to enable your
105. Enter gt Security Considerations VSE Systems By default the SYSTEM CBLIINI file has the System variable VSESMLogon YES This activates CBLi s VSE Security Manager BSM or ESM logon and resource checking In order to operate successfully with VSESMLogon Yes the VSE system must be running a security manager and the CBLi startup job submitted so that it provides the CBLi program with maximum user privilages At CBL the job that starts CBLi contains a JECL JOB statement with SEC SYSA Any user wishing to login to CBLi must have a logon id defined in the security manager s data base Once logged in CBLi will interrogate the security manager to establish the user s access privilage prior to performing any action on potentially protected resources e g listing LIBR library contents and editing LIBR members CBLi will then permit or restrict the user s access to the resource If VSESMLogon OFF then no logon password or security manager resource checking is performed With VSESMLogon ON in effect editing of VSE Power queue entries is possible if either the TO or FROM values match the current user s userids However if VSESMLogon OFF a user may only edit a Power queue entry if it is password protected and the password is known to the user MVS Systems On MVS systems users login to CBLi using their RACF or equivalent security package login id Under TSO no CBLi login is performed as the user s TSO login id is used instead
106. GOP Y Interact Ve Funcion Re Visita aa iia 30 Executing CBLVCA Tico A KUSNA n niiet rabaia iinaiariia 30 CBEVGAT Interac hi Ye VVC OW sasoin innn Ea p iN opa 33 Raw Data WINDOW casal anual aiid E A A A day E a E E N 37 DB2 Dyh mi SO lo a an 40 Executing CAM a 40 O 41 New File Detin HON lt lt a 41 Allocate NON VSANL asarana E EA A E A E a o iii 41 Define VSAM Elements a iscecceesiac sacescieeseadexeueetnradesan seucbedsaecunues a rE e Enae EE EES ea E eias AGS eE 43 ExecUte POWER i0 ccccccccsccecatccsceteccssocessaccnseencei cnsstensedsocesiecssuei sist 43 Peik commanda A ree tear re ar rerar A er cirer earrer pres er rreq cere Crecente ere 46 Greate ALIAS visir nad 47 Execute IEBCOPY ud 49 ESStWINdO WS ii E a ae cede eet 49 THe LE WIRE o do 49 ME e e rn rere tert ce 49 2009 07 20 16 03 29 CBL Interactive CBLi Contents List Windows Field Descriptor Block FDB laca 50 A aaucutesnes E S E nie eaveeh ev hgedtaguarubecent vend ucuaseet at cates tac 51 Selecting SO MING and FIREM Osier na sangerineecesetensaers gameaaniiec te ieatwaseue ER inceedusever E E a 51 Mae SEC cias iia us 52 The Where Claus E eres O neirat elasesenceted 54 The Sorn Onder By CIAO Occ asoa centers ove ca EIEE EE EE E ESEN ESEE E OR 54 SOO WNE CUS OE siina e A A oa A E aaO AS ENSE 54 biS EMY LOCalO Messie E aa ta a o des 55 FIND COMMANDE soriire aeaaeai a EE E E EE EE E ra 55 LOCATE Command simson ei ar ie n Aa e eea S E 56 omand ea ea E a S e
107. HANGE conditions apply to occurrences of the search string within the record i e All occurrences in the record ALL the first occurrence in the record FIRST NEXT or the last occurrence in the record LAST PREV Where CHANGE is specified FIND and WHERE are treated as filter mechanisms excluding records before the CHANGE operation is executed i e Data will only be changed in records that first satisfy both the FIND and WHERE criteria Where FIND and WHERE are not specified then CHANGE will operate on all input records CHANGE with UPDATE will re write any changed data records using update in place and so the record length cannot be changed Any CHANGE operation that results in a change to the record length will fail During execution a progress window is displayed which allows the user to interrupt processing using the Attention key FSU generates an output report in an SDE window view See File Search amp Update Output Parameters CASEIGN Bypass case sensitivity for the name portion of all specified HFS path fileid masks specified on the INPUT parameter The name portion of the HFS path is the character string at the end of the path that follows the last slash of the fileid or is the entire path name if is not specified CHANGE change_parms AND OR Specifies one or more CHANGE search string replace string and associated parameters CHANGE operates on records that have been selected by the VIEW WHERE
108. HFS path The name portion of the HFS path is the character string at the end of the path that follows the last slash of the fileid or is the entire path name if Is not specified R Specify R or r to recursively list the contents of all sub directories found within the HFS path specification hfs_path Specifies the HFS path which is to be placed in the HFS Path gt field of the list window This may be a path name relative to the current working directory The following wild cards may only be specified within the name portion of the HFS path A single asterisk represents zero or more characters A single percent sign represents a single character Examples lp lt u johnd02 temp Lists the contents of the u johnd02 directory where name begins with temp and if a directory entry list the contents of that directory and any of its sub directories listpath 200401 _ Audit Report tgz List entries in the current working directory The HFS path is quoted since the name mask contains a blank Wildcards and are used to represent multiple zero or more and single characters respectively Syntax gt gt LQ E PA A A gt lt LISTENO f gt queuename resourcename Description Use the LQ List MVS Enqueues command to open an Enqueue List window and optionally list outstanding MVS enqueues by major name and minor name queue name and resource name
109. James OR 1 lt lt John For Structured File Search amp Update the where clause may reference any of the record fields defined by the record type specified by the VIEW entry regardless of whether it has been included by the SELECT entry e g WHERE 3 gt 22 AND EmpName Smith OR Dept gt gt El For a detailed description of the where clause please refer to the SDE CLI WHERE command documentation Insert the name fileid of an SDE structure SDO which is to be used to map the input records The USING field entry is equivalent to the USING parameter argument on the SDE EDIT operation 2009 07 20 16 03 29 CBL Interactive CBLi 96 Utility Windows File Search amp Update Output The named SDO must first have been generated using the SDE CREATE STRUCTURE CLI command usually from an existing COBOL or PL1 copy book that is associated with the file data For more information on SDE structures and structured data sets please refer to the CBLi SDE Manual Only those records that are associated with a single record type object RTO within the SDO are included for search and update All other records are bypassed Although not mandatory on the FSU CLI command itself to avoid confusion over which records are to be searched specification of a VIEW field argument in the dialog window is mandatory when USING is enabled Therefore in order to include a USING argument within the FSU operation t
110. LAN SYSPLAN TOPTVAL TOR COLNO LENG R Sa HHH 00 00 00 10 10 10 10 10 LO 6 00 LO LO 10 00 00 00 0 oomo 0 A 0 00 00 00 00 00 00 mM PR PRRRRRRRR ShLHhVABHLOONNNOUOONNNNEFYOSOOFLES A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A 444444950000000000 oOooo0Knooo9o00000000000 o o ie oe ADDED_PRED ime T_TABLE ADDED_PRED T_TABLE ADMRDEPT ADMRDEPT ADMRDEPT 23230000000 0 lt 000 lt lt lt D000 lt X lt Lr OML ZZZZZZZ ZE ZE NOZZZO00NZZZ0OO NDZNNNNNNO i 110000000000 0 0000000000000 00000 0007 0 00 00 09 00 00 0 mm 00 00 00 mu mn im E 00 00 nm a Figure 26 DB2 Dynamic SQL window DB2 Subsystem gt Specify the DB2 sub system name to be the target of the CONNECT Changing the Subsystem name will cause CBLi to disconnect the user from the current subsystem and reconnect to the new subsystem Default is that defined by the CBLIINI option DB2 SSN otherwise the sub system name specified in the DB2SubSys field of the CBLNAME load module is used Specify the SELCOPY SELCOPQL DB2 plan name which has been bound to the DB2 sub system This is the name assigned to the SELCOPY plan during the BIND to the DB2 subsystem Plan gt Default is that defined by the CBLIINI option DB2 Plan otherwise the plan name specified in the DB2Plan field of the CBLNAME load module is used Select Limit gt Limit the number of rows to be displayed in the Dynamic SQL window following a SELECT transaction Once the limit threshold h
111. LCOPY Interactive Main frame Window supports all MDI child windows supported by the CBLe frame window including SDE Edit The SELCOPY Interactive frame window is actually a CBLe frame window with additional features and characteristics specifically relating to SELCOPY execution These features are discussed in this section whereas details on CBLe frame window features may be found in the CBLe Text Edit documentation The SELCOPY Interactive Main window must always contain the Control Cards Output Listing and TRACE Windows Closing any of these windows will quit the SELCOPY main window and so end the Interactive session When a session is started these 3 child windows are automatically opened together with a work area storage window at fixed locations within the main window client area The position and size of each window have been pre determined so that the contents of each window are easily visible when used with terminals of width greater than 80 bytes Where the terminal display is of width less than 80 bytes the SELCOPY Interactive child windows are opened in a maximised state however these may be subsequently restored resized and repostioned as in Figure x 2009 07 20 16 03 29 CBL Interactive CBLi 16 Executing SELCOPY SELCOPY Interactive Main window SELCOPY File view Go ReRun Window Help wS wR 2 2 ae SSC C GT FERS 218 V PDSE Siz Y ALt 0 0 50 JRE OO Soo e MAA A AA Soo Somos s Now populate the tabi db2 sql insert into v
112. List Windows List Library Members Columns Displayed The data displayed for MVS is Member Member name Alias Alias indicator Version number Int Modification level Created reation date astMod ast modified date and time CurSize niSize Int Initial size Mods Modified records User User id lt Z lt faa JE 3 oO U 9 O urrent size The data displayed for VSE libraries is ibrary file name SubLib ublibrary name reation date CreTime Creation time Members Int Number of members The data displayed for VSE sublibraries is O E 3 os U 2 D 2009 07 20 16 03 29 CBL Interactive CBLi 79 List Windows List MVS Enqueues List MVS Enqueues The Enqueue List window may be opened via the following e Select Enqueues from the LIST menu in the CBLi Main Menu e Enter the CBLi command LQ on the command line of any window The Enqueue List window displays outstanding MVS enqueues by major name and minor name queue name and resource name Note Not implemented for VSE Queue Name gt SYSDSN Resource Name SYS1 SS SS NESST SS SES eens ule elf UI TESSA AMES SE SYSDSN SHR OWN SYSTEM N N 6 0 0 T3 Sy Si CAG SYSDSN SHR OWN SYSTEM N N 6 0 0 hs Shore LACS SYSDSN SHR OWN SYSTEM N N 6 0 0 o ee SYSDSN SHR OWN SYSTEM N N 6 0 0 od NBA SYSDSN SHR OWN SYSTEM N N 6 0 0 aS e ol E E SYSDSN SHR OWN SYSTEM N N 6 0 0 13 SYS1 A ES SYSDSN SHR OWN SYSTEM N N 6 0 a T3 SyS CAC SYSDSN SHR OWN SYSTEM N
113. ME is equivalent to the CBLi RENAME CLI command except that rename arguments are always treated as HFS path names Parameters old_hfs_path An HFS path name representing a file hard link symbolic link or directory name new_hfs_path The new HFS path name USS RMDIR Syntax gt gt USS RMDIR hs path 325235 see ase sa asa Sse Se Sasa gt lt Description Remove an existing empty HFS directory USS RMDIR is equivalent to the USS shell command RMDIR except that currently no option exists to remove intermediate directory components Parameters hfs_path An HFS path name representing a directory USS STAT Syntax 2009 07 20 16 03 29 CBL Interactive CBLi 175 USS commands USS STAT Description Display the status of the specified HFS path name This includes the absolute HFS path name type file size blocksize format and permissions octal Parameters hfs_path An existing HFS path name USS UNLINK Syntax gt gt USS UNLINK hfs_path gt lt Description Unlink the specified HFS path name USS UNLINK is equivalent to the USS shell command UNLINK Parameters hfs_path An existing HFS path name representing a file name hard link or symbolic link Alternate path names to the same data are unaffected 2009 07 20 16 03 29 CBL Interactive CBLi 176 CBLIVTAM commands Commands may be passed to the CBLIVTAM application via the s
114. MP e ls IMSID ssn a AGN grpn a Description Use the SELCOPY command to open the SELCOPY Interactive window and load the specified file containing SELCOPY control statements The SELCOPY Interactive window may also be opened via the File menu of the CBLi main menu If no parameters are specified then a pop up window prompts the user enter a SELCOPY control statement source fileid SELCOPY Interactive opens a CBLe edit view for the select SYSIN SYSIPT source file input If selcctl is supplied as an explicit fileid DSN which is not locked with an exclusive ENQ by another process and the user has sufficient authority the file is edited 2009 07 20 16 03 29 CBL Interactive CBLi 158 CBLi Command Line Interface SELCOPY read write In this case updates can be made to the SYSIN source and execution repeated without leaving the SELCOPY Interactive application Where selcctl refers to a previously allocated filename DD FILEDEF DLBL which may be a concatenation of datasets then it is opened read only by the SELCOPY Interactive SYSIN SYSIPT CBLe edit view A token of 8 or fewer characters with no embedded dots is automatically treated an allocated filename Read only access to SELCOPY control cards held in CA LIBRARIAN members is made available on MVS systems via CBLi s ALLOC which supports the SUBSYS LAM parameter See Executing SELCOPY for full information on the features of the SELCOPY Interactive application including point and
115. NAME 2009 07 20 16 03 29 CBL Interactive CBLi 155 CBLi Command Line Interface RENAME Rename a VSE VSAM managed data set rename nbj tmp gz scr install x1832 gzip Rename an HFS file and move it to a new directory RESTORE Syntax gt gt RESTORE gt lt Io RES windowname Description This command restores the specified window from a maximised or minimised state back to its original size and position This command is equivalent to selecting the Restore Button of the window to be minimised Parameters windowname The window name of the window to maximise If not supplied then the window in which the command is issued via a command line or function key is assumed RETRIEVE Syntax gt gt RETRIEVE plus gt lt Description For each window CBLi stores a history of the commands issued Use the RETRIEVE command to recall commands from the ring of executed commands The recalled command is placed on the focus window s command line By default this command is assigned to function key PF12 Parameters 7 Recall commands scrolling forwards through the ring Recall commands scrolling backwards through the ring RIGHT Syntax gt gt RIGHT Y n oo gt lt La windowname l CURSOR DATA HALF MAX PAGE n_cols 2009 07 20 16 03 29 CBL Inte
116. OMPONENT DATA or INDEX component DSN ENTRY Ichar VSAM CLUSTER entry DSN TE a ieo e eee 2009 07 20 16 03 29 CBL Interactive CBLi 36 DB2 Dynamic SQL The DB2 Dynamic SQL window may be opened via the following e Select DB2 Dynamic SQL from the File menu in the CBLi Main Menu e Enter the CBLi command SQL on the command line of any window DB2 Dynamic SQL window may be used to submit SQL commands to a DB2 database and display the resultant messages and table views The DB2 Dynamic SQL capability is available only to MVS sites where SELCOPY is installed The SELCOPY DB2 interface SELCOPQL load module is used to pass SQL statements to the DB2 data base and so must also be available in the SELCOPY load library On startup the Dynamic SQL window connects the user to the DB2 subsystem using the DB2 subsystem name and plan specified in the CBLNAME load module The Dynamic SQL window has the same characteristics as a CBLi List window including selecting sorting and filtering of row and column data and point and shoot sorting on column headers CBLe Dunamic SQL DB G m lew Back Forward FDB Edit Refresh Log Help wS wR Command gt DB2 Subsystem DBIG Plan gt CBLPLANO Select Limit gt 200 AutoCommit gt Y SQL Statement gt SELECT FROM SYSIBM SYSCOLUMNS WHERE COLTYPE CHAR ORDER BY TBNAME SYSPACKSTMT SYSSTMT SYSPACKSTMT SYSSTMT PLAN_TABLE PLAN_TABLE PLAN_TABLE PLAN_TABLE DB2_THREAD_STATUS EMM rae ER SYSP
117. Ol SIC Lem 1S cassia E E E E E a E E cutis E aaa dase aacaaase A A 12 GBC MBO OANA osa is 13 Executing SEL COPY cases aaa ccs etc cac a Ua aciee a a ec cee cease eee eea 13 Wong SECOS erario aia 15 Load Obrany ceden CHa a nde recat erro rer tree rt errr 15 A A x cece tic cicesneiecceeccecescecasceanceesalanaueseuceaiee magutes sal anateavensaysaveneused TANE N E GREIE EEE RESE SANE OEA 16 SELGOPY Interactive WIRGOW Sres 16 SELSOD Y INteracive Mando Wald tales Seta a cued el cea ao tees sakes cule stearate ate ica teks out 17 SS sicaire a ae a Ea a e a E E E I EE aT 18 SYSPRINT WIN si is eds 18 AA A a re tr eee 19 WTO Eog WINGOW sarasa aae eaae aerae err A Aa Eaa aa E O E ES 19 Work Areal Current IMpUL Record VWVIMG OW iis tates sects cc dica boa 20 POSES nS SSI WV MNO sistere aee ears ae Ger cas a eE EEE Ae eE e E 21 ORORO VINO iraa E EEE SE E E E EEE E E 21 EQuates VVC OW sies enna a ido nos iii ascii 22 PS VV sosete aa a aN e e oaa a EASE Aa E E 22 TRACE Wind Wescscsrscaoa alar en rita 23 Point and Shoot A rRe sinan EE Sann ESEE EE EER tat Ea E E EENE a EGEA 24 SELCOP Y INerdttive Comand lee aa a a EA E E T E E ba 25 BREAK A A EA A E 25 EER aut EEE E E E S E T A EAA E A E E 25 E E E P E E ia tio ele ciao 26 RE LE A EAEE ENOAT ETA EAT AA A A E VAT E E E T E E TE N EAT 26 SES E E A E A AE T EE E E E E E E E EEE E E 26 STEPOVER eps E a N AE E E ETA E i ia 27 a O ad behets 28 O e aan n Ee E ae E eE A aE a E a E E AEE 28 SEL
118. PO u 32000 4096 CBLMO1L CBL ASM TEST JCL PO FB 80 23440 _ CBLMO1L CBL ASM TEST LSA PO FBA 121 23474 __ CBLMO1 CBL ASM TEST MAC PO FB 80 23440 _ CBLMO1 CBL ASM TEST OBJ PO FB 80 31 20 __ CBLMO1 CBL CA CAESDR OBJ PS FB Aal ATR eA CBLMO1 CBL CA CS11 CAESDR REP PS VBA 240 El __ CBLMO1 CBL CA CS11 ESD PS u 0 4096 ___ CBLMO1 CBL CAI CAIPROC PO FB 80 3120 ___ CBLM 1 CBL CAI CASCRN PO Vv 4100 4104 _ CBLMO1 CBL CAI CLI43SLD PO FB 80 3120 _ ECBLMO1 CBL CAI CLU4S3SETL PO FEB 80 3120 CEEMOL CEL CAT ESid LSsT PO FB 133 32718 gt ECBLMO1 CBL CAI F331 CF331MLD PO FB 80 2120 EBEMOL CBL CAI LIBR MAST EBLI DA F 0 1086 CBLMO1 CBL CAI LIBR SAMP ICL PO FB 80 3120 CBLMO1 CBL CAI SMPSCDS PO ZE 80 3120 Li i 21f SET Vol Ds Figure 43 VTOC File List window displaying all entries beginning CBL on volume CBLMO01 Volume gt The 1 6 character volume id containing the required VTOC Filter gt Note The filter parameter is not supported for VSE Select only data sets that match the specified filter mask The filter mask supports the following wild cards A single asterisk represents a DSN qualifier or zero or more characters within a DSN qualifier A double asterisk represents zero or more qualifiers within a DSN Double asterisk must be preceded or followed by either a dot period or a blank It cannot precede or follow an alphanumeric character 2009 07 20 16 03 29 CBL Interactive CBLi 69
119. R denote the user s login userid e g CmdText SYS4 0EM CBL amp USER CMX CommandDelimiter char The command delimiter character used to separate multiple commands on any single CBLi command line This character also applies to CBLe edit views unless overridden by the SET LINEND command Default is semi colon X 5E for MVS otherwise exclamation mark X 5A e g CommandDelimiter DumpDSNPrefix prefix For MVS only the dataset name prefix maximum length 26 to be used by CBLI when allocating a default dump data set If prefix exceeds 26 characters then truncation occurs Qualifiers of the form Dyyyyddd Thhmmssx representing the current data and time are appended to the dump data set name prefix qualifiers Default value is USER CBLIDUMP InitialSize MAX Open all windows that can be maximised in the maximised state ListFileAction Browse Edit NONE Set the default action on hitting lt Enter gt on an entry in a List window If the entry is an editable object CMS fileid VSE LIBR member name MVS DSN or PDS E member name then ListFileAction Browse will cause the object to be edited read only whereas ListFileAction Edit will cause the object to be edited read write If ListFileAction NONE then no action is taken when lt Enter gt is hit on any entry of a List window Default value is Edit ListMaxKB n_kbytes 2009 07 20 16 03 29 CBL Interactive CBLi 182 CBLIINI control file CBLIINI Standard Variables
120. RPRRRRRRRRRRER PR E w E w b NOUOorbhbhbibhbbhbibrh keep bbbbb 1010101010 bb ASS EFODO bwin CBLI1i30 J S He NNEPNNNNNNNNR PRR PER Al See ee 000 O0O000 Doo 0000 Heee PEER E ESA Wowwa NOOO 00000 pet eed pe aa QEENNNNNETOOUNNNNNNNNUS Suu burnanibnnoriubbbbbhbbinoerna UNOSLNFSNTINDOONRRFRERPREP Sh YOUVE nnenecnenanmneonon anar 000 00000 000 mmm Fri Onion ocomyobubn Je io Joronbruwo ob ii PRRRRRRROPRPRER SS BBhhbbAAAOAAA BhANNNNN SONNERBBB ASS b ob wwo mmm r 0 Figure 25 CBLVCAT LISTVTOC Raw Data Window Prefix Line Commands The following prefix line commands are available Hit lt Enter gt with the cursor on a particular entry line Prefix line command M if entry is a PDS PDSE library Open the CBLe text editor to edit this entry Default for non PDS PDSE entries Open the FSU File Search Update Window to perform an advanced search and optionally update the contents of the entry 7 O lo O IO o lo 5 5 w gt a O pm 6 3 llo lo o o 9 8 3 ls 3 15 y lo 5 lo als Z llo a llo 5 2 o gt Jo 5 2 als a wn e D w e O gt 09 E 09 O gt S gt D o 2 Delete Kill the entry without prompting for verification f the entry is a PDS PDSE open a Library List window Default for PDS PDSE entries List dataset enqueues major name SYSDSN for this entry Rename the entry Open the S
121. S TIHE THF TOTAL FRIKE Er ELK THE IRL all 2007 16 67 2007 1027 200 002 2007 11 15 20 071 1146 03 15 1395 03 15 20007 2005 03 11 ET B T 25 didi2 33912 20 1k 2003 09 15 15 45 41 EHE E12 IML 2 2505 ESPA RA E TE RT RT Ab a PIILEE ERCDIC DA EECDIC DA REDS REDS Ch dhag Bono Is z2 Ed WOW AN ater ates ates ate TkT TTT T EA A A O O O O rA PrPrrrrrrrr IIIIIHHTT T AAA AA A Ue Y Ale Do lali io 0 0 0 L L L rc z Gean 2007411426 2007412415 2gge 02 08 idd 122 217 2063 51 02 11 17 26 2007 14 27 20071427 PL ES AE 2007 11 27 2007 14 27 2007411426 2007 11 26 2007 11726 2007 11 26 2007 11728 2007 11 25 2007 11 20 2007 11 70 2007 11 28 2007 14 76 200 7 114 TA 2007 14 Tb E 2007 14 65 2007 14 65 436 H ALLE T nun A A A he a ATA TATI ATA T e e e e e T RS Re Re Re ee RRA Bass SSS A S255 SSS marear CECECECEE lara FLEECE FECE EEFE deleletelal FEEFEE FEEFEE lll XIIIE IIX EEES E EE IIIII IIIT A 2253233232532 253532332 22323 A A AS Ded ee ES AS bend O sd L A A A 55 5 Figure 22 CBLVCAT Interactive in 62x160 3270 Session 2009 07 20 16 03 29 CBL Interactive CBLi 31 Executing CBLVCAT CBLVCAT Interactive Window In addition to the standard List window menu items the Execute CBLVCAT window includes the menu item RAW to open the CBLVCAT LISTVCAT or LISTVTOC Raw Data window CBLVCAT Log Output window is opened only
122. S file TEST EXEC A erase cbl cbli test file Erase MVS cataloged data set CBL CBLI TEST FILE erase cbl cbli testlib examplel Erase MVS PDS E member CBL CBLI TESTLIB EXAMPLE1 erase 0OEM0O01 cbl cbli test file Erase MVS uncataloged data set CBL CBLI TEST FILE from DASD volume OEMO001 erase SYSWK1 CBL SELCOPY NAM Erase VSE sequential file CBL SELCOPY NAM on SYSWK1 CBLVCAT must be licensed erase VSESP USER CATALOG CBL TEST KSDS Erase VSE VSAM managed data set CBL TEST KSDS cataloged in the VSAM catalog VSESP USER CATALOG 2009 07 20 16 03 29 CBL Interactive CBLi 131 CBLi Command Line Interface ERASE FAV Syntax gt gt FAV gt lt Description The FAV command may be used to open a Favourites Datasets Commands window to easily access commonly used files and commands The dialog window will be opened with fields populated with parameters entered by the user during the last invocation of the window Parameters FAV has no parameters FORWARD Syntax gt gt 4 FORNARO 223 gt lt le FOrw ae Description Use the FORWARD command to scroll the window contents forwards by a page Note that FORWARD is the same as DOWN CURSOR where the cursor is outside the display area FS Syntax gt gt FS gt lt FILESEARCH filemask string Descrip
123. S9Z7AFO FS400000 00000000 00000000 100000000 100000000 OSDODADO QOOOGEZS 02190030 00000000 0A011900 00001C7E 02160065 00000000 056091300 OGOOSZE6 02000057 00000000 OCOSOCOD Figure 13 POS Window outside work area Pointer Window The Pointer window may be opened via the following e Select Pointers from the View menu in the SELCOPY Main Menu e Enter the SELCOPY Interactive CLI command WINDOW O The current status of the pointer LRECL and of all the user pointers to be used in the current execution of SELCOPY is displayed in the Pointer window The Pointer window has the same characteristics as a CBLi List window including selecting sorting and filtering of row and column data and point and shoot sorting on column headers Command gt PosValue PtrName Address 874431 E 8OoG0000 10741 GARR 00051564 42 LRecL OOODS7TES Line 1 of 3 Col 1 of 253 Figure 14 SELCOPY Pointer Window Columns Displayed Posvaue int _________ Value as aposition inthe workarea Equates Window The Equates window may be opened via the following e Select EQUates from the View menu in the SELCOPY Main Menu e Enter the SELCOPY Interactive CLI command WINDOW EQUATES All equated names and their values set by the user via an EQU statement and subsequently allocated by SELCOPY during control statement analysis are is displayed in the Equates window The Equate window has the same characteristics as a CBLi List
124. SALLDA SEQ SEQ PDS PDSE Allocation Unit gt TRACKS Organisation Primary gt 1 Record Format gt Secondary 1 Record Length gt Management gt Directory Blocks 0 Blocksize gt Storage gt Help Figure 30 Allocate nonVSAM window The Allocate NonVSAM window has the following menu items Define This is a popup menu containing the following items Foreground Applicable to operation under TSO and CMS Allocate the data set in the foreground Control is temporarily passed to TSO or CMS Foreground COPY As for Foreground but also copy data from the data set specified in the Model field Not yet supported Background Applicable to operation on VSE and MVS A CBLe view is opened to edit a temporary job containing batch JCL to allocate define the data set The job may be submitted to the batch system using the CBLe command SUB Not yet supported Background COPY As for Background but also include JCL to populate the data set with data from the data set specified in the Model field Not yet supported Help Open the help window for data set allocation Define VSAM Elements Note Not yet implemented for CMS and VSE Define AIX Path Alias and Catalog are not yet supported 2009 07 20 16 03 29 CBL Interactive CBLi 41 New File Definition Define VSAM Elements The Define VSAM windows provide a method of defining VSAM objects simply by entering the required options in the appropriate fields of a form Each Define VSAM wi
125. SE member then the USER CBLIINI file is the member in this same PDS PDSE with member name equal to the user s logon id e g SYSTEM CBLIINI file CBL CBLI11B INI CBLI USER CBLIINI file CBL CBLI11B INI uid 2 If the SYSTEM CBLIINI file is a sequential file then the USER CBLINI file is the sequential file with high level qualifier equal to the user s login id and lower level qualifiers the same as the SYSTEM CBLIINI file e g SYSTEM CBLIINI file CBL CBLI11B INI USER CBLIINI file uid CBLI11B INI CMS ur USER CBLIINI is first file found on an accessed minidisk that has file name equal to the user s logon id and file type BLIINI e g USER CBLIINI file uid CBLIINI A VSE The USER CBLIINI is the LIBR member cataloged in the same sublibrary as SYSTEM CBLIINI with a member name equal to the user s logon id and member type CBLIINI e g SYSTEM CBLIINI file OEM CBLI SYSTEM CBLIINI USER CBLIINI file OEM CBLI uid CBLIINI CBLIINI Variable Format CBLIINI file variables are stored internally with two level names of the form nnnnn mmmmm The first level is indicated by a line in the CBLIINI file containing nnnnn or nnnnn The second level and value of the CBLIINI variable is set by a line containing mmmm value Variables inherit the first level name of the previous nnnnn line in the file 2009 07 20 16 03 29 CBL Interactive CBLi 180 CBLIINI control file CBLIINI Variable Format The value may be enclosed in
126. SSGENCIW Orsini a r iso 174 es E E E EE O EE S T N ie eee E AT EE EAE 174 EED E EEEE E E EE EEA E AE E EEE E AEE E EE 174 UO A A AA ee ab iaa ta la o A 175 USS PENNAMENN EEEE 175 US So NNN R eena E E EE EEE E E ENEE E N 175 USSSA E A A O oP 176 Bee E a E E SE AE R EE E E A E E E E E E A E E aay 177 CBLIVTAM COmMMand Sa incida iaa sethcaceadeeaaddetitalanceiause 177 MESSAGE e e e a ee ee ee ee ere 177 UA e td ee ater re Al e e Pore 178 2009 07 20 16 03 29 iii CBL Interactive CBLi Contents CBLIVTAM commands TO A isc 179 CBLi DUM FllES oo A is 180 CBELIN controla socia ii is 180 SYSTEM CBM Ls cortar iO E tunes cab A ERA OA A 180 VS A Aa N a a a ARE A a aa AS 180 CBLINI Valdano a a dace dae ace a a A deaeeees emcees 181 ASSIgh GBEN Vet ADI GS cusco anna aen a EE EEA EE EELEE AAEE EETA SEEE NS 181 Display CBUINE Bileldsand Vana DlES ciri isco dacckaatesactesaceacecrsncupase ssaceanens EEN IE a SE I ae Ania EAER aere OE STIRE ESE ER i 182 CBUINI Stangard VanableS ii 191 Glossa a GA a Rees anes a title 2009 07 20 16 03 29 About CBL Interactive CBLi System Environment CBL Interactive CBLi is a full screen 3270 application which runs in the following environments e Under TSO E in MVS OS 390 and z OS e Under ISPF in MVS OS 390 and z OS e As a VTAM application in MVS OS 390 and z OS See Disaster Recovery below e As a VTAM application in VSE ESA e Under CMS in VM ESA and z VM Disaster Recovery CBLi has
127. SU output identify the DSN PDSE E member name if applicable and record number at which the updated record may be found Sequentially read records from the data set or PDS E member until the required record number is found Verify that the input record matches the record After data reported in the FSU output Optionally UPDATE the data set record with the record Before data reported in the FSU output thus restoring the record to its original status Generate an entry in the FSUUNDO report Repeat all steps until all Hit record pairs in the FSU output report have been processed NO ORO N gt Error checking is also performed for conditions which include record not found or containing unexpected data These conditions are reported in the FSUUNDO output report This SELCOPY job may be executed in the Foreground TSO or displayed as a JCL job suitable for submission to batch Using either method options exist to generate an Expanded or Terse report an optional Diagnostic SELCOPY execution report and most importantly options to Verify or Update changed records It is strongly recommended that users execute FSUUNDO with options VERIFY the default and EXTENDED and then review the FSUUNDO output report before executing FSUUNDO again with option UPDATE Beware that record data that has been changed between the time of execution of the original File Search amp Update job and this execution of FSUUNDO will not be updated b
128. SU output report using the structure of the same DSN but with additional low level qualifier SDO If no argument is specified on FSUOUT the last saved FSU output is displayed FSUOUT may also invoked for an entry in a list window using the FO prefix command FSU Output Records The output report consists of 4 record types 1 Command record 1 Summary record 0 or more Hit records and 0 or more IOError records 2009 07 20 16 03 29 CBL Interactive CBLi 98 So0o0rPAna0W0 cursor 41 2 3 4 5 SDB2BIND EXEC PGM IKJEFTO1 DYNAMNBR 20 REGION 4M SDB2BIND EXEC PGM IKJEFTO1 DYNAMNBR 20 REGION 0M Utility Windows File Search amp Update Output Record Type Command A single character field containing the FSU command executed directly or via the FSU File Search Update Window The Command record is located at the end of the output report Record Type Summary Contains statistical fields providing totals for the File Search amp Update execution as follow RunType Describes the type of execution of the File Search amp Update utility and so governs the format of the Hit records For an invocation of FSU that performs a search only RunType is FIND Where CHANGE is specified RunType is NOUPDATE or UPDATE depending on the specification of NOUPDATE default or UPDATE on the FSU command or activation of Immediate UPDATE in the dialog window RecordsTot The total nu
129. Set a limit for in storage lists in KiloBytes If not supplied or not a valid number then there is no limit enforced Note that in storage lists are used for loading CBLe edit REXX macros therefore if this limit is set too small some macros may fail to load The limit applies to each list PFnn cmd Where nn can be 01 24 PF1 PF9 also supported Set the default system pf keys which apply to any CBLi window type The following are the defaults set by the program F24 ScrollBars YES NO Mop Mop down O d O etae aooo 0 XLeQ TIA emdtextedit Mop Mop Mop Mop p O matex Q g Q O ri retrieve n Controls whether the window system displays scroll bars in scrollable windows Default value is NO TrustedUser YES NO SYSTEM CBLIINI Only Controls whether the trusted user mechanism is to be activated in order to apply a basic level of security on systems without security management software Usually VSE systems without BSM ESM active Default value is NO Only userids referenced by a Trust userid password entry will be eligible to logon to CBLi For VSE systems with no security manager software trusted users have unrestricted access to VSE resources including display of non password protected POWER queue entries Trust userid password SYSTEM CBLIINI Only Specifies a single userid and password for trusted user logon A separate Trust userid password entry must be used for each trusted user
130. Size rows cols Initial number of rows and columns in the CBLe edit main window The default size of the CBLe parent window is based on the dimensions of the 3270 terminal If the 3270 terminal width is 80 or less the CBLe MDI parent window is opened in a maiximised state InitialPos row col Initial position of the edit main window on the screen row number and column number within the 3270 terminal display InitialPos 1 1 is the top left corner of the display The default position of the CBLe parent window is based on the dimensions of the 3270 terminal If the 3270 terminal width is 80 or less the CBLe MDI parent window is opened in a maiximised state Instance Single Multiple Allow CBLi to open multiple instances or only a single instance of the CBLe editor If Instance Single then each request to edit a file will use the same CBLe edit window If Instance Multiple then requests to edit a file which originate from non CBLe command lines or from list selections will open a new instance of the CBLe editor Default value is Multiple Interface ISPF CBLe Defines the default CBLe edit interface For MVS systems the program default is ISPF for VM and VSE it is the original XEDIT KEDIT compatible CBLe interface LoadWarning nnn nnnK nnnM The number of file bytes loaded threshold factor During load of a file for edit if the number of bytes loaded exceeds a factor of the loadwarning threshold then a popup message window is displayed prompting the us
131. T clause specification Columns displayed by the prevailing SELECT clause are unchanged Executing a WHERE clause will add a new entry which includes the prevailing SELECT clause to the View List Display drop down menu Parameters WHERE Clause A logical combination of one or more simple filter expressions that define search criteria used to select the required list rows This logical combination uses the following literal logical operator names or their equivalent symbols to make a complex compare expression 2009 07 20 16 03 29 CBL Interactive CBLi 52 List Windows The Where Clause broken bar vertical line tilde gt not sign backslash Notes 1 To avoid confusion it is recomended that parentheses be used where more than two filter expressions are specified in order to establish logical AND OR precedence 2 Parentheses must be balanced so that there are an equal number of left and right parentheses exist in the where clause Filter Expr Filter test on a single column within the list display The contents of list_col are tested against a test value specified by string to establish a TRUE or FALSE condition Only if all filter expressions test TRUE will the list row be selected for display list_col The name of list column whose contents will be tested in this filter_expr Where list_colis a numeric field string must be numeric and an arithmetic compare is performed Similarly if list_colis a charac
132. TAM lt alias JGE CBLINST D070919 EXE COPY V212 CBLV lt alias JGE CBLINST D070919 EXE COPY V212 CBLV31 amode 31 lt alias JGE CBLINST D070919 EXE COPY V212 CBLV24 amode 24 lt alias JGE CBLINST D070919 EXE COPY V212 CBLV24 amode 24 dlg lt alias JGE CBLINST D070919 EXE COPY S202 SELCOPY Syntax gt gt AMS gt lt AMS Command Description Use the AMS command to open the IDCAMS Command window and optionally execute an AMS IDCAMS command The IDCAMS Command window displays the SYSPRINT SYSLST output generated on execution of the IDCAMS command 2009 07 20 16 03 29 CBL Interactive CBLi 120 CBLi Command Line Interface Parameters AMS_Command AMS IDCAMS command to be executed Examples AMS LISTCAT ENTRY CBL MCAT CMP P ALL APE Syntax gt gt APE gt lt Description AMS Use the APE Assembler Programming Environment command to display the Module List window containing the current status of all modules that comprise CBLi The Module List window may also be opened via the System menu of the CBLi main window menu bar APE may be executed to determine the level of a currently installed module View Back Forward FDB Edit Refresh Help Command gt Name Version Level EDTFWIN4 WiRGMO WINFWCLA ViIREMO IOSFFIOO WiRGMO MEMFREOO COSA IOSFYSM1 IOSLMAIN WINFWINI EEES Figure 77 Module List window BACKWARD Syntax gt
133. TrustedUser YES must be specified to activate the trusted user mechanism UserINIFile user cbliini file SYSTEM CBLIINI Only For MVS environments System UserINIFile may only be specified in the System CBLIINI file to define the full DSN of the User CBLIINI file This option will override CBLi s default method of identifying the User CBLIINI file MVS System symbols and the special variable USER or USER may be included in the fileid USER and USER denote the user s login userid e g UserINIFile amp SYSNAME DEV amp USER CBLI INI VSESMLogon YES NO SYSTEM CBLIINI Only For VSE Only activate deactivate VSE Security Manager logon BSM or ESM If activated authorities imposed by the security managed are applied to users logged on to CBLi Default value is YES 2009 07 20 16 03 29 CBL Interactive CBLi 183 CBLIINI control file CBLIINI Standard Variables SELCOPY InitialPos row col Initial position of the SELCOPY Interactive MDI parent window on the screen row number and column number within the 3270 terminal display InitialPos 1 1 is the top left corner of the display The default position of the SELCOPY parent window is based on the dimensions of the 3270 terminal If the 3270 terminal width is 80 or less the SELCOPY Interactive MDI parent window is opened in a maiximised state InitialSize rows cols Initial number of rows and columns in the SELCOPY Interactive MDI parent window The default size of the SELCOPY parent w
134. Update 2 Vv Change change_parms Hho ae 4 UPDate gt OR Stessens Vv change_parms SDE Opts Structured File Search Update ASAS USING 9 52 SETUDE Namen 2 2 2 gt STRUCT gt 4 4 gt VIEW record_type SELect select clause t HFS Opts EOL eolstr LRECL lrecl gt 4 222222 A na ia 4 2 gt RECURSE CASEIgn RECFM rfmstr Notes 1 Parameters may be entered in any order 2 At least one of FIND WHERE or CHANGE must be specified 3 AND logical operator literal or its equivalent symbol amp ampersand 4 OR logical operator literal or its equivalent symbols broken bar or vertical line Description Use the FSU command to search cataloged data sets HFS files and or PDS E members for one or more search strings and optionally perform CHANGE commands to perform data update in place Each parameter of the FSU command other than INPUT equates to an SDE CLI command to filter records and columns find and update fields within the selected data sets If FSU is executed with no parameters the FSU File Search Update Window is opened All data sets and or PDS E members whose DSNs match the fileid mask s provided on t
135. Update the zRecord field contains the expanded record data mapped with the field names defined by the record type RTO If the SELECT parameter was specified on the FSU command or File Search Update dialog window then these selected fields are displayed by default To display all fields excluding the record information fields enter the following SELECT zRecord Record Type lOError Contains information relating to an I O error that has occurred when opening reading or updating the file IOError records are located amongst the Hit records as I O errors are encountered zDsn The DSN or HFS path neame for which the I O error occurred zMember The PDS E member for which the I O error occurred This field is only present if the at least one PDS E data set is included by the input fileid mask s For non PDS E data sets this field contains blanks EngErr 1 if the error occurred when attempting to obtain an exclusive SPFEDIT ENQ for UPDATE on the file otherwise 0 2009 07 20 16 03 29 CBL Interactive CBLi 100 Utility Windows FSUUNDO OpenErr 1 if the error occurred when attempting to open the file otherwise 0 ReadErr 1 if the I O error occurred when attempting to read a block of data from the file otherwise 0 UpdErr 1 if the I O error occurred when attempting to re write update in place a record to the file otherwise 0 RecordsRead The number of records successfully read before the I O error occurre
136. VSE the Project Group and Type fields represent a LIBR library name sub library name and member type respectively n 1 99 99 available numbered list item slots in which to store commonly accessed fileids and CLI command streams Scroll up and down through the pages of list item slots using lt PF7 gt and lt PF8 gt respectively File Search Window The File Search window may be opened via the following e Select File Search from the Utilities menu in the CBLi Main Menu e Enter the CBLi command FS on the command line of any window The File Search window displays the lines in a PDS member MVS LIBR member VSE or CMS file that contain a given string CBL JCL S Command gt Dataset gt CBL JCL Sx Search string gt PGM Member 77 SDEBU EXEC PGM ADRDSSU REGION 4096K ZA SEARCH EXEC FGMSISRSUFC PAE EXEC PGM DFSRRCOO REGION amp RGN ee DD DSN IMS REL PGMLIB DISP SHR TSOBATCH EXEC PGM IKIJIEFTO1 DYNAMNBR 30 REGION 4096K SELCCOMP JGE CBLI160 ASM MEMFPGMO JGE CBLI160 FS SEE EXEC PGM SELCOPY dita by Lo Be EXEC PGM SELCOPY ASES EXE PGM SELCOPY AG EXEC PGM DFSRRCOO REGION amp RGN ral DD DSN IMS amp REL PGMLIB DISP SHR SITE RE EXEC PGM SELCOPY MAT ac POS her Loe FOR UNE TSAM CANEEEEER EY ALLOC EXEC PGM IEFBRi4 4 43ELCNAMT EXEC PGM SELCOPY PDSX EXEC PGM SELCOPY Z CHAN EXEC PGM SELCOPY Vv E gt sort Member RecNo PREBRBBNPRBERENENEEE na Figure 57 File Search window Dataset gt 0 F
137. WINDOW PER ERNS MW a windowname A X 0 Y 0D i BY on os tt Description Use MOVEWINDOW to move the specified window to an absolute X Y coordinate or to an X Y coordinate relative to its current position Coordinates 0 0 reference the top left corner of the desktop The current position of a window is defined to be the X Y coordinate of the top left corner of the window Note that it is not possible to move a window completely outside the CBLi Desktop window At least one column of the title bar must be viewable within the desktop Therefore limits governed by the currnet window position and the 3270 session screen size are imposed on the X Y values supplied on the MOVEWINDOW command Specifying X Y values that fall outside these limits result in the limit value being used A window may also be moved by dragging then dropping the window using the titlebar Similarly the default function key table for the TitleBar level contains MOVEWINDOW commands allocated to PFkeys PF07 PF08 PF10 and PF11 to position the window up and down 1 line and left and right 1 column respectively Parameters windowname The window name of the window to be moved If not supplied then the window in which the command is issued via a command line or function key is assumed TO Indicate that an absolute X Y position follows BY Indicate that a relative X Y position follows Defin
138. Window Work Area Current Input Record Window A Work Area Current Input Record storage display window is opened automatically wnen SELCOPY Interactive is started Further storage display windows may also be opened via the following e Select Work area from the View menu in the SELCOPY Main Menu 2009 07 20 16 03 29 CBL Interactive CBLi 19 Executing SELCOPY Work Area Current Input Record Window e Enter the SELCOPY Interactive CLI command WINDOW WORKAREA The current status of the user work area or input record buffer if no work area is allocated is displayed in the Work Area window A Work area window is a storage display window Note that if WORKLEN is not supplied the Work Area window has the title Current Input Record Any number of Work Area windows may be opened and each window may be tailored to display different portions of the work area The appearance of the Work Area window may be updated using the storage window display options popup menu The options available and methods used to display this menu are documented under the CBLi CLI command SHOWPOPUPMENU The work area position in the first row of the Work Area window is an enterable field highlighted in red by default Here you may enter the work area position from which data is to be displayed CBLi commands UP CURSOR and DOWN CURSOR may also be used to navigate the Work Area window By default UP CURSOR is assigned to PFO7 and DOWN CURSOR is assigned to PF08
139. a CSELECT ll CSEL Description CURSORSELECT is a generic command that performs the default operation for the field at the cursor position The default operation depends on the function of the window the window class and the field in which the cursor is positioned The default operation for a particular window field may be found in the documentation for the relevant window type CURSORSELECT is intended to be assigned to a function key to execute the same operation performed when gt Enter lt is hit DOWN Syntax gt gt DOWN E gt lt z windowname al CURSOR DATA HALF MAX PAGE nlines Description Scroll the view of the data within the specified window downwards towards the bottom of the displayable data The extent by which data is scrolled is determined by the CURSOR DATA HALF PAGE MAX or n_lines parameter which may be specified using any one of three methods determined in the following order of precedence 1 The scrolling command verb DOWN and one of these scrolling parameters is explicitly specified on the command line 2 The scrolling parameter is specified on the command line and a PFKey assigned to DOWN is actioned Note that the contents of a command line are appended to the command stream assigned to a PFKey when that PFKey is actioned 3 No scrolling parameter is specified so the current value of the Scroll gt
140. a colon 2009 07 20 16 03 29 CBL Interactive CBLi 172 USS commands The CBLe text editor and SDE Structured Data Environment Edit support HFS files and the concept of a current working directory This enables users to reference HFS files by an HFS path relative to the current working directory To fully support this functionality and assist with HFS file management for data edit certain UNIX System Services commands are supported as part of the CBLi CLI command set These commands are prefixed by USS USS prefixed CBLi CLI commands may only affect HFS path names and so specification of slash within the path name or a leading dot period in order to identify the fileid as an HFS path name is unnecessary Commana Description Se O USS CHDIR Change the current working directory USS GETCWD Display the current working directory USS LINK Define a new HFS hard link to a file USS MKDIR Define a new HFS directory Define a new HFS directory USS CHDIR Syntax gt gt USS CHDIR hfs path A io gt lt Description Change the current working directory USS CHDIR is equivalent to the USS shell command CD but without the additional options Parameters hfs_path An HFS path name representing a directory USS GETCWD Syntax gt gt USS a GETCwd g SS a O o ni gt lt Description Display the current working directory If executed from a CBLe or SDE edit view output is displayed on
141. ach authorised library may be displayed in a List Library Members window by hitting the enter key on the required entry Note Not valid for CMS and VSE View Back Forward FDB Edit Refresh Help Command gt PRRRRRRRER o UT o 0 PR 00 00 PR MAMAATIZA VOMIOMDOZ CDOCDOCA DA FTFPA ZP F a Lani ry ar iw b MONT Figure 67 APF List window Columns Displayed The data displayed is 2009 07 20 16 03 29 CBL Interactive CBLi 110 System Windows Task List Window Task List Window The Task List window may be opened to display the active tasks in the local address space via the following e Select Tasks from the Operating System window menu e Enter the CBLi command SYSTASK on the command line of any window The Task List window is a List Window and supports the standard List window features i e Field Descriptor Block Edit and Selecting Sorting and Filtering Note Not implemented for CMS and VSE View Back Forward FDB Edit Refresh Help Command gt Seq Lvl O le n IEAYAROO 000000000 1 DDOUDODOTNTO P 00000mNm0 OWOWNNUVUVO I WUMOIONATNSewW MmOOWONMMoOoO 1 2 3 4 6 gt 3 NA MN DNA afofofofofofofofof N H 00 co co 00 00 00 co co co A G a O A A tt A PO DNNAARAM r H SA m H o o Figure 68 Task List window Columns Displayed The data displayed is Allocated Storage Windows Allocated Storage and Unallocated Storage windows may be opened to displ
142. al display of the entry s fields Particularly useful for list windows that have a large number of displayed columns Assigned to PF2 by default Columns Displayed The data displayed is Entr Entry name Vo Volume serial number Catalog entry type code Data set organisation RecFm Record format recl Logical record length Blksz Block Size Allocation unit Primary space allocation Secondary space allocation Allocation total x Number of extents Trks Tracks allocated DsnPcu Dataset percent used DsKb Dataset space Kilobytes Created reation date Referenced ast referenced date Expires xpiry Date MS managed dataset DS extended HFS HFS dataset UnCat Uncataloged dataset F Extended format dataset XAttr Extended attributes exist ReBlk May be reblocked sICF ICF catalog BCS dataset 2009 07 20 16 03 29 CBL Interactive CBLi 68 Q T lo gt lo v gt O 4 O z 2 WS Yc NIM m m Z U List Windows List VTOC Files List VTOC Files The VTOC File List window may be opened via the following e Select VTOC Files from the LIST menu in the CBLi Main Menu e Enter the CBLi command LV on the command line of any window The VTOC File List window displays data set entry information in a DASD volume s Volume Table of Contents VTOC Note List VTOC Files is not supported for CMS Command gt volume CBLMO1 Filter CBL SW boo ROO SO O O SD O ae BA 2220 02 Org RecFm Lrecl Blksz _ CBLMO1 CBL APFLIB
143. alues Zero row o PA o IP o IP y A db2 into values First row 1 5 1 1 db2 into values Second row 2 6 2 2 abs IMEG values Third row 3 0 3 7 3 3 d Now print the table readloop read indb table SQ11525 CHAR PFX SEP if eof indb then goto drop print type mc goto readloop Now drop the table drop db2 sql drop table sq11525 db2 sql commit NBJIS SELCOPY SI m 6 Op bbbbbhbbbbbbihbvy cococo0oo0o0o0oooo bbhbbbbbribhbrh 0000000000000 bbhbbbbbbbhbhbb 0000000000000 bhbbbbbbbbhbr 0000000000000 bhbbbbbribhbri 0000000000000 bbhbbbbbbbbhbb 0000000000000 bhbbbbbbhbbbri 0000000000000 bhbbbbbbbhbrh 0000000000000 Za a then goto drop print type mc goto readloop e SELCOPY 501152 x Command gt TIA Csr Moo O ooo pe Hoo oot oot So O od cu k Top of File SELCOPY interactive execution started End of File SOP OVOP ON wr mu co WO howe Col 1 ALt 0 0 50 Figure 7 SELCOPY Main Window in 43x80 3270 Session Resized Child Windows Note that the Ws Window Save button may be used to save a focus child window s size and location within the parent window so that it may subsequently be restored using the Wr Window Restore button This enables the user to maintain preferred window size and location across invocations of SELCOPY Interactive All SELCOPY Interactive child windows other than list and storage windows are CBLe text edit windows i e Con
144. an be specified in each qualifier 2009 07 20 16 03 29 CBL Interactive CBLi 66 List Windows List Dataset Details If the last character of the fileid mask is dot period then this marks the end of the low level DSN qualifier within the fileid mask The trailing is stripped and no wildcard string is appended to the fileid mask e g DEV becomes DEV DEV OEM TRSPAN becomes DEV OEM TRSPAN DEV SAMP becomes DEV SAMP If the last character of the fileid mask is not dot period then a default trailing wild card string is automatically appended to the fileid mask as follows 1 If the fileid mask is a single qualifier or the last character of the fileid mask is asterisk then a wildcard string of is appended e g DEV becomes DEV DEV becomes DEV 4 DEV OEM TRSPAN becomes DEV OEM TRSPAN DEV SPA becomes DEV E SPA AR 2 Otherwise a wildcard string of is appended e g DEV OEM TRSPAN becomes DEV OEM TRSPAN DEV SPAS becomes DEV SPASA sYs1 219 becomes YSL E 219 E Note that a warning message is displayed if the high level qualifier of the fileid mask is asterisk or double asterisk A fileid mask of this type would result in all catalogs being searched which would take some time to execute and would use a large amount of system resources Catalog gt Nominate a specific catalog in which to search for the requested entry Thi
145. and O O gt lt Description Direct a command to the CBLi Structured Data Environment SDE The SDATA command allows SDE commands to be issued from any CBLi window If the CBLe text editor main window has been stopped SDATA will start the CBLe main window and open an edit view for the user s HOME CMX file before executing the SDATA command Also see the SDATA CBLe CLI command 2009 07 20 16 03 29 CBL Interactive CBLi 157 CBLi Command Line Interface SDATA Parameters sde_command Any SDE command sde command Description Performs the same action as SDATA except that if no arguments are specified the Structured Edit dialog window is opened Parameters sde_command Any SDE command Default is EDITDIALOG SDSF Syntax gt gt SDSF gt lt Description When running CBLI in TSO with or without ISPF the CBLi command SDSF starts the System Display and Search Facility SDSF is started as a full screen TSO application which returns control to CBLi only after it is closed At this time SDSF does not execute within a CBLi window SDSF may also be started via the Utilities menu of the CBLi main window menu bar SELCOPY Syntax gt SENCOPY Has a a a SSS e Sea SSeS gt lt gt gt SELCopy CIL select o O aaa A gt Ba LIB libpath e a PGM loadmod ne a a a gt lt DLI ls PSB psbn pe O ES me A aa O rr TE ies B
146. and numeric replace strings will be converted to the appropriate data type For non numeric fields and unstructured file searches all search strings and replace CHANGE strings are treated as character data The File Search amp Update utility will only allow update in place of record data so the lengths of the input records being processed cannot be changed Any CHANGE operation that results in a change to the record length will flag an error against that record in the output report If more than one CHANGE operation is required enter details of the first search and replace string in the CHANGE field then select GenerateCLI PF2 from the menu bar or simply hit PF2 to edit the FSU CLI command and add further CHANGE conditions Note that each group of CHANGE parameters that constitute a single CHANGE condition must be separated by either a logical AND or a logical OR and must be enclosed in parentheses e g CHANGE 01656 1656 PREFIX ALL OR 1656 1656 PREFIX ALL If logical AND is specified a CHANGE operation will be executed for all of the CHANGE conditions If logical OR is specified a CHANGE operation will be executed for each CHANGE condition in turn until one is successful CHANGE conditions separated by a mixture of logical AND and logical OR operators is not supported The CHANGE fields are as follow All First Last Indicates whether ALL occurrences the FIRST occurrence or the LAST occurrence
147. ands should be entered in a CBLe edited CMX file and executed using CMDTEXT PF4 2009 07 20 16 03 29 CBL Interactive CBLi 159 CBLi Command Line Interface SETCOLOUR SETCOLOUR Syntax ps Sse Sees v gt gt SEICOLOUR 4 Etrek s tival span 2 gt lt SC Description Use SETCOLOUR to remap the appearence of a colour and its associated highlighting CBLi maintains a translate table that defines how a colour highlight style combination is to be displayed Each colour highlight style combination may be remapped so that it is displayed as a different colour highlight style A colour highlight style combination is represented as a pair of descriptor characters the first of which is the initial of the colour and the second the initial of a highlight style All valid combinations are as follow Blue Blink Blue Default Blue REVVideo Blue Underline a Green Blink Green Default Green REVVideo Green Underline 1st Char w write Blink White Default white REVVideo____ white Underiine____ These descriptor pairs reference cells in the translate table as well as describing the values within a cell The default translate table is such that each cell referenced by a colour highlight combination contains that colour highlight combination i e b b le du Ie le tcc Sic oo e lese fb fer Raf fr A number of ttref and ttval pairs may be specified each defining a single update to the transla
148. arched In order to restrict the search 2009 07 20 16 03 29 CBL Interactive CBLi 135 CBLi Command Line Interface FSU to a single PDS E library and so exclude any non PDS data set that matches the fileid mask then a member mask should be specified e g SYS7 OEM CBL202 CBLI CBLE A fileid mask may also be prefixed by a volume serial mask in order to restrict the search to only those cataloged data sets that match the specified fileid mask and also have extents that exist on the specified volume s The volume serial mask must be destinguishable from the rest of the fileid mask by an intervening colon with no embedded blanks e g CBLM04 SYS7 DZ3 LRECL lrecl Specifies the maximum record length of input records belonging to all HFS files that match the HFS path fileid masks specified on the INPUT parameter Default for rec and its effect on input records is as supported by the SDE CLI command EDIT RECFM rfmstr Specify the record format F or V to be used for all HFS files that match the HFS path fileid masks specified on the INPUT parameter Possible values and default for rfmstr are as supported by the SDE CLI command EDIT Note that specification of RECFM V off len and origin parameters are enclosed in parentheses e g RECFM V 0 4 10 RECURSE For all HFS path names specified on the INPUT parameter recursively search files within all sub directories found within each HFS path
149. as been reached a pop up message window is displayed and no further attempt is made to retrieve selected 2009 07 20 16 03 29 CBL Interactive CBLi 37 DB2 Dynamic SQL DB2 Dynamic SQL rows of data The n_rows value is placed in the Select Limit gt field of the Dynamic SQL window The default limit is that defined by the CBLiINI option DB2 SelectLimit otherwise no limit is implied AutoCommit gt Determine whether a COMMIT is to be automatically issued following every transaction AutoCommit If COMMIT NO then the user should issue COMMIT manually to commit any changes made to the data A commit is executed automatically when the Dynamic SQL window is closed regardless of the AutoCommit field setting The commit value is reflected in the AutoCommit gt field of the Dynamic SQL window The default is YES SQL Statement gt Specify valid SQL syntax to be executed The resulting data or messages are displayed in the window display area The contents of the display area may be edited in a new file using the CBLe text editor by selecting Edit from the window menu Select Log from the window menu to open the SQL Log output which displays the daignosis information and SQL return codes passed from the DB2 sub system m Ylew Back Forward FDE Edit Refresh Help Command gt CBL Dynamic SQL Interface Version VI1 1 0 CBLSO10I 17 03 38 CBL Dynamic SQL Interface is started Date 2009 02 03 CBLSOOOI 17 03 38 Sel 0 Connected to DB2 Vers
150. ated half way along the width of the current display of scrollable columns becomes the last scrollable column of the display MAX Scroll left to display the first scrollable column of data PAGE Scroll left so that the scrollable column of data to the left of the first scrollable column in the current display becomes the last scrollable column of the display n_cols Scroll left a specified number of floating columns The scrollable column of data that is n_cols to the left of the first scrollable column becomes the new first scrollable column of the display LJQ Syntax gt gt LJQ 4 gt lt LISTJOBENQ jobname Description Use the LJQ List MVS Job Enqueues command to open a Job Enqueue List window containing outstanding MVS enqueues held by a given job The Job Enqueue List window may also be opened via the List menu of the CBLi main window menu bar Note Not implemented for CMS or VSE Parameters jobname The name of the job for which the ENQueues are to be listed This parameter is placed in the JobName field of the Job Enqueue List window See Also LQ Command Examples LJQ NBJTSO List Enqueues for job NBJTSO 2009 07 20 16 03 29 CBL Interactive CBLi 145 CBLi Command Line Interface LJQ LL Syntax gt gt LL 4 4 AO 5 5 gt lt LISTLIBRARY library LISTMEMBERS Des
151. ause sort_clause Each time you issue a select command with a select or where clause you create a new view of the list If you issue only a sort clause no new view is created but the sort order is changed for the current view The set of views which you have is listed in the View menu option from which you can select a view from the ones you have created with the select command The Select Clause Syntax Poseo ALD p 222229 HH gt gt SELect AO AO dE gt I Ji Faass pS A ip ee lov bo ot pot Columname t 4 hoe So Sa gt S Treep prenen e gt lt WHERE Clause SORT Clause Description Specified as a CLI command or as a parameter on WHERE or SORT the SELECT clause is used to identify field columns for display and the order in which they appear Use of a SELECT clause is not cumulative and so will replace those columns currently selected for display It also resets any prevailing WHERE and or SORT clause specifications Note that the last execution of a SELECT clause CLI command is stored and applied to any new List window of the same type e g Library List window This occurs whether the list window is opened within the same CBLi session or opened after the current CBLi session is ended and a new session started Executing a SELECT clause will add a new entry to the View List Display drop down menu Parameters ALL ALL returns all column
152. ay areas of allocated free and unallocated storage in the local address space Separate storage windows display storage of types Private PVT CSA SQA and LSQA and may be opened by selecting the required storage type from a pop up menu displayed on selecting Storage from the Operating System window menu The storage windows are List Windows and support standard List window features i e Field Descriptor Block Edit and Selecting Sorting and Filtering Note Not implemented for CMS and VSE cated storage View Back Forward FDB Edit Refresh Help Command gt Pool Ke ags Status Tupe Pee al Ba PHT PYT PVT PVT PVT PVT Ww mm ool 000000000 I 000000000 1 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 CO A DDDDDDDDDO PRRRRRRRRD Ue UY OI 69 0000 00 UY mm m m m m m mtefefofofofoaf 000000000 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 CONT Seo0o000000T 00 00 CO 00 00 00 00 KOO S000000000p coo0oo0ooooosoa co0o0o0o0oooona SY AAA AAA Bono Jnmbiim S0000NoOD0DONn 0000NO J00Nn 000000000 1 000000000 1 ooooooooor Fooooooooom 000000000 WUrPWrPONGoRG Socoroonor SO0S0O0NONDoJ 10O00000wWwWO 1 Figure 69 Allocated Private Storage window 2009 07 20 16 03 29 CBL Interactive CBLi 111 System Windows Allocated Storage Windows Columns Displayed The data displayed is TCB Loaded Programs Window The Loaded Programs window may be opened to display programs that have been dynamically loaded into the local address space via the following
153. ay be opened via the following e Select Allocated Files from the LIST menu in the CBLi Main Menu e Enter the CBLi command LA on the command line of any window The resultant Allocated Datasets window displays all current file allocations defined to the environment running CBLi i e Command gt DDName gt SINE Gn a SIS SPSS SOS aa EE pI RP PS Ree SS RSS SSS SOS a Member Vol AGE ER LNT 1 NBJ2 NBJI2 T1SUG0119 bdDe000101 7 __ AOFTABL 1 AUT310 AOFTABL Z9RE DITEL TITB 1 DIT12 0 SQITPLIB ZaRE IAWCONF 1 AUT310 IHYCONF ZaRE gt ISPEXEC 1 ISP SISPEXEC ZORE ISPEXEC 2 SYS1 SBPXEXEC Z3RE ISPEXEC 3 CSQ600 SCSQEXEC ZSRE MS TT SPEAEGC 4 EUV SEUWEXEC ZORE SS SPECE 1 CBL SSC EXE CBLM SPECI B oq ejaV Ss ies y CBLM TO SPECITB AMES PLE CBLM SPEETS 4 GEN ISPLLIB CBLM PS PINE S GDDM SADMMOD ZORE PS PTE 6 FMNS10 SFMNMODI ZJRE TSPELIB 7 CSQ60D SCSQAUTH Zone TSPLLIB 8 AUTS10 SINGMOD1 Z9RE TKSPELCTB 3 DSN910 SDSNLOAD Z3DB Pores 10 CBL CAI CAILIB CBLM Line E E 1 0 109 Wi Figure 45 List MVS Allocated Datasets window DDName gt Select only DDNames that begin with the specified Character string Prefix Line Commands The following prefix line commands are available blank Prefix line command M if entry is a PDS PDSE library prefix line command E otherwise The ENTER key must be pressed with the cursor on the line containing the PDS 2009 07 20 16 03 29 CBL Interactive CBLi 73
154. ay window By default the SHOWPOPUPMENU command is assigned to PF5 in storage display windows Window Sizing User resizing of a storage display window s width will always be adjusted by CBLi to display one of the valid data display widths i e 1 2 4 or 8 words of hexadecimal data plus its equivalent character representation if required If the window s width is increased or decreased by one column the window s width is rounded up or down respectively to equal the next valid display width e g When using DRAGBORDERPLUS and DRAGBORDERMINUS assigned to PF8 PF11 and PF7 PF10 respectively on either of the window s vertical borders If the window s width is increased or decreased by more than one column the window s width is always rounded down to equal the next valid display width Navigating Data The displacement field in the first row of a storage display window is an enterable field highlighted in red by default This field may be overwritten with a displacement from the start address of the byte that should be displayed first in the storage window s display area CBLi commands UP CURSOR and DOWN CURSOR may be used to navigate the storage display window By default UP CURSOR is assigned to PF7 and DOWN CURSOR is assigned to PF8 Manipulating Data Some storage display window invocations allow the data to be updated simply by overtyping the existing character or hexadecimal representation and then to commit the change hitting lt
155. bytesM The maximum storage available for SDE edit of a single data set An SDE edited data set is limited by the lesser of the prevailing MAXSTOR value and the amount of free private area storage above the 16MB line available within the region at the time of open This limit is used to determine the SDE edit technique and data record management used to edit the data set This value may be specified as a number of bytes n_bytes number of kilobytes n_bytesK or a number of megabytes n_bytesM The default value is O unset This CBLiINI option may be updated using the SDE CLI command SET MAXSTOR PL1Compiler fileid Specifies the full DSN and member name of the PL1 Compiler module e g IEL330 SIBMZCMP IBMZPLI CBLi SDE will invoke the PL1 compiler if requested to generate an internal SDE structure from a PL1 Copy Book Specification of PL1Compiler is necessary only if your PL1 compiler program module is not named IBMZPLI and is not a member of a library within the Link List This CBLiINI option may be updated using the SDE CLI command SET COMPILER PL1 2009 07 20 16 03 29 CBL Interactive CBLi 190 Glossary The following is a glossary of terms used in this document 3270 Emulator Third party software that emulates Mainframe 3270 hardware terminals on PC and UNIX based platforms CLI A Command Line Interface is a text based method by which users can execute functions supported by the application CBLe A powerful text ed
156. ce EO ERASE Syntax e Erase an MVS data set HFS file or PDS E member gt gt ERAse SS foo PIIeid Hass Testes ese ese napa gt lt PE molido ate 4 e Erase a CMS file on an accessed minidisk gt gt ERAse mnnn Ea Filed 525 5 252 29s222 Se gt lt e Erase a VSE sequential or VSAM file gt gt ERAse volid k op S 2 A SSeS eS See gt lt catdsn Description Erase delete a single sequential DASD file HFS file PDS E member or VSAM file To succeed the user must have sufficient read write authority for the file and no exclusive ENQ or LOCK should already exist for the file For VSE sequential files may only be erased if the CBL software product CBLVCAT is licensed CBLi uses CBLVCAT s DEL operation to perform the erase Parameters volid For MVS uncataloged data sets and VSE sequential disk files this is the volume serial number of the DASD volume on which the file resides catdsn For VSE VSAM files this is the full fileid of the VSAM catalog to which the VSAM managed file belongs fileid The full fileid of the file to be erased For MVS specification of a leading dot period or slash identifies fileid as being an absolute or relative HFS path name Erasing an HFS path name performs a USS UNLINK operation for the individual HFS path name and so alternate path names to the same data are unaffected Examples erase test exec a Erase CM
157. cess checking specifies the MVS RACF or equivalent resource name to be applied when an 2009 07 20 16 03 29 CBL Interactive CBLi 188 CBLIINI control file CBLIINI Standard Variables attempt is made to start SELCOPY Interactive either via the drop down menus or the CLI command interface Default is CBLI SELCOPY The resource name must first be defined to the resource class specified in the ResourceClass option CBLVCAT ResourceName For CBLi resource access checking specifies the MVS RACF or equivalent resource name to be applied when an attempt is made to start CBLVCAT Interactive either via the drop down menus or the CLI command interface Default is CBLI CBLVCAT The resource name must first be defined to the resource class specified in the ResourceClass option DB2 ResourceName For CBLi resource access checking specifies the MVS RACF or equivalent resource name to be applied when an lo is made to start the DB2 SQL Window either via the drop down menus or the CLI command interface Default is BLI DB2 The resource name must first be defined to the resource class specified in the ResourceClass option Trace VTAM327010 YES NO Used to provide diagnostic information for CBLi execution under VTAM Default value is NO Help DefaultPath pathname Ignored for CMS Set the default path for the CBLi and CBLe help files For VSE this is the name of the LIBR sub library containing the help files For MVS this is the name of th
158. commands and macros This allows the user to manipulate highlight and locate data in the view e g LOCATE TAG ALL CHANGE SET ZONE etc SOLLOG NBJ SELCOPY 3011525 SOLLOG 133 Y SEQ Command lsastanaslossotfaniaZdonao Proa doo Pro Doa ooo Boras Por oro Taena da a Pra Doa poa CBL Dynamic SQL Interface Version 2 02 AT x eo CBLSO10I 16 55 52 CBL Dynamic SUL Interface is started Date 2009 01 14 000005 CBLSO00I 16 56 53 Sel 1 Connected to DBZ Version 9 1 0 000006 Subsystem DBSG Plan COLPL NO nel User NBJ Current SOLID NBI eet CBLS O7I 16 58 55 Sel 1 EXECUTE CREATE SQL Code 0 000011 create fable sq11525 char char iO not null with default deci decti o OOOG12 gt not null with default dec2 decti not null with default 000013 deca dec i 1 not null with default inti int not null with 000014 default dec4 dec Z 0 not null with default decs dec 2 0 not 000015 null with default dece dec 2 2 not null with default dec dect 0000165 3 32 not null with default decs dect4 3 not null with default 000017 intz int not null with default dec9 dec s 3 not null with 000013 default dec dec 4 0 gt not null with default decB dec 3 0 not 000019 null with default gt pote DBZ CPU 000000 2643942 seconds 0000272 CBLSOO7I 16 58 55 Sel 2 EXECUTE COMMIT Code 0 ane CPU OOOO 009960 seconds a CBLS O7I 16 55 55 Sel 3 EXECUTE INSERT SQL Code 0 000027 insert into sq11525 values Zero row 0 0 0
159. cords Records comprise a number of fields of various data types containing totals values and record information for the searched and or updated records prefix FSU Dyyyyjjj Thhmmss SDO An SDE Structured Data Object SDO containing a number of record types RTO used to map data fields in the report records data set Note The high level qualifier prefix is the value assigned to System UserDSNPrefix in the USER CBLIINI file At the start of execution the File Search amp Update utility automatically opens an SDE Edit window view to display the structured report records The display is refreshed every second as the operation executes allowing the user to view the progress Since the data sets exist in storage only performance is greatly improved However following completion of the operation and on closing the FSU output window view the user is prompted to save the 2 data sets to disk The report data will be saved as a VSAM ESDS data set and the accompanying SDO as a sequential data set It is strongly recommended that the user save these files following an execution of FSU for UPDATE This will provide the user with an audit trail and the necessary input required to execute FSUUNDO to reverse the changes if necessary It also allows the user to browse the output from previous FSU executions using FSUOUT Purely as a safety mechanism the user will also be prompted to save the data sets if a READ or UPDATE I O error occurs before the run has
160. cription Use the LL List Library command to open a Library List window and optionally list the members of an MVS PDS PDSE VSE LIBR library or CMS minidisk The Library List window may also be opened via the List menu of the CBLi main window menu bar Note Not implemented for CMS Parameters library The name of the library for which the contents are to be listed 0 For MVS the library parameter is a PDS or PDSE dataset name and optionally one or more member name mask A member name mask supports the following wild cards 5 A single asterisk represents an entire member name or zero or more characters within a member name mask oe A single percent sign represents exactly one character within a member name mask Up to 8 percent signs can be specified in each member name mask If specified the member name mask must immediately follow the PDS E DSN and be enclosed in parentheses Multiple member name masks all specified within the single set of parentheses must be separated by one or more blanks and or a comma e g LL DEV OEM CBL202 CBLI HELP HIML S ANS WIN R 0 For VSE the library parameter can be 1 A library name In this case the statistics for the library are listed e g LL CBLLIB men 2 A library name and sublibrary name In this case the sublibrary name may be a mask containing asterisk wild cards as supported by VSE Librarian The statistics for all sublibraries which fit the sublibrary
161. ctions such as c2x Character to Hex c2d Character to Decimal x2d Hex to Decimal d2x Decimal to Hex Expression x2d 7FD8 Value gt 32728 Figure 54 REXX Calculator window Calendar Window The Calendar window may be opened via the following e Select Calendar from the Utilities menu item of the CBLi main menu e Enter the CBLi command CALendar on the command line of any window When opened the calendar window shows the current month with today s date highlighted Each day has the day of the month and the Julian day number displayed in a table You can scroll the calendar backwards and forwards by the month or the year or you can enter a specific year or month in the fields at the top of the window To scroll the calendar use the following commands Command Default PF ke SCROLL UP SCROLL DOWN SCROLL LEFT SCROLL RIGHT 2009 07 20 16 03 29 CBL Interactive CBLi 86 Utility Windows Calendar Window 1 032 5 6 7 8 036 037 038 039 31 1 11 12 13 14 15 040 041 042 043 044 045 046 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 047 048 049 050 051 052 053 23 24 25 26 27 28 054 055 056 057 058 059 Figure 55 Calendar window FAV Favourites Datasets Commands Window The FAV Favourite Datasets Commands window may be opened via the following e Select Favourites from the Utilities menu in the CBLi Main Menu e Enter the CBLi command FAV on the command line of any window Backed by customer demand for an
162. current display is checked in turn until one is found which is greater than or equal to the entered string 2009 07 20 16 03 29 CBL Interactive CBLi 54 List Windows List Entry Location The display is scrolled so that the row containing the field entry equal to the entered string otherwise the entry immediately less than the entered string is made the first row of the list display This technique is only successful if the first column of the list display meets the following requirements 1 The column is keyed Key Yes 2 The column contains character data Type Char 3 The column s fields are sorted in ascending order This information is available from the FDB Unless a SELECT clause has been executed which changes the first column of the display these criteria are usually always met by standard list windows Location of list entries is also achieved using the following e FIND RFIND Command e LOCATE Command e S Command FIND Command Syntax gt gt Find string soos a 2222022120222 gt lt gt gt RFIND gt lt Description Find is used to scroll the display to the next list entry to contain the specified search string anywhere within a field in the the first column of the display If no match is found for string then no scrolling occurs Following a successful FIND operation RF IND assigned to PF5 by default may be used
163. cus window is the window which contains the cursor when the 3270 screen is displayed If the window has a title bar then the fact that it is the focus window is indicated by colouring the title bar area with blue reverse video All other windows have a white reverse video caption bar Input fields The focus window defines the input rectangle which is the only area of the screen where input is enabled When the focus window is not a child window the input rectangle is the window itself When the focus window is a child window the input rectangle is that defined by its parent Any input fields outside of the input rectangle are temporarily disabled Each field in the input rectangle can be visited by using the cursor tab key shift cursor tab key to reverse the direction 2009 07 20 16 03 29 CBL Interactive CBLi 4 Getting started with CBLi Window Focus Changing the focus window The user can change the focus window in the following ways e By placing the cursor in a window and pressing enter This sets the focus to the window containing the cursor e By using the PREVWINDOW NEXTWINDOW MDIPREV or MDINEXT commands These commands cycle through all windows in creation sequence By default PF9 is assigned to MDINext in MDI applications such as CBLe and SELCOPY Interactive and Nextwindow elsewhere e By using the Window item of the CBLi main menu or the WINDOWLIST command to open the Window List window and then selecting a window by moving th
164. d RecordsUpd The number of records successfully updated before the I O error occurred FSUUNDO The FSUUNDO utility exists in order to allow the user to recover from any accidental or erroneous execution of the File Search amp Update FSU utility where update of record data has occured Beware FSUUNDO does not support recovery of records in an HFS file FSUUNDO will bypass FSU report Hit records that contain an HFS path name so that updated HFS file records are not recovered Bypassed HFS files are reported in the FSUUNDO output listing When the FSU utility is executed to change and immediately UPDATE data set records the original record data before execution of the change operation s is recorded in the FSU output report data set FSUUNDO uses these report records as part of its processing and so will only operate successfully if the FSU report data set exists Therefore it is strongly recommended that when prompted on exit from the report data set users elect to save the report and its accompanying SDE structure SDO for audit purposes and also for potential subsequent execution of FSUUNDO FSU report output reflecting FIND or NOUPDATE run types need not be saved If used as input to FSUUNDO FSU report output of run type FIND will return an error FSUUNDO generates a SELCOPY executable program that performs the following Input the FSU report records For each Hit record Before and After pair reported in the F
165. d WHERE parameters are omitted EOL eolstr Specify the EOLIN input end of line delimiter to be used for determining the end of a record for all HFS files that match the HFS path fileid masks specified on the INPUT parameter Possible values and default for eo str are as supported by the SDE CLI command SET EOLIN FIND find_parms AND OR Specifies one or more FIND search string and associated parameters FIND and WHERE are used to select records from the specified data set search chain If CHANGE is also specified then the CHANGE operations are executed against the selected records only Each find_parms specification is a combination of parameters supported by the SDE CLI command FIND For Unstructured File Search i e no SDE Options field references other than 1 or Record that are specified within find_parms are invalid If multiple find_parms combinations are specified each group of FIND parameters must be enclosed in parentheses Multiple find_parms combinations must also be separated by either logical AND or logical OR operators Note that a combination of both AND and OR logical operators is invalid This indicates whether a record must satisfy all find_parms operations or only one of the find_parms operations in order to be selected e g FSU INPUT DEV USERO1 JCL FSU INPUT DEV TEST DATAX3 FIND FSU INPUT DEV USER COBOL COPYBOOK USING DEV TEST SDO SDDATAX3 FIND
166. d either execute it or place it on the command line for editing before execution et the command line attributes Perform the default operation based on the cursor position Scroll the window display downwards Drag the window s border closer to the top left corner of the display Drag the window s border away from the top left corner of the display Open the CBLe text editor to edit a file Display output queue listing Erase a file F F F MS Open the IDCAMS Command window An AMS IDCAMS command can be passed as a P FORWARD Scroll the display forwards by one page Fs o Open the File Search window FSU Open the File Search Update window Open the help top level window Place focus on the CBLe edit view containing the user s command centre file Open the IEBCOPY Dialog window Toggle between TSO and ISPF 3270 1 0 Start ISPF Utilities Panel Set a function key or open the function key dialog Open the list allocated files window Open the cataloged files list window For MVS a partial dataset name can be passed as a parameter For VSE not yet implemented For CMS a file name type and mode pattern can be passed as a parameter L L L Q A S S Open the Favourites Panel U Open the dataset details list window For MVS a partial dataset name can be passed as a parameter For VSE not yet implemented For CMS a file name type and mode pattern can be passed as a parameter Scroll the window display to the le
167. d file search USING SELECT and VIEW Specific to HFS paths are parameters EOL RECFM LRECL RECURSE and CASEIGN More complex and detailed data search and change criteria can be expressed in the FSU command syntax than can be catered for using an interactive panel For example the File Search Update window supports specification of only one FIND and CHANGE condition and also entry of a finite number of characters in each parameter field Therefore in circumstances where the dialog window does not sufficiently accomodate the user s search and update arguments the dialog should be used to generate the FSU command allowing the user to insert the required arguments without restriction Unstructured File Search amp Update Unstructured File Search amp Update is the most commonly used format and means that the operation is executed without an accompanying SDE structure to map data fields within the input records i e The USING field is disabled Records are treated as a single character string of length equal to the record length as with standard CBLe text edit Structured File Search amp Update The more advanced Structured File Search amp Update is invoked where a CBLi Structure Data Environment SDE structure name SDO is specified via the USING parameter An attempt is made to associate each input record with a record type RTO defined in the structure and if successful the field definitions within the RTO are used to map the data
168. d to step through the SELCOPY control statements logically one at a time By default STEPINTO is assigned to PF02 Any branch to a SELCOPY sub routine via a DO PERFORM or GOSUB operation will be Stepped Into e processing is paused on each control statement in the sub routine STEPINTO and STEPOVER set and then unset temporary break points in the SELCOPY control statements in order to pause processing Parameters STEPINTO has no parameters STEPOVER Syntax Description Use the STEPOVER command to step through the SELCOPY control statements logically one at a time By default STEPOVER is assigned to PF01 Any branch to a SELCOPY sub routine via a DO PERFORM or GOSUB operation will be Stepped Over i e the sub routine is executed and processing is paused again on the control statement following the sub routine call STEPINTO and STEPOVER set and then unset temporary break points in the SELCOPY control statements in order to pause processing 2009 07 20 16 03 29 CBL Interactive CBLi 26 Executing SELCOPY STEPOVER Parameters STEPOVER has no parameters TRACK Syntax gt gt TRack expr gt lt colour OFF Description Use the TRACK command to track the value of a valid SELCOPY POS expression as a position in storage The single byte addressed by the POS expression is highlighted in all open storage windows in which the position is d
169. default If no macro path is given then no implicit macros can be executed though immediate instorage or full file name macros can be defined and executed MVS CBLIINI file example MacroPath USER CBLEDIT MACROS SYSTEM CBLEDIT MACROS CMS The macro path is a list of file types and optional file modes If given the file mode must be separated from the file type with a period For example to search for a CBLe macro name match on files on the B disk with file type of EDITMAC then the macro path should include EDITMAC B If no macro path is specified in either the USER or SYSTEM CBLIINI files or via a SET MACROPath command then the default is to search all accessed disks for files with file name equal to the given macro name and file types as follows in order 1 CBLE 2 CBLEDIT 3 XEDIT If a macro path is specified only files with the given file types and modes will be loadable as macros CMS CBLIINI file example MacroPath CBLETEST A CBLE CBLEDIT VSE The macro path is a list of LIBR sub libraries and or LIBR chain LIBDEF names The sub libraries must exist but the chain names are not checked If no macro path is specified in either the USER or SYSTEM CBLIINI files or via a SET MACROPath command then the default is the LIBR PROC LIBDEF chain If a macro path is specified the PROC LIBDEF chain is not searched unless explicitly named in the macro path Members are searched for with the following member types in this order 1 CBLE
170. dow to locate lines in the current HTML page that contain a specified string Not yet supported Source Open a CBLe text editor window to edit the source for the current HTML page Options Tailor options for the current HTML browse window Not yet supported Text Open a CBLe text editor window to edit the current HTML page as plain text with file name UNTITLED Help Display this help page Location gt Specify an explicit HTML source fileid If only a file name is specified then the HTML browse window will search the Help Defaultpath library for that file name This allows the user to display any file containing basic HTML tags that is not necessarily associated with the CBLi suite of help files 2009 07 20 16 03 29 CBL Interactive CBLi 117 CBLi Command Line Interface You can issue CBLi commands from the command line at the Command gt prompt Most main menu commands have a command line equivalent A A ALIAS Open the Create ALIAS dialog window includes support for PDSE Load libraries parameter Open the CBLi Module List Scroll the display backwards by one page Display the last lines of data Open the CBLe text editor to edit a file read only Open the calendar window Open the calculator window Pass a command directly to the CBLi command processor Open a storage window containing the loaded CBLNAME module Close a window Pick up a command from the text displayed in a window at the cursor position an
171. e The window name of the window in which the display is to be scrolled If not supplied then the window in which the command is issued via a command line or function key is assumed CURSOR The scrollable column on which the cursor is positioned becomes the first scrollable column of the display If the cursor is positioned outside the display area in a KEY field or on the first scrollable column within the display area then RIGHT PAGE is executed instead DATA Scroll right so that the last scrollable column in the current display area becomes the first scrollable column of the display HALF Scroll a number of columns so that the column situated half way along the width of the current display of scrollable columns becomes the first scrollable column of the display MAX Scroll right to display the last scrollable column of data Where the display area is able to contain all columns of data the first scrollable column becomes the first scrollable column of the display Otherwise the last scrollable column of data becomes the last column of the scrolled display PAGE Scroll right so that the column of data to the right of the last scrollable column in the current display becomes the first scrollable column of the display n_cols Scroll right a specified number of columns The column of data that is n_cols to the right of the first scrollable column becomes the new first scrollable column of the display SDATA Syntax gt gt SData sde_comm
172. e Also VCAT Command Examples LVR listvcat key nbj type c LVR listvtoc vol cblmct LX Syntax gt gt LX 4 4 gt lt LISTEXTENTS volume Description Use the LX List VTOC Extents command to open a VTOC Extent List window and optionally list by physical extent the entries contained in a DASD volume s Volume Table of Contents VTOC LVR The VTOC Extent List contains an entry for each extent on the volume including free extents and volume control areas such as the VTOC and the label area The VTOC Extent List window may also be opened via the List menu of the CBLi main window menu bar Note Not implemented for CMS or VSE Parameters volume The 1 6 character volume id containing the required VTOC This parameter is placed in the Volume field of the VTOC Extent List window See also LV Command List VTOC entries by Data Set Name Examples LX CBLMO1 List extents on volume id CBLM01 MAXIMISE Syntax gt gt MAXIMISE gt lt II MAX meee windowname Description This command maximises the specified window This command is equivalent to selecting the Maximise Button of the window to be maximised 2009 07 20 16 03 29 CBL Interactive CBLi 150 CBLi Command Line Interface MAXIMISE Parameters windowname The window name of the window to maximise If not supplied then the window
173. e FDB for Type Char and Key Yes 2009 07 20 16 03 29 CBL Interactive CBLi 55 List Windows LOCATE Command Parameters string A character search string used in the compare against data at the start of fields in the first column of the display S Command Syntax Description Supported as a CLI line command for Library Lists only S member will perform the default operation i e Edit on the specified library member S is also supported as a List window prefix command which applies to all types of List window In this case S will execute the default operation for the particular list entry type the same as placing the cursor on the list entry and hitting lt Enter gt Parameters member The library member name Prefix Commands The prefix area is a two character enterable field occupying the first 2 columns of any Execute CBLVCAT window List window or File Search window The field is displayed with underscore characeters to indicate that it is enterable The following table identifies all Execute CBLVCAT window List window or File Search window prefix commands and their equivalent actions A Open the Create Alias dialog window B Open the CBLe text editor to to perform SDATA BROWSE on the entry Cc Copy the entry D Delete the entry User will be prompted to verify the deletion E Open the CBLe text editor to edit the entry EX Execute the library member entry Invokes the TSO command EXECUTE using the e
174. e Library List window may be opened via the following e Select Library Members from the LIST menu in the CBLi Main Menu e Enter the CBLi command LL on the command line of any window The Library List window displays members of a PDS PDSE MVS or LIBR VSE library View Back Forward FDB Edit Refresh Help Command gt Library gt Lib PEDLIVSET ERETTI PRD2 VSE PRD2 LI Figure 47 Library List window displaying VSE libraries beginning PRD Library List CBLLIB2 UB View Back Forward FDB Edit Refresh Help Command gt Library gt CBLLIB2 CB Lib SubLib CreDate CreTime Members BlksUsed Size Lo CBLLIB2 CBLI150 88 05 21 14 47 02 1254 21493 0 CBLLIB2 CB070128 07 04 12 17 06 58 1154 11843 0 LiD SUbDLi D Figure 48 Library List window displaying VSE library CBLLIB2 sub libraries beginning CB Library List CBLLIBZ2 CBO0r0123 View Back Forward FDB Edit Refresh Help Command gt Library CBLLIB2 CB070128 Lib SubLib Habar c TUpee i si SSCS tiie OS Sookie Ts NOE CBLLIB2 CB070128 ABTRAPOL HTML S 1 4525 CBLLIB2 CBO07TO0128 ACCESSED HTML S 1 1642 CBLLIB2 CBO70128 ADABASOO HTML S ak 383972 4 CBLLIB2 C6070128 ADABASO1 HTML S 1 4924 CBLLIB2 CBO70128 ADDOOGBOL HTML S al 8874 CBLLIB2 CBO70128 AGENTS HTML S 1 3754 CBLLIB2 CBO70128 AGENTSOO HTML S 1 TO CBLLIB2 CBO70128 ALIAS HTML S 4 7203 CBEETE gt CRBs ALELETLEES HTME S al 2330 CBLLTEZ CBO7o0128 ALLOC HTML Ss a 21445
175. e PDS PDSE containing the help file members without the lowest level qualifier which must be HTML e g If the help PDS PDSE is called CBL CBL1I HELP HTML then specify DefaultPath CBL CBLI HELP SDE MVS Only AuxDSNPrefix prefix The dataset name prefix maximum length 26 to be used by CBLI SDE when allocating a default Auxiliary Edit data set If prefix exceeds 26 characters then truncation occurs Qualifiers of the form Dyyyyddd Thhmmssx representing the current data and time are appended to the dump data set name prefix qualifiers This CBLiINI option may be updated using the SDE CLI command SET AUXDSNPREFIX Default value is USER CBLI SDEAUX COBOLCompiler fileid Specifies the full DSN and member name of the COBOL Compiler module e g GY330 SIGYCOMP IGYCRCTL CBLi SDE will invoke the COBOL compiler if requested to generate an internal SDE structure from a COBOL Copy Book 2009 07 20 16 03 29 CBL Interactive CBLi 189 CBLIINI control file CBLIINI Standard Variables Specification of COBOLCompiler is necessary only if your COBOL compiler program module is not named IGYCRCTL and is not a member of a library within the Link List This CBLiINI option may be updated using the SDE CLI command SET COMPILER COBOL LoadWarning n_recs The number of file records loaded threshold factor During load of a file from disk for SDE edit or browse if the number of records loaded exceeds a factor of the loadwarning thresho
176. e QUIT to exit and close the current CBLi window 2009 07 20 16 03 29 CBL Interactive CBLi 154 CBLi Command Line Interface QUIT If the current window is the CBLi main window then a pop up window prompts the user to confirm whether or not to quit the CBLi session RENAME Syntax e Rename an MVS data set HFS file or PDS E member or a CMS file on an accessed minidisk gt gt REName fileidl fileid2 gt lt e Rename a VSE sequential or VSAM file gt gt REName 4 wolid ph y fileidI e ileido gt lt catdsn Description Rename a single sequential DASD file HFS file PDS E member or VSAM file To succeed the user must have sufficient read write authority for the file and no exclusive ENQ or LOCK should already exist for the file In an MVS environment when renaming a PDS member parameters should be specified in one of the following formats 1 fileid1 is the data set and member name of the member to be renamed and fileid2 is the new member name only 2 fileid1 is the quoted data set and member name for the member to be renamed and fileid2 is the quoted data set and new member name This second method also applies to MVS sequential and VSAM data sets whereupon RENAME executes the following IDCAMS command ALTER fileidl NEWNAME fileid2 Therefore types of file that may be renamed and the supported format of fileid1
177. e Utilities menu of the CBLi main window menu bar KEYS Syntax gt gt KEYS O gt lt po SETFKEYS 4 DEFAULT E RE O eee eee a SEK a be windowname a ao DELAY aed 1 pfn A aa windowclass a L BEFORE a cmd k CAPTION m BORDER i Description Use the KEYS command to assign a command to a function key or display the Function Keys window Parameters null Opens the Function Keys Command Tables for the current window DEFAULT Selects the system default function key table CAPTION Selects the window caption function key table BORDER Selects the window border function key table windowname Selects the function key table of the window name specified windowclass Selects the function key table of the window class specified pin The function key number 1 24 cmd 2009 07 20 16 03 29 CBL Interactive CBLi 139 CBLi Command Line Interface KEYS The command text string to be assigned If null then the function key becomes unassigned DELAY Place the function key command on the command line when the key is pressed rather than execute it BEFORE Execute the function key command before processing any user screen inputs Examples KEYS EDTWEDIT 16 macro delblank Set PF16 to execute user edit macro DELBLANK for all windows of windowclass EDTWEDIT LA Syntax gt gt LA 4 gt lt LISTALLOC t dd
178. e WINDOW command to open and place focus on the nominated window type Windows may also be opened via the Window menu of the SELCOPY Interactive main window menu bar Parameters AT Open and place focus on the Pointer window CTL Open and place focus on the Control Cards window Note that closing the Control Cards window also exits SELCOPY Interactive EQUATES Open and place focus on the Equates window LIST Open and place focus on the Output Listing window Note that closing the Output Listing window also exits SELCOPY Interactive PCB Open the PCB window POS expr Open a POS window A valid SELCOPY POS expression must be specified to define the start address of the storage display SQL Open the SQL Log window WORKAREA Open a storage window Work Area window WTO Open the WTO Log window TRACE Open and place focus on the Trace window Note that closing the Trace window also exits SELCOPY Interactive SELCOPY Interactive Function Keys You can assign 3270 Program Function Keys PFKeys to CBLi and CBLe commands as applicable The CBLi KEYS command may be used to display and globally assign Function key settings 2009 07 20 16 03 29 CBL Interactive CBLi 28 Executing SELCOPY SELCOPY Interactive Function Keys SELCOPY Interactive PFKeys have default functions assigned as determined by the window s class i e Edit Storage or List In addition to these edit views and storage windows have the following PFKey defin
179. e cursor to the relevant entry and pressing enter The selected window becomes the focus window e By using the SETFOCUS command to explicitly name the focus window Window Names All the windows defined by a CBL3270 application have a name The name is supplied by the application when the window is created and may be changed later during the window s life If the name is not supplied by the application then a default name is supplied by CBL3270 made up of the window class name suffixed with a three digit number which is incremented by 1 for each window of the class created during the CBL3270 session The main use of window names is to allow commands entered on the command line of a window to refer to other windows which are currently part of the application Viewing Window Names The window name associated with each non MDI window in the CBLi session may be displayed in that window s title bar and subsequently hidden from view via the following e Select Display Hide Window Names from the system menu belonging to any open window e Enter the CBLi command WINDOWNAMES on the command line of any window Either of these operations will display or hide the window names for all open windows in the CBLi session Display of all MDI window names e g CBLe text editor window names has been suppressed to avoid overcrowding the title bar Alternatively the Window List window may be used to obtain a window s associated window name The window lis
180. e focus command to be executed based on the cursor position when CMDTEXT is 2009 07 20 16 03 29 CBL Interactive CBLi 124 CBLi Command Line Interface CMDTEXT executed A prefix can be added at the start of the line of command text but following lt or gt to indicate that any occurence of the character in the command text is to be treated as part of the command data lt less than X 4C If found in the first 4 characters including leading blanks of the line of command text indicates that immediate execution is required Characters in front of the lt are ignored This allows comment indication characters to exist and so enabling insertion of point and shoot commands in JCL etc e g lt sub 00 JobName Submit and wait in SDSF for output gt greater than X 6E As above for lt but indicating that the command is to be placed on the command line for potential edit and delayed execution by hitting lt Enter gt This is the default if neither lt nor gt is found in the first four characters Vv underscore X 6D The first occurence of this character is always removed from the command text and indicates the location at which the cursor is positioned when the command is placed on the command line for edit Note that if the first occurence of _ in the command is to be treated as part of the command data then an extra _ must be added before the before it e g gt e my jcl Job_01
181. e the horizontal coordinate If absolute n must be a positive integer The window will be moved horizontally so that the top left corner of the window is in column n Default value for nis 1 If relative n is an integer that may be prefixed by plus or minus to indicate a positive or negative horizontal displacement The window will be moved horizontally n columns to the right positive or left negative from its current position Default value for nis 0 Define the vertical coordinate If absolute m must be a positive integer The window will be moved vertically so that the top left corner of the window is in row n Default value for mis 1 If relative mis an integer that may be prefixed by plus or minus to indicate a positive or negative vertical displacement The window will be moved vertically m rows downwards positive or upwards negative from its current position Default value for mis 0 Examples MOVEWINDOW TO X 32 Window is moved to column 32 row 1 Y 1 is default MW TO X 32 Y 80 Window is moved to column 32 row 80 However if row 80 is outside the 3270 display then the window is moved so that the title bar is displayed in the last visible row 2009 07 20 16 03 29 CBL Interactive CBLi 152 CBLi Command Line Interface MOVEWINDOW MW BY X 2 Y 5 Window is moved 2 columns to the right and 5 columns upwards NEXTMAINWINDOW Syntax gt gt NEXTMAINWINDOW gt lt NMW
182. e types with file name beginning SS on all accessed mini disks SS EXEC Search string gt The character search string The search string is not case sensitive and must be enclosed in single or double quotes if it includes blank characteres Prefix Line Commands For MVS systems the following prefix line commands are available B foren the CB tes pao SDATA BROWSE one ey Se TT E fe Jopen the CBLe text editor to editihisenty gt Open the FSU File Search Update Window to perform an advanced search and optionally update the contents of the entry Open the File Search window for the entry J Submit the entry to batch Executes the CBLe CLI SUBMIT command using the entry name as input A CBLe frame window must be active for this operation to suceed Delete Kill the entry without prompting for verification A _ Rename theenty Ig the entry SD Open the SDE BROWSE EDIT Dialog Window to browse or edit the entry s data within a Structured Data the SDE BROWSE EDIT Dialog Window to browse or edit the entry s data within a Structured Data S AAA window view lur opens the general file utilities menu to ultimately generate specific line commands in a temporary CMX file Open the CBLe text editor to View edit read only this entry Open a drop down menu containing valid prefix command functions for the list window entry Position the cursor on the required function and hit lt Enter gt to action
183. e you start CBLi you need a mainframe 3270 terminal session Most people now use a 3270 emulation program from a workstation rather than a real 3270 terminal If you are using 3270 emulation we strongly recommend using the largest possible screen size Screen sizes up to 62x160 for TSO ae this appears to be the maximum permitted for ISPF and up to 86x190 for TSO without ISPF CMS and VTAM MVS and VSE are possible How CBLi is started depends on the environment in which it is to be run os TSO E Enter the command CBLI at the READY prompt ISPF Enter TSO CBLil on the ISPF command line ISPF screen management is used and so CBLi must have first been defined as an ISPF application by your systems programmer as described in the CBL Interative installation Guide Otherwise enter TSO MVS CBLi to execute using TSO 3270 screen management VTAM Enter LOGON APPLID CBLIVTAM on a VTAM USS screen Your installation may have other ways of invoking a VTAM application Refer to the CBL Interative installation Guide Note The CBLi VTAM session controller program CBLIVTAM must be running and the CBLi VTAM applid must be active VSE VTAM Enter LOGON APPLID CBLIVTAM on a VTAM USS screen Your installation may have other ways of invoking a VTAM application Refer to the CBL Interative installation Guide Note The CBLi VTAM session controller program CBLIVTAM must be running and the CBLi VTAM applid must be active Enter the command CBLI on the CMS co
184. easy interface to commonly accessed data sets and in order to assist migratation from other productivity software that offer similar features the Favourite Datasets Commands window enables users to specify a default project hierarchy and also assign file names and command streams to items of a numbered list The desired file name or command may then be referenced directly by list item number FAY Favourite Datasets Commands Command Func Project CBL DSN Variable 11 Group s Sol Member Name Tupe COB i CBL CMX 2 NBJ JCL 21 CBL PLi JCL 4 NEJ SSC CTL Si CHL PEL CORY EBOOK 5 NEJ SSCI ST to MAA Aa 8 3 10 nbita t 11 LVOL CBLM 12 etc 13 LJQ NBJ 14 u cbl nbi tcshre Le ETA SYSDSN 16 1z 18 CBL DIST 19 265 Zi 22 23 24 iO 26 Figure 56 FAV Favourite Datasets Commands window When lt Enter gt is hit the required fileid is determined based primarily on the contents of the DSN Variable field Note that hitting lt Enter gt on one of the numbered items is equivalent to entering the item number in the DSN Variable field then hitting lt Enter gt Field Content Fileid Determination se the contents of the Project Group Type and Member Name fields U Inon numeric JUuse the contents of the DSN Variable and Member Name field Inumeric Use the contents of the specified number list item and the Member Name field Command Func Enter the CBLi CLI command to be executed D
185. eck NO YES Use MVS RACF or equivalent security package for CBLi resource access checking Default is NO SuppressWTO NO YES For CBLi resource access checking SuppressWTO controls whether access failure messages written to the console are to be suppressed Default is NO ResourceClass ClassName For CBLi resource access checking ResourceClass specifies the MVS RACF or equivalent general resource class Default is FACILITY System ResourceName For CBLi resource access checking specifies the MVS RACF or equivalent resource name to be applied when an attempt is made to open a CBLi System window either via the drop down menus or the CLI command interface Default is CBLI SYSTEM The resource name must first be defined to the resource class specified in the ResourceClass option UserTSO ResourceName For CBLi resource access checking specifies the MVS RACF or equivalent resource name to be applied when an attempt is made to start CBLi in a TSO environment Default is CBLI USER TSO The resource name must first be defined to the resource class specified in the ResourceClass option UserVTAM ResourceName For CBLi resource access checking specifies the MVS RACF or equivalent resource name to be applied when an attempt is made to logon to CBLi in a VTAM environment Default is CBLI USER VTAM The resource name must first be defined to the resource class specified in the ResourceClass option SELCOPY ResourceName For CBLi resource ac
186. ected DASD volumes defined to your system The DASD Volumes window may also be opened via the List menu of the CBLi main window menu bar Parameters volume Select only defined DASD volumes that match the specified volume id mask The volume mask supports the following wild cards An asterisk indicates that one or more characters within the volume id can occupy that position An asterisk can precede or follow a set of characters A single percent sign indicates that exactly one character can occupy that position Up to 6 percent signs can be specified A volume field that does not contain an asterisk wild card will be appended with to list all DASD volumes whose volume ids begin with the volume string This parameter is placed in the Volume field of the DASD Volumes window Examples LVOL List all volumes LVOL SYS A List all volumes with 6 character volume name beginning with the characters SYS and ending with A cbiveat_syntax Description LVR opens the CBLVCAT Raw window and optionally executes CBLVCAT control statements The CBLVCAT Raw window may also be opened via the Raw menu item of the Execute CBLVCAT window 2009 07 20 16 03 29 CBL Interactive CBLi 149 CBLi Command Line Interface Parameters cblvcat_syntax Valid CBLVCAT syntax to be executed when the CBLVCAT Raw window is opened This parameter is placed in the VCAT command line gt field of the CBLVCAT Raw window Se
187. ed 3 No scrolling parameter is specified so the current value of the Scroll gt field is used 4 No scrolling parameter is specified and no Scroll gt field is present so a defualt of one column is used List windows may contain fields that have KEY attribute YES defined in the Field Descriptor Block Fields with this attribute are always in view and may not be scrolled right or left If the cursor is positioned in a column belonging to this type of field then for LEFT CURSOR and RIGHT CURSOR the cursor is considered to be outside the display area All columns of data that do not belong to a KEY field are scrollable using LEFT and RIGHT By default this command is assigned to function key PF10 2009 07 20 16 03 29 CBL Interactive CBLi 144 CBLi Command Line Interface LEFT Parameters windowname The window name of the window in which the display is to be scrolled If not supplied then the window in which the command is issued via a command line or function key is assumed CURSOR The scrollable column on which the cursor is positioned becomes the last scrollable column of the display If the cursor is positioned outside the display area in a KEY field or on the last scrollable column within the display area then LEFT PAGE is executed instead DATA Scroll left so that the first scrollable column in the current display area becomes the last scrollable column of the display HALF Scroll a number of columns so that the column situ
188. ee CBLe command SUBMIT Background AMS Creates and edits the IDCAMS DEFINE statement only Help Open the help window for VSAM elements definition 2009 07 20 16 03 29 CBL Interactive CBLi 42 Execute POWER The POWER Command Output window may be opened via the following e Select Execute POWER from the FILE menu in the CBLi Main Menu e Enter the CBLi command POWER on the command line of any window The POWER Command Output window allows the user to enter VSE POWER commands and view the output in the window display area If CBLIINI variables System VSESMLogon No i e no Security Manager is active and System TrustedUser No then POWER commands are restricted to PDISPLAY operations only The POWER Command Output window is essentially a List window and has the same characteristics as List windows For example select sort and filter to display new views of the data are supported POWER Command Out E View Back Forward FDB Edit Refresh Help Command gt POWER Command gt D LST JobName Number Sfx Q Sys Pr Disp Cl Cards Pg Ce Form To From BASEREST Te E 3 H A 160 tii 1 SYSA SYSA CATVTAM TSA Bias 3 H A 24 a el SYSA SYSA CBLCATL 786 Eb TE 3 H A 3 ah 1 SYSA SYSA CBLCATL 737 Bea 3 H A 88 5 1 SYSA SYSA CBLCATL 78s ele 3 H A 3 al 1 SYSA SYSA GBCDEES TAS Bao 3 H A E 3 1 SYSA SYSA CBLIVTAM ATS CEE 3 H A NS El SYSA SYSA CBLIVTAM 820 Ba 3 H A 153 al SYSA SYSA CBLLINK 789 E 3 H A TLS DE l SYSA SYSA CBLLOAD 810 Bea 3
189. efault CLI command is determined as follows 2009 07 20 16 03 29 CBL Interactive CBLi 87 Utility Windows FAV Favourites Datasets Commands Window A CLI command is already included as part of the specified list item number EDIT The fileid has a member name or is an absolute HFS path name ILL The fileid is an MVS PDS E DSN with no member name ILD The fileid is an MVS non PDS E DSN DSN Variable Enter a complete fileid a DSN of a PDS E library or reference the number of a list item Member Name A member name to be included as part of the fileid For MVS systems only where the Member Name field is not empty the use of its contents in the resultant fileid is based on whether a member name has already been specified via the other fields used to resolve the fileid i e If no member name is identified within in the fileid the contents of the Member Name field are enclosed in parentheses and appended to the fileid For VSE and CMS this member name is used only if the DSN Variable field is null in which case the fileid is built from the Project Group Type and Member Name fields Project Group Type The default fileid tokens qualifiers to be used if the DSN Variable field is null For MVS the Project Group and Type fields represent the first three qualifiers of the DSN For CMS the Project and Type fields represent the FileMode and FileType tokens respectively The Group field is ignored For
190. eid masks in the Fileid Mask field or by generating a single fileid mask by entering a combination of a volume mask DSN mask and member mask in the appropriate fields Fileid Mask One or more complete fileid masks used to select the HFS files and or data sets to be searched Multiple fileid masks may be specified with one or more intervening blanks All HFS files sequential VSAM and PDS E data sets that match a specified fileid mask are selected for input If one of these data sets is a PDS E library then all members of that library will be searched A complete fileid mask may be in one of the following formats 1 A pre allocated non HFS DDNAME which may represent one or more concatenated data set and or library e g SYSEXEC 2 An absolute or relative HFS Path name Wild card characters percent representing a single characters and asterisk representing zero or more characters are supported in the name portion of the HFS path The name portion of the HFS path is the character string at the end of the path that follows the last slash of the fileid or is the entire path name if is not specified 3 A DSN Mask and optionally a Volume Mask and or multiple PDS E Member Masks in the following format volmask data set name mask membmask membmask Fileid masks must not be enclosed in quotes TSO prefix is not used In order to restrict the search to a single PDS E library and so exclude any no
191. eing added to the ring and does not affect the profile to be used when additional files are added to the ring later in your edit session HFS Opts See CBLe CLI command EDIT for supported HFS parameters Examples EDIT NBJ DATA SET PROFILE PROFTEMP Edit NBJ DATA SET using macro PROFTEMP as a profile 2009 07 20 16 03 29 CBL Interactive CBLi 129 CBLi Command Line Interface EDIT EDIT NBJ JCL CBLINSO1 NOPROF Edit PDS member NBJ JCL CBLINS01 without a profile macro EO Syntax gt gt EO jnm jno class gt lt userid passwd Description Use the EO command to Edit read only an Output listing from the system s output queues A new CBLe text editor window is opened if CBLIINI variable Edit Instance Multiple or if no CBLe window is already open A temporary fileid is used to edit the file For VSE the fileid is SYSLST class jnm jno The CBLi command EO may be used in conjunction with the CBLe command SUBMIT A job may be submitted to batch from within CBLe and the output retrieved via EO In VSE Basic Security Manager BSM does not impose security on the VSE POWER queues Therefore in order to impose access restrictions on LST queue output when CBLIINI variable System VSESMLogon Yes the following restrictions apply 1 If an entry is not password protected then it may only be edited if the TO or FROM attributes match the user s userid 2 If
192. elect the next view Open the help window for the list Help Open the help window for the list View List Display A SELECT clause and or WHERE clause executed as a CLI command creates a new view of the list data On each execution of one of these CLI commands the command stream is recorded as a single entry at the end of the list window s View List Display This allows the user to select and filter list columns and rows and then easily recall any previous view of the data The View List Display is a drop down menu available by selecting the View List menu bar item Any previous view may be selected by positioning the cursor on the required SELECT or WHERE clause entry and hitting lt Enter gt Alternatively the display s view of the data may be switched to view immediately prior to or following the current view by selecting Back or Forward respectively from the List menu bar Field Descriptor Block FDB The FDB window may be opened using the following e Select FDB from the list window menu bar e Enter the CLI command FDB on the list window command line Information about the data displayed under each column of a List window is referenced via an internal CBLi data structure This structure includes or addresses fields that define the column data attributes e g column name column data type column data length etc The Field Descriptor Block FDB maps this internal structure and so provides information for all fie
193. election id Note that the STEPINTO and STEPOVER commands dynamically set and unset break points to allow stepping through the SELCOPY job The STEPINTO command sets a break point on the next control statement to be executed following the current control statement Therefore when repeatedly issuing STEPINTO or STEPOVER the TRACE window displays a log of all the statements executed so far Prior to CBLi release 1 20 this trace information was displayed in the background of the SELCOPY Interactive parent window 2009 07 20 16 03 29 CBL Interactive CBLi 22 Executing SELCOPY TRACE Window CE NBJ SELCOPY SSDEMOO1 TRACE i33 V SEQ la el eoLeccetsccecs Sono otoncoDorn o to 000006 kk SELCORY interactive execution TOS 2009 01 79 17 43 47 Hook 000007 i log Program about to start 000005 2 Garr marr 1000009 log About to enter loop 000010 if Barr gt marr marrl 1 000011 rd Pdsi_dsn ini dir into Garr Directory 000012 pos Garrt s Barr lreci 1 Blank rest 000013 if eof pdsi 000014 000015 00015 000017 000015 000019 000020 000021 DODOZZ DODOZ3 else Garr Barr marre Next input then goto memloop if Garr 2 marr tear t 1 rd i1_dsn ini dir into Garr Directory pos Barris Barr lrecl 1 Blank rest if eof pdsi else Garr Barr marre Next input print from marr Garr marre 1 Print array pos tot len totl x 00 fill x OO Initialise End of File e ay tel ay E tee
194. emi colons or blanks Note that if blanks are used quotes must also be used to delimit the list of DSNs not the individual DSNs PGM loadmod Use an alternative load MODULE or PHASE name in place of the default name SELCOPY PSB psbn For MVS IMS SELCOPY jobs only the Program Specification Block name to be used to access DL1 data DLI BMP For MVS IMS SELCOPY jobs only use either the DLI region or BMP region Default is DLI IMSID ssn For MVS IMS SELCOPY jobs only the sub system name of the IMS Region to which to connect AGN grpn For MVS IMS SELCOPY jobs only the IMS Application Group name Examples S CTL CBL SSC CTL DIRDO1 Start the SELCOPY Interactive window and load control statements from the DSN CBL SSC CTL DIRDO1 SELCOPY GTL SYSIN Start SELCOPY Interactive using control statements in the currently allocated filename SYSIN SELCOPY CTL SYS3 CBL SELCOPY CTLOO1 LIB DEV CBL LOAD DEV TEST RTNOO1 LOAD Start SELCOPY Interactive using control statements in data set SYS3 CBL SELCOPY CTLO001 Search load libraries DEV CBL LOAD then DEV TEST RTNO01 LOAD ahead of the search chain when locating the SELCOPY executable module and any modules called using the SELCOPY CALL operation lt alloc dd INCTL dsn SYS3 NBJ EQUOO1 SYS3 TEST SELCOPY CTL SQ10249 shr lt selcopy ctl INCTL In this example the CBLe ALLOCATE command is first used to allocate a concatenation of two DSNs to DDname INCTL These comm
195. entry types required Default is all types One or more of the following types may be specified with no intervening blanks 2009 07 20 16 03 29 CBL Interactive CBLi 143 CBLi Command Line Interface LD a Inon VSAM orVSAM SAM data set Beo ms Generation data group Alternate Index MVS Generation data set oOo taa Roo VsAmPATH Vr L s Tape volume catalog library entry a st Tape volume catalog volume entry The types parameter string is placed in the Catalog field of the Dataset List window See Also LC Command Examples LD CBL C LD CBL SYS USERCAT CBLCAT A LEFT Syntax gt gt LEFT PS esos gt lt le windowname 4 CURSOR DATA HALF MAX PAGE n_cols Description Scroll the view of the data within the specified window left towards the first column of the displayable data The extent by which data is scrolled is determined by the CURSOR DATA HALF PAGE MAX or n_cols parameter which may be specified using any one of three methods determined in the following order of precedence 1 The scrolling command verb LEFT and one of these scrolling parameters is explicitly specified on the command line 2 The scrolling parameter is specified on the command line and a PFKey assigned to LEFT is actioned Note that the contents of a command line are appended to the command stream assigned to a PFKey when that PFKey is action
196. er eee 56 e ester era eee ear meee T eer en crete ree meter eeree pirat 59 Her DASE OUI SS erreien ec ek aeons seccese e aa E A EOE peice tenapseedescnigeseds Soldat ma geueedeneceetey ese 61 List Catalog EMS sta hadi dvs cen acusesesieeieectvess teem eta emery omental deat nimerseteme 65 A ee ree Pere Pre PEE EUE Phe a eee eee ee rere tee 66 A cee tensacevecneconcey diva cceunateves N E a eaa ANAE OA E A E A O 69 MISE VOC PCS conta ie adele de 71 BAe Edesa irene eds 73 e one S E T ne ene eee ene ee fee ree eee eee eee 74 EstvsE Standard pl Re of e ee ey eae e E e E dl de dd 76 Estlbrary Members faces ce czars Sevace ans coca caa Vovaiea capes a iaa 80 EISTINIVS ENQUSUES cormsssmasan mitad catorce a 81 EStNIVS JOD Engue UCS ai dica ciao acacia iia 82 ESTRES Palta o o iia 86 Utility Windows ice A eee 86 o 86 A cscs are ee heed ce 2 a ies ee kc S oc cate He see ean hae ea Sed 87 FAV Favourites Datasets Commands WINDOW cx zcsectecshascunieccsace arde Enar E I r AN eo irc rd iba 88 File Search WMI Weil tai a ada 90 ElesearcarsaUlbdate Wi lity cies acs capado ld lei does iii load cdas 90 FOU File SearchsUpaate WINdOWi cocinar ros pita ra tal o a iban 97 Fille Search amp Update QUIPUE pira ie ica 101 FSUUNDO oa els 108 APP 108 Operando vs ion VINO ato acia laa E nessa ce area tees E ates es 108 LPA Modules WINDOW csiczeceseieeseags2scsessesecy atvensseunvevanevdwandsadsdbersva ct naiacennsttienedraressase eo ssevanesavectussvawsanernnnveniena
197. er to continue or cancel the file load The value can be specified as a number of bytes nnn a number of kilobytes nnnK or a number of megabytes nnnM The default value is 1M one megabyte MacroPath pathname 1 pathname2 pathnameN Library search path for CBLe edit macros pathname1 pathname2 etc are tokens containing no blanks commas or semi colons representing elements of the macro path The meaning and format of these elements vary depending on the operating system Blanks commas or semi colons can be used as delimiters between tokens The macro path can also be set with the CBLe command SET MACROPath pathnamel pathname2 pathnameN Whether set in the CBLIINI file or with the SET MACROPath command a maximum of 15 macro path tokens is currently supported 2009 07 20 16 03 29 CBL Interactive CBLi 186 CBLIINI control file CBLIINI Standard Variables If a macro path is specified in the USER CBLIINI file then it replaces any macro path defined in the SYSTEM CBLIINI file i e USER and SYSTEM CBLIINI file defined macro paths are not concatenated Rules for MACROPATH vary depending on the operating system as follow MVS The macro path is a list of PDS PDSE libraries that must exist at the time the macro path is defined These libraries are dynamically concatenated and opened when the MACROPATH command is executed therefore they must also have the same RECFM If RECFM F then LRECL must also be the same There is no
198. erenced by Start Col and End Col for FIND and or CHANGE must exist in the list of record fields entered for SELECT By default only those fields specified by SELECT are displayed in the SDE window output report display However all record fields may be subsequently displayed by executing the following from the SDE window command line S ELE C T For a detailed description of the select clause please refer to the SDE CLI SELECT command documentation Insert an SQL style WHERE clause to filter records The where clause is processed by a single SDE WHERE operation In order to include a WHERE operation within the FSU operation the WHERE field must be enabled by entering in the activation field If enabled only those input records that satisfy VIEW filtering are passed to the WHERE operation otherwise WHERE operates on all input records Records that satisfy the WHERE clause are passed to the next stage of processing which if enabled is the FIND operation followed by the CHANGE operation Otherwise the records are displayed in the FIND output report For Unstructured File Search amp Update the where clause may only reference the single character string field that constitutes the entire record i e record field reference 1 or field name Record Note that that this should not be confused with the zRecord field group which represents the record in the output report e g WHERE 1 gt gt 01 AND 1 lt lt
199. esd 109 Bink GS Vy UNC OWN eos Sic cece Ss cs eae ae an eS eae a eee eee eee ea ee hae ahaa caads 110 APF Eist VIN GOW sisiane shoves andes ana bededunutls souk asdeegeues E devin cnb lbs Masi sctioes suns a E E 111 TascLiStWINdO Wa cercar nao 111 A A vance eE arte E aTr iE 112 Loaded Programms WINdOWcs rono minasin aa a Auaciesusigace sie salut caosh suede depen eociade toca vert dguben aids E 113 BES SiiS NCS II treet eters coer ner eet enema emer trey Eaa e EASA tren rete tre er errery reer o Uns 114 BUT MOE LSE VVC OW xticcs x 2212 6 sazewevass e E E N 114 EBEVCAT SVG WINdO Wisin anita 115 A rrr ere irre cer eer rarer eer rte er er rerrtre tev tr rratteetrer a aA a errr er reer EE rrr etree 116 CBLi Interactive Heli aa 118 CBLI Command Line Interfate omic een 120 PA E A E E T A A T T A A A A E 120 E E E E E E E A E E E ulin seceuuiad 121 T E E E E E E E E E 121 BACKWARD os O NS a E A A EE NE L 122 BOTTOM iesieta E RAE E O A E ET 122 BROWSE sti E A E E E a oa 122 CALENDAR ccscoorireciosianistisin aE cries reana E EEE E sundance osito uste EE sra 123 A a ueea duamenueues Matec eewbereadeeaerauhda 123 O od ee T 123 CBHUCANCGEL sissid msira ieia aese ae neta chucamegadenant scans EE E Cause ued E meateas aries urine aan ieldca atm artices 124 OBLNAME mesi a iaa 124 CLOSE eo e o a err nee tree dde o desea coo dla e ed treat 124 SVEA ES a EE EE E E E olaaa ape Inserciones orton e doi 126 COMMANDING 6 corra A ia aca 127 GU SOR SE EG Wee
200. f the FSU report Hit records will be replaced by data in the preceding FSU report record flagged as B Before Any record whose data or record number has been altered since it was updated by the FSU CHANGE UPDATE operation will not be restored by FSUUNDO Unless parameter FOREGROUND or BACKGROUND is specified FSUUNDO will open a dialog window Other parameters specified on FSUUNDO will be reflected in the dialog fields FSUUNDO Undo FSU Output Filteid NBI ESU D2009035 11542309 Immediate UPDATE _ Extended Output Foreground Figure 60 FSUUNDO Dialog Window Parameters fsurep Specifies the DSN of the FSU output report to be used to identify changed data set records The FSU report data set referenced may be that of any previous execution of FSU that involved a CHANGE operation Default is the last saved FSU report or optionally the FSU report displayed in the current SDE edit window view If the current SDE edit window view contains an FSU output report identified by its DSN format the user will be prompted to use this report instead PANEL FOREGROUND BACKGROUND Specifies whether to open the FSUUNDO dialog window PANEL execute the FSUUNDO verify or update procedure immediately in TSO FOREGROUND or generate and display a JCL job deck suitable for submission to batch BACKGROUND Default is PANEL VERIFY UPDATE Specifies whether to execute the UNDO procedure with or without performing an update
201. fication Open a Dataset List window for the entr If the entry is a PDS PDSE open a Library List window Open a Dataset Enqueue List window for the entry major name SYSDSN Rename the entry Open the SDE BROWSE EDIT Dialog Window to browse or edit the entry s data within a Structured Data Environment window view Open another Execute CBLVCAT window and issue a LISTVCAT with TUNE DEFINE to generate tuned output for the entry Open the CBLe text editor to View edit read only this entry VC Open another Execute CBLVCAT window and issue a LISTVCAT and or LISTVTOC operation as appropriate for the entry See Note 2 Perform a compress of an MVS PDS library to reclaim disk space occupied by replaced back level members This action performs an IEBCOPY to itself No action is taken for PDSE entries however the IEBCOPY dialog is opened with an error message if executed against any non PDS E Open the volume statistics window for the volume containing the entry Note that this command will only be successful for lines of a LISTVCAT report containing VOLn volser Open a new window containing a zoomed vertical display of the entry s fields Particularly useful for list windows that have a large number of displayed columns Assigned to PF2 by default ERTE 2009 07 20 16 03 29 CBL Interactive CBLi 32 Executing CBLVCAT CBLVCAT Interactive Window Notes 1 The default action on hitting lt Enter gt on a SysPrint line depends on the
202. fied command is passed to the CBLi environment Any windows opened are child windows of the CBLi main window not of the current window Parameters command CBLi command Examples cbli vcat lt cbl vvc ctl vvrep01 Open a CBLVCAT Interactive window and execute CBLVCAT with control statements from file CBL VVC CTL VVREP01 CBLICANCEL Syntax gt gt CBLICANcel gt lt Description Exit and close the CBLi session without opening the quit session confirmation pop up window 2009 07 20 16 03 29 CBL Interactive CBLi 123 CBLi Command Line Interface CBLICANCEL CBLNAME Syntax gt gt CBLNAME gt lt Description Use the CBLNAME command to open the CBLNAME window The CBLNAME storage display window may also be opened via the System menu item of the CBLi main window menu bar CLOSE Syntax gt gt CLOSE gt lt CLO windowname Quit Description Use the CLOSE command to close a window By default this command is assigned to function key PF3 You can also use the close button if the window has one Parameters windowname The window name of the window to close If not supplied then the window in which the command is issued via a command line or function key is assumed CMDTEXT Syntax gt gt CMDTEXT E gt lt COMMANDTEXT
203. file name containing the specified string See the CBLVCAT User Manual If no fileid mask is specified all entries will be selected Note that wild cards are not supported within the VSE fileid mask however asterisk is tolerated if placed at the end of the fileid mask An asterisk may also be specified in place of the fileid mask to imply that all entries are to be selected This need only be specified if the types parameter is to be used 2009 07 20 16 03 29 CBL Interactive CBLi 141 CBLi Command Line Interface LC For CMS systems the fileid mask may consist of up to 3 qualifiers representing a filename filetype filemode combination where qualifiers are separated by one or more blanks or a dot period wee A single asterisk wild card may be used to represent an entire qualifier or zero or more characters at a particular position within the qualifier Wild card may be specified more that once anywhere within a qualifier Default CMS filemode qualifier is A default CMS filetype qualifier is catalog Specifies the catalog in which to search for the requested entry For MVS systems this is a catalog DSN Specifying a catalog DSN is unneccessary if an alias exists for the fileid mask high level qualifier HLQ in the master catalog In this case the appropriate catalog DSN will automatically be inserted in this field If the HLQ contains a wild card then all matching aliases are interrogated the
204. ft Open the Job Enqueues list window A job name can be passed as a parameter Not implemented for VSE C D J L Open the library members list window For MVS a PDS name can be passed as a parameter For P Q Open the HFS Paths list window An absolute or relative HFS path name can be passed as a parameter Open the Enqueues list window An enqueue major name and resource name can be passed as a parameter Not implemented for VSE 2009 07 20 16 03 29 CBL Interactive CBLi 118 L A VSE a LIBR library sublibrary and member name and type pattern can be passed as a parameter CBLi Command Line Interface CBLi Command Line Interface Open the VTOC files list window A volume name can be passed as a parameter Open the DASD volumes list window A volume name pattern can be passed as a parameter parameter LX MAXIMISE ets the focus window to the next main window within the CBLi desktop ename a file croll the window display to the right irect a command to the Structured Data Environment SDE tart the SELCOPY Interactive window emap the appearence of a colour and its associated highlighting how Window Attributes esize a window indow isplay the first lines of data croll the window display upwards VCAT Open the Execute CBLVCAT window A CBLVCAT command string can be passed as a parameter VIEW VOLSTATS WINDOWLIST Open the window list window This lists all currently open windows WINDOWNAMES Hide or display the w
205. g processed RecordNumber The record number at which an FSUUNDO error has occurred For EXTENDED output this field also contains the record numbers of records that have been successfully updated Message Text Message indicating success or failure to locate and update records referenced by the FSU report All possible messages are as follow File Updated Member Updated One or more records within the reported data set or PDS E member were successfully updated For EXTENDED output only this message is repeated for each record that has been successfully updated Also up to 100 bytes of the record data before and after the update is printed on the report lines that follow Member not found The member name within the PDS E library referenced by the FSU report line no longer exists The member has been deleted or renamed Return Code 112 is set and the error count incremented by one for each missing member Record not found The record number of the data set or member record referenced by the FSU report line no longer exists This message is repeated for each missing record within a data set or member For EXTENDED output only up to 100 bytes of the expected record data is also printed on the report lines that follow Return Code 112 is set and the error count is incremented by one for each missing record 2009 07 20 16 03 29 CBL Interactive CBLi 103 Utility Windows FSUUNDO Data Mismatch WARNING The
206. h DCB RECFM VB LRECL 256 BLKSIZE 0 and SPACE CYL 9 5 If an abend is encountered in CBLi then please contact the CBL support desk via telephone on 44 1656 650692 or via email at support cbl com A request to email the CBLi dump file to CBL file is likely 2009 07 20 16 03 29 CBL Interactive CBLi 179 CBLIINI control file On execution of CBLi certain environment defaults may be overridden by variables and their associated values specified in INI control files referred to throughout this documentation as CBLIINI files CBLIINI files are EBCDIC plain text files of the format discussed below SYSTEM CBLIINI During installation of CBLi the installer is prompted to tailor and catalog a SYSTEM CBLIINI file that contains the systemwide default options for CBLi On startup CBLi obtains the fileid of the SYSTEM CBLIINI file from the CBLNAME PHASE LOAD MODULE USER CBLIINI In addition to the SYSTEM CBLIINI file a USER CBLIINI file may also exist allowing users to tailor their own environment The SYSTEM CBLIINI file is read first then the USER CBLIINI file If values for a variable are specified in both the USER and SYSTEM CBLIINI files then the value in the USER CBLIINI takes precedence The exception to this is the variable VSESMLogon and any variables set under the RACF heading The fileid of the USER CBLIINI file is identified on each supported operating system as follows MVS 1 If the SYSTEM CBLIINI file is a PDS PD
207. hange has successfully occurred then this field must be enabled by entering in the activation field Caution Activation of this field will cause all changed records to be re written As a precaution the File Search Update window will prompt the user to confirm this selection before executing or generating the FSU command If this field is not enabled the CHANGE operations will not actually change data on disk but still reports on those records that are affected by the CHANGE It is recommended that this should be done prior to executing the operation with Immediate UPDATE enabled This option means that data sets will be opened for update in place processing instead of being simply opened for input An exclusive ENQ will be set when the data set is opened and reset when it is closed For a detailed description of CHANGE parameters and their effects please refer to the SDE CLI CHANGE command documentation For Structured File Search amp Update only insert an SQL style SELECT clause to select individual fields from records of the record type specified by the VIEW entry The select clause is processed by a single SDE SELECT operation In order to include a SELECT operation within the FSU operation the SELECT field must be enabled by entering in the activation field Only those fields specified by SELECT are eligable for inclusion in the FIND and CHANGE operations i e If the SELECT field is enabled all record field entries ref
208. haracter wild cards defined by the MWCC and SWCC values see below may be used in the member mask If no value is specified i e unset the entire library will be copied This is different to simply specifying wildcard asterisk which copies all members individually To copy all members of a library the process is quicker if the value is blank If invoked via the C prefix command default is the value of the Library List Entry field or is unset if a Dataset or Catalog List Otherwise the default is the value specified on the last invocation of the IEBCOPY dialog NewName gt Target member name The member name specified in OldName will be renamed to this new name This field must be empty if a wildcard character is used in the OldName member mask Wild cards are not supported for NewName Default is the OldName value Replace gt Enter YES or NO to indicate whether existing members in the target library are to be replaced if the source and target member names match Default is the value specified on the last invocation of the IEBCOPY dialog otherwise NO 2009 07 20 16 03 29 CBL Interactive CBLi 47 Execute IEBCOPY Execute IEBCOPY Group gt MWCC gt SWCC gt Output gt Enter YES or NO to indicate whether any defined ALIAS entries for the selected library members are to be copied also Note that this also applies to Load Library members Specifies the Multiple Wild Card Character which represents zer
209. he INPUT parameter are opened and each record is passed as input to the supplied FIND WHERE and or CHANGE conditions If Structured File Search is used i e 2009 07 20 16 03 29 CBL Interactive CBLi 133 CBLi Command Line Interface FSU SDE Options are provided then only those records that are assigned the single record type RTO specified by the VIEW parameter or default record type if VIEW is not specified are processed Records not assigned this record type are bypassed Any section or sections of the FSU command stream may be commented out using REXX style comment delimiters i e enclose areas of the command stream text between and This is particularly useful for use of FSU commands in the user s HOME CMX data set command centre where the command may span several continued lines e g To temporarily omit the CHANGE parameter thus allowing the user to identify those records that would be selected for change lt sd fsu INPUT CBL JGE CBLI SDE SAMP VAR DATS Suser CBLI SDE SAMP VAR DATS ESDS WHERE CUST ID gt 5000 CHANGE c Aqua c AQUA COMPANY AND c Jim c James NAME 9 11 N NOUPDATE USING Suser CBLI SDO CobSALES VIEW REC CARD Unlike file edit the FIND WHERE and CHANGE conditions operate on a single record only As such FIND parameters ALL NEXT FIRST PREV LAST all have the same effect and so may be omitted The same parameters in C
210. he USING field must be enabled by entering in the activation field and a record type RTO must be specified in the VIEW field If enabled USING implies that Structured File Search amp Update is in effect For a detailed description of the USING argument please refer to the SDE CLI USING command documentation VIEW For Structured File Search amp Update only insert the record type object RTO name defined within the SDE structure SDO specified in the USING field The VIEW field entry is processed by a single SDE VIEW operation Only records that are associated with the specified RTO are passed to the next stage of processing which if enabled is the WHERE operation followed by FIND followed by CHANGE In order to include a VIEW argument within the FSU operation the USING field must have first been enabled by entering in the activation field For a detailed description of the VIEW operation please refer to the SDE CLI VIEW command documentation File Search amp Update Output Output from The File Search amp Update utility is presented in an SDE edit window which is automatically opened on execution of File Search amp Update The saved output of any previous execution may be browsed using the FSUOUT macro or FO list window prefix command The File Search amp Update utility generates two temporary in storage data sets as follow prefix FSU Dyyyyjjj Thhmmss This data set contains structured output report data re
211. he list is loaded into CBLe storage and edited The edited view is given a generic title UNTITLED On saving the text for the first time the user is prompted to provide a valid Save as fileid Note that if INSTANCE SINGLE is set in the Edit section of the CBLIINI file and a CBLe editor window is already open then the list will be edited in a new document window of the existing CBLe window Selecting Sorting and Filtering Each list has a basic set of column data which is defined by the Field Descriptor Block FDB associated with the list You can view the list of columns by selecting the FDB menu option or entering the FDB command on the list window command line You can modify the display by selecting your own list of columns from this basic list specifying a filter to restrict the rows displayed and specifying a sort order You do this by entering the select command on the list window command line The select command syntax is similar to the SQL SELECT statement It consists of one or more of the following e A select clause which determines the columns displayed e A where clause which filters the rows displayed by imposing a condition on the values in one or more columns eA ia clause ORDER BY in SQL terms which displays the rows in an order determined by the values in one or more columns Unlike SQL these clauses can be given in any order and any of them can be ommitted The general syntax is select_clause where_cl
212. he scan for the search string will begin Record data in positions or columns before the start column is not searched If a numeric value is entered then it is treated as a position in the input records For a structured file search i e a structure is specified via the USING field Start Col may contain a field name e g Emp_Name or a field reference number e g 5 instead of a position If a multiple field range or a more complex combination of field references is required then use the GenerateCLI PF2 menu bar item to edit the FSU CLI command and make the relevant additions In order to be include Start Col and End Col in the FSU operation the fields must also be enabled by entering in the activation field End Col Specifies the end position or field column within the input records beyond which no part of the search string will be found Only positions or field columns between the Start Col and End Col will be searched Record data in positions or columns following the end column is not searched The format of the value entered in this field i e position or field reference must match that entered for the Start Col field If no End Col is entered then the default is the Start Col entry so defining a search range width of 1 position or field column Prefix Suffix Word If the condition is to include one of the parameters PREFIX SUFFIX or WORD then enter in the appropriate parameter field Note that these fields are mutually e
213. he user the opportunity to check the changed data before re running FSU with UPDATE to action the changes 2009 07 20 16 03 29 CBL Interactive CBLi 99 Utility Windows File Search amp Update Output The Hit record type contains 2 group fields z and zRecord where z includes information fields relating to the record and zRecord includes all the record data field s The Hit record type has been designed this way so that the user can suppress or include all fields within either field group by specifying the group field name as the argument of a SELECT command e g SELECT zRecord will display only the field data and suppress the information fields The Hit record type field structures are as follow Z The structure including all the information fields zDsn The DSN or HFS path name containing the reported record zMember The PDS E member containing the reported record This field is only present if at least one PDS E data set is included by the input fileid mask s For non PDS E data sets this field contains blanks zRecNo The record number of the record within the data set zHitNo The hit count number of the record within the data set The zHitNo field is incremented by one for each new record within the data set that satisfies the search criteria for the particular RunType The ZHitNo count is reset to zero for each new input data set Use WHERE zHitNo 1 to display a list of all data sets a
214. his is the bottom line of the window Commands may be entered at the Command gt prompt to invoke CBLi facilities that duplicate or extend the menu facilities You can launch CBLi facilities by doing the following e Select a CBLi main menu option by moving the cursor over the option in the menu bar and press ENTER e Entering a CBLi line command System Menu The system menu is a menu of functions which is available on all windows within a CBL3270 environment You access the system menu by pressing the system menu button at the top left of the main window or any subordinate window that has a system menu button The following options are available from the system menu Storage Display Windows only displays the options popup menu As for SHOWPOPUPMENU Restore a maximised or miminised window to its original size and Minimise lose Open a window showing the current list of windows You can select a window from this list by placing the cursor on a list element and pressing enter The selected window will be given the focus rev window ommand line unction keys Show Hide window names Toggle the status of the window names display Window names are unique window identifiers which can be used in commands to identify a particular window If displayed ion the window name is displayed in the title bar as a prefix to the window captio Use ISPF TSO When running under TSO ISPF this menu command toggles the display from ISPF to
215. hole focus line the line containing the cursor on the command line Examples The following are examples of commands that may be entered on the CBLi command line In each case a window will be created You can close these windows with the CLOSE command by default assigned to PF3 or by using the close button at the right of the title bar Command Description lt vcat q cblname Open the CBLVCAT execution window and list the contents of CBLNAME lt lvol Open the list DASD volumes window to list all volumes lt lc sysl h Open the list calatog window to list all cataloged datasets whose names begin sys1 h MVS only lt lc Susers Open the list calatog window to list all cataloged datasets whose names begin with the current userid lt ll sys1 help Open the list library window to list all members of the sys1 help library MVS only lt 11 pra2 Open the list library window to list all sublibraries of the prd2 library VSE only lt wl Open the window list window lt cal Open the calendar window lt cale x2d 1000 Convert X 1000 to decimal using the calculator window lt 11 Suser cbli cble where User user amp LastMod gt Sdate 11 Suser cbli cmx where User Suser amp LastMod gt Sdate List all library members changed by me today 2009 07 20 16 03 29 CBL Interactive CBLi 125 CBLi Command Line Interface CMDTEXT See Also CBLe command EXTRACT CBLe command QUERY COMMANDLINE Syntax gt gt
216. i on Subsystem DB9G Plan User NBJ Current SOLID slo phat CBLPLANO NBJ CBLSOO4I 17 03 38 Sel 1 OPEN SELECT cursor SQLOOOO1 SELECT FROM SYSIBM SYSCOLUMNS WHERE COLTYPE CHAR ORDER BY NAME CBLSOOG6GI 17 03 42 Sel 1 CLOSE SELECT cursor SQLOOO001 Note End of SELECT not reached DB2 CPU seconds 2 U seconds 2 U seconds 2 U seconds Rows Fetched 200 CBLSOO 7I 17 03 42 Sel 2 EXECUTE COMMIT S C 0 e U 000000 008171 seconds B B Total B E B P P P d P ers Figure 27 DB2 Dynamic SQL LOG window Select FDB from the window menu to open the Field Descriptor Block which provides detailed information on each field displayed by an SQL SELECT statement 2009 07 20 16 03 29 CBL Interactive CBLi 38 DB2 Dynamic SQL DB2 Dynamic SQL Descriptor m View Back Forward FDB Edit Refresh Command gt Type Key Offset i DispLen Digits Sca Char No 7151 2 ITE TLT T ETME COLCARDF Float COLNO Int COLSTATUS Char COLTYPE Char CREATEDTS Char DATATYPEID IE DEFAULT Char DEFAULTYALUE Char FLDPROC Char FOREIGNKEY Char HIDDEN Char HIGH2KEY VChar IBMREQD Char KEYSEQ Int LABEL VChar LENGTH Int LENGTH2 mE LOW2KEY VChar NAME Char NULES Char PARTKEY_COLSEQ Tint PARTKEY_ORDERING Char RELCREATED Char REMARKS VChar SCALE Int SOUREETYPETD Int STATS _ FORMAT Char Char Char Char Char Char Char NP m 00 PhOOrPNOABAM Ph M p u o Y M OrPrPRPM no wus wun N i w
217. i for TSO 1 7B 0ps File List Utilities System Window SwapList Help Command gt 00 oo 00 OO 00 00 co 00 00 00 CO oo 0 co oo co oo 00 00 00 oc oo co 0 co oo 00 00 00 oo oO 00 00 oo o vn 0000 00 00 00 00 oo 00 co 00 00 00 co oo 000000000 8 8 8 8 8 oo 0000000 oo oo oo 00 oo oo oo oo 00 oo 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 SELCOPY i 1 7B C 2009 Compute Bridgend Ltd UK 44 1656 652222 website http www cbl com email support cbl com parating System z 0S 1 9 0 SELCOPY i Build 200907201527 Figure 2 CBLi Main Window 2009 07 20 16 03 29 CBL Interactive CBLi 6 Getting started with CBLi CBLi Main Window The main window contains e A title bar Located at the top of the window it includes Asystem menu button at the extreme left This button accesses the system menu options The window name A minimise button as the third character from the right A maximise button as the second character from the right A close button as the first character from the right e The menu bar Located immediately below the title bar it lists the main menu options e The client area Occupying the body of the window it contains The CBLi logo copyright notice and contact details The operating system name and version The user id The build level of CBLi This information is useful for communicating with CBL when a query is raised about CBLi features or problems e The command line T
218. ication plan supplied with the SELCOPY product to the required DB2 subsystems when SELCOPY was installed e g CBLPLANO This plan is used by the DB2 Dynamic SQL window SelectLimit n_rows For MVS only the default limit for number of rows returned by an SQL SELECT operation SSN ssname For MVS only the name of the default DB2 subsystem to which CBLi will connect when a DB2 Dynamic SQL window is opened 2009 07 20 16 03 29 CBL Interactive CBLi 184 CBLIINI control file CBLIINI Standard Variables CBLVCAT DefaultCommand lt CBLi VCAT CLI command input Specifies the CBLVCAT Interactive input parameters to be used when the CBLVCAT Interactive window is opened with no parameters The syntax is the same as that specified on a CBLi CLI VCAT command i e any valid CBLVCAT syntax or input via a control file e g lt cbl ssc ctl report1 If the input parameters are prefixed by lt less than the command is actioned immediately when the window is opened Otherwise the command is simply plaged at the VCAT Command prompt for edit The default action when no parameters are specified and no CBLVCAT DEFAULTCOMMAND is set is to place the following command string at the VCAT Command prompt REPORT VCAT DSN TYPE VOL2 LISTCAT TYPE U REF your master catalog This will generate a report that lists all user catalogs in the master catalog ProgramName name The name of the CBLVCAT load module to be loaded to execute CBLVCAT interact
219. if the CBLVCAT execution has generated SYSLOG output This usually occurs if an error has been encountered in which case an information window is also displayed CELYCALC Log Out View Back Forward FDB Edit Refresh Help Command gt Figure 23 CBLVCAT Log Output window VCAT Command gt Enter one of the following 0 A CBLVCAT command as you would code it on a CBLVCAT control statement 0 lt filename where filename is the name of a CBLVCAT control statement file The CBLVCAT command syntax is described in the CBLVCAT User Manual VCAT Program gt Specify the name of the CBLVCAT executable MODULE MVS or PHASE VSE By default this field contains CBLV Prefix Commands The following prefix area commands are available Command blank See Note 1 below The ENTER key must be pressed with the cursor on the line s belonging to the report entr Open the CBLe text editor to to perform SDATA BROWSE on the entry Copy the entry Delete the entry User will be prompted to verify the deletion Open the CBLe text editor to edit this entry Open the FSU File Search Update Window to perform advanced file search and optionally update Open an SDE view to display browse the entry as output from the FSU File Search Update Window If the entry is a PDS PDSE open the file search window for the PDS Open an IDCAMS Command window and issue an IDCAMS LISTCAT for the entry default Delete Kill the entry without prompting for veri
220. ileid is a CMS fileid Note that if fileid is not specified then EDIT is executed for the fileid specified by the CBLIINI variable System CmdTEXT If System CmdTEXT has not been set then no action is taken PROFILE macroname The REXX edit macro to be executed as the profile when editing the file 2009 07 20 16 03 29 CBL Interactive CBLi 170 CBLi Command Line Interface VIEW This macro overrides use of the default profile macro defined by the CBLIINI Edit option DEFPROFILE macroname and or the CBLe command SET DEFPROFILE default PROFILE The macro name must exist in a library within the CBLe macro path The PROFILE option only affects the profile for the file currently being added to the ring and does not affect the profile to be used when additional files are added to the edit ring later in your edit session NOPROFILE Suppresses use of a profile macro when editing the file The NOPROFILE option only affects the file currently being added to the ring and does not affect the profile to be used when additional files are added to the ring later in your edit session HFS Opts See CBLe CLI command EDIT for supported HFS parameters VOLSTATS Syntax gt gt VOLSTATS gt lt I VOL volser Description Use the VOLSTATS command to open a DASD Volume Statistics window and optionally display statistics for a specific DASD volume The DASD Volume Statistics window may also
221. ime Each document is displayed in a separate child window within the client area of the application s main frame window Typical MDI applications on PCs include word processing and spread sheet applications MDI Client Area window The MDI client area window is the display area within an MDI application s frame window The MDI client area serves as the backround for MDI child windows MDI Child Document Window An MDI child or document window is opened in an application s client area window each time a document is opened Each child window has a sizing border title bar window menu minimise maximise restore and close buttons A child window is clipped so that it is confined to the client window and cannot appear outside it When a child window is maximized its client area completely fills the MDI client area window In addition the system automatically hides the child window s title bar and adds the child window s window menu icon and Restore button to the MDI application s menu bar MDI Frame Window An MDI frame window may be considered the main window of an MDI application It is the parent window of the MDI client area window in which MDI child windows are opened It has a sizing border title bar window menu minimise maximise restore and close buttons Ring The set of all files being edited within CBLe It is not the set of all windows opened e g The contents of one file may be displayed in more than one edit view window SDB
222. in This gives the SELCOPY Interactive environment an equivalent to the STEPLIB JCL statement which may occur in SELCOPY batch jobs The included library path may be entered in the Run SELCOPY dialog window or via the LIB parameter on the CBLi CLI SELCOPY command as one of the following e A DDname which has been pre allocated to one or more load libraries e One or more load library DSNs separated by commas semi colons or blanks Note If the DSNs are separated by blanks quotes must also be used to delimit the list of DSNs not the individual DSNs The following SELCOPY line command and Run SELCOPY dialog examples illustrate use of LibPath selcopy ctl INCTL lib SYS3 TEST LOADLIB SYS3 NBJ TEST EXE Run SELCOPY Enter SELCOPY run command parameters CtlFile gt SYS3 TEST SELCOPY CTLO1063 ArgString gt PamName gt SELCOPY SELCOPY load modu will override INI file LoadLib gt SYS3 TEST LOADLIB SYS3 N SEXE gt E IMS parameters PSBName gt 1MSI d gt BMP gt YIN Figure 6 Run SELCOPY Dialog Window with Load Library Path This feature is exploited by the JCLCMX CBLe REXX macro which translates JCL statements from a batch job into the equivalent CBLi commands thus setting up an environment suitable for interactive execution of a SELCOPY batch job Where STEPLIB JCL statements are found in EXEC PGM SELCOPY steps the library names are included on a LIB parameter in the generated equivalent SELCOPY
223. indow is based on the dimensions of the 3270 terminal If the 3270 terminal width is 80 or less the SELCOPY Interactive MDI parent window is opened in a maiximised state LoopBreakIn n_times The Loop break in counter for SELCOPY Interactive When the break in threshold has been reached a pop up message window is opened and control is passed back to the user to continue debug investigation This means that there is no need to forcibly end the CBLi session in order to restart the SELCOPY debug process that is infinitely looping The default n_times value is 1000000 ProgramName name The name of the SELCOPY load module to be loaded to execute SELCOPY interactively Default value is SELCOPY DLI ACBLIB pdsname For MVS only the name of the IMS DL1 ACBLIB to be used when executing SELCOPY Interactive jobs that access IMS DL1 databases DBDLIB pdsname For MVS only the name of the IMS DL1 DBDLIB to be used when executing SELCOPY Interactive jobs that access IMS DL1 databases PSBLIB pdsname For MVS only the name of the IMS DL1 PSBLIB to be used when executing SELCOPY Interactive jobs that access IMS DL1 databases RESLIB pdsname For MVS only the name of the IMS DL1 RESLIB to be used when executing SELCOPY Interactive jobs that access IMS DL1 databases DB2 MVS Only Exec Immediate Delay For MVS only the default action for the EXEC parameter of the CBLi SQL command PLAN p an For MVS only the name used to bind the appl
224. indow names in the title bar Open the VTOC extents list window A volume name can be passed as a parameter Not yet implemented for VSE min lt ets the focus window to the next window in the ring of all windows pen the POWER Command Output window ets the focus window to the previous main window within the CBLi desktop O ets the focus window to the previous window in the ring of all windows xit and close the current window DIM M oM NIN JN AN JO W JD ID DIO in DIM IO IO I I lolo JO JD JO JO lo O fo fo fo fo to Po 192 fo ly fo 2 Jo fo fo fo 2 fo fo o lo fo Jo elBrBrPBPLEPEEREE EE 3 ls ls gt lo gt ls sie lo E ls y Jo fo fo Js fo fo fo a o Jo Y lu le S Ic Jc lo 13 gt lo lo O pes o 3 e E le IS 2 2 fa 3 3 2 fs o la Jo lt o Io lo o lo z C gt 2 c Pd 3 lo u lo 2 Z 3 la IE lo E g ls Ia Io l lS 3 Ia IE 2 2 mn w 2 lo 15 Js 1 5 O gt R lo fo la 5 8 la le 12 12 lay 3 O SiS Jo e S 5 3 Z IE z B E 2 Jo E o 512 fo S la EIS If E fu 3 i Ela ot z 5 lo Z 5 Jz lt lo 1515 lo le z 2 z lo s Sl lt la IS iE IGS I ISIC Mm lo Ic o Jo gt Q Zz lt lo lo lo Jo JA gt Jo lt 5 Jz 2 5 l ol oREIFIELR ies o z la o E e D 2 elo g Sjj lo 3 Z n S lu 5 2 lo af 5 a E 2 5 gle lt 3 S le mi O Q n O lo O TO IO 5 5 3z D gt jd O IO lt lo S lu S b y 49 a S O E g O o
225. is in turn depends on which facilities of CBLi are in use The Stack high water mark represents the maximum amount of stack storage that has been in use in the current CBLi session Lists The List insert work area and List container are areas of storage associated with CBLi listing facilities bytes Heap free bytes Heap used bytes Heap overhead bytes Number of MemAlloc requests Number of MemFree requests Heap blocks allocated Heap block size Heap allocation unit Butes allocated by GetMain Number of GetMain allocations Stack length Stack high water mark List container allocated bytes List container used bytes Number of lists List insert work area Length Figure 71 Storage Statistics window 2009 07 20 16 03 29 CBL Interactive CBLi 113 System Windows CBLi Storage Statistics Window CBLi Module List Window The CBLi Module List may be opened to display information on all modules that comprise CBLi via the following e Select CBLi module list from the System menu in the CBLi Main Menu e Enter the CBLi command APE on the command line of any window The Module List window is a List Window and supports the standard List window features i e Field Descriptor Block Edit and Selecting Sorting and Filtering O e List gt View Back Forward FDB Edit Refresh Help Command gt Name Version Level EDTFWIN4 ViREMO 84 WINFWCLA YiREGMO 34 EPA 1E415E00 0 El
226. isplayed The POS expression is re evaluated for every break in the SELCOPY execution Parameters expr A valid SELCOPY POS expression This may include EQUated names pointers LRECL special POS keywords e g DATE COMREG integer values and arithmetic operators plus and minus colour The colour in which the evaluated position is highlighted This is a two character code defining the colour and optionally the extended highlighting to be used Valid colour codes are Bo Bt SO Po Pink O Valid extended highlighting codes are Bo Bink O NO None No extended highlighting Ro Reverse Video Underscore The default extended highlighting is R reverse video the default colour is T turquoise OFF Switch off tracking for the specified expression Examples TRACK A 10 R Highlight in red default reverse video the byte in all storage windows that is referenced by the expression A 10 TRACK ARRAY X 1 GU Highlight in green with underscore the byte in all storage windows that is referenced by the expression ARRAY X 1 2009 07 20 16 03 29 CBL Interactive CBLi 27 Executing SELCOPY TRACK WINDOW Syntax gt gt Window gt lt AT HS CEL gt 222 gt EQuates FS ESG 92 PCB BOS expr SQL Workarea WTO TRace Description Use th
227. ist window and displays information about files residing on accessed mini disks Refer to documentation on List CMS Files The Dataset List window is not supported on VSE systems The Dataset List window displays the basic catalog entry information together with the details of their geometry obtained either from the catalog or the VTOC for cataloged data sets Command gt EntcrRu RecFm Lrecl Blks 409 409 CBLMO1 CBLMO 1 NOREUSE DATA CBLMO 2 409 NOREUSE GAPS NOREUSE GAPS DATA REUSE REUSE DATA REUSE GAPS REUSE GAPS DATA REUSE TEMP REUSE TEMP DATA CBLMO6 409 CBLMO6 4039 CBLMOS 4039 4039 4039 409 CBLMOS CBLMO4 CBLMO4 PROPOPOPOPOPRORPROD OO0D00D00000000 0 00 oo O O O 00 E Figure 42 Dataset List window displaying all Cluster and AIX entries beginning CBL Entry gt Specify the fileid mask The fileid mask represents a DSN mask that supports the following wild cards A single asterisk indicates that either a qualifier or one or more characters within a qualifier can occupy that position An asterisk can precede or follow a set of characters A double asterisk indicates that zero or more qualifiers can occupy that position A double asterisk cannot precede or follow any characters it must be preceded or followed by either a dot or a blank oe A single percent sign indicates that exactly one character can occupy that position Up to 8 percent signs c
228. itions PF1 StepOver Execute the next SELCOPY operation step over a sub routine PF2 Stepinto Execute the next SELCOPY operation step into a sub routine PF4 Macro SdbPopup Invoke the SDBPOPUP edit macro to display a functions menu edit views only PF5 ShowPopupMenu Open the storage display options popup menu storage display windows only PF13 Go Continue SELCOPY processing PF14 BreakPoint Toggle a break point on and off at the focus operation edit views only For edit views only the default action of the PF1 PF2 PF13 PF14 keys may be governed via the SdbPopup macro which allows the user to select either Edit or Debug PFKey configuration 2009 07 20 16 03 29 CBL Interactive CBLi 29 Executing CBLVCAT 1 CBLVCAT Interactive Window 2 Raw Data Window CBLVCAT Interactive Window The Execute CBLVCAT window is used to execute CBLVCAT Interactive and may be opened via the following e Select Execute CBLVCAT from the FILE menu item in the CBLi Main Menu bar e Enter the CBLi command VCAT on the command line of any window e Enter the T or VC prefix command in the prefix area of an existing Execute CBLVCAT window or certain other List type windows T will generate a CBLVCAT Tune report and IDCAMS DEFINE deck for a VSAM file VC will generate a CBLVCAT catalog and or VTOC report for the list entry CBLVCAT is used to generate standard and customised reports on VTOC and ICF VSAM catalog data It also supports VS
229. itor that runs as an MDI application under CBLi CBLe supports its own CLI and has been developed based on specifications found in Mansfield Software s KEDIT for Windows CBLi The Interactive environment developed by CBL and supplied as part of SELCOPY and CBLVCAT licensable software products CBLIINI File containing configuration options for CBLi The SYSTEM CBLIINI file is processed on startup of CBLi and contains options that apply to all users The USER CBLIINI file contains options specific to each user that may where appropriate override options set in the SYSTEM CBLIINI file CBLiVTAM Name of the multi user version of the CBLi application that executes under VTAM CBLVCAT CBL licensable product that supports VSAM file tuning and VTOC ICF VSAM catalog and VSE LABEL reporting Executes as a batch facility or interactively as a CBLi application Edit View A CBLe MDI document window that contains a display of edited data If the same file is displayed in multiple windows then the user has multiple edit views of the file Each edit view can have a different current line ARBCHAR setting ZONE columns etc List Window A CBLi window containing rows of associated information List windows support point and shoot column sorting select sort and filter CLI commands and prefix area commands MDI Multiple Document Interface is a Microsoft specification for PC applications that enable the user to work with multiple documents at the same t
230. ively Default value is CBLV SVC nnn For MVS Only the CBLVCAT SVC number used to open an MVS ICF catalog when CBLi is not running authorised During CBLi installation the installer is prompted to Link Edit this SVC and update this CBLIINI variable Default value is 109 which is the MVS extended SVC router SVC See ESR nnn below ESR nnn For MVS Only the CBLVCAT extended SVC routing code number Required if the SVC is 109 Default value is 222 ISPF MVS Only InitialState ON OFF For TSO ISPF environments only defines whether 3270 I O is performed by ISPF ON or TSO OFF The CBLi CLI ISPF command may subsequently be used to toggle between the two environments Default value is ON ISPFEdit MVS Only PFnn cmd Where nn can be 01 24 PF1 PF9 also supported Set the default CBLe editor PFkeys for INTERFACE ISPF mode operation These apply to any CBLe edit window The following are the defaults set by the program 2009 07 20 16 03 29 CBL Interactive CBLi 185 CBLIINI control file CBLIINI Standard Variables Edit DefProfile macroname Define the name of the macro to be used as the CBLe text edit deafult profile macro This macro is executed every time a new file is loaded into the editor This may also be set using the CBLe CLI command SET DEFROFILE The name of the default profile may be temporarily overridden using the EDIT command options NOPROF and PROFILE The default profile name is PROFILE Initial
231. lace string For RunType FIND this value is aways 0 zero ChgRecsErr The total number of selected input records for which a CHANGE error has occurred For RunType FIND this value is aways 0 zero ChgFilesErr The total number of files that contain at least one record for which a CHANGE error has occurred For RunType FIND this value is aways 0 zero Structure The name of the structure SDO specified via the USING field parameter for Structured File Search amp Update For Unstructured File Search amp Update this field value is always blank Record Type Hit The format of the Hit records depend on the Summary record RunType field as follows 1 For RunType FIND displays every record that satisfies all the specified search criteria i e the VIEW record type for Structured File Search amp Update the WHERE clause and the FIND search string s Note that there is no CHANGE operation specified 2 For RunType NOUPDATE and UPDATE a pair of records for every input record that satisfies the CHANGE arguments The first record of the pair displays the original unaltered record data the second displays the record data after the CHANGE operation s have been executed Depending on whether the CHANGE operation s are successful the prefix area of the line displaying the updated record will contain the line flag CHG gt or if an error has occurred ERR gt With NOUPDATE the default in effect this allows t
232. ld then a popup message window is displayed prompting the user to continue or cancel the file load If the user chooses to cancel load when prompted then the records that have already been loaded are displayed in the SDE window view If the records were loaded for edit then Update in place edit will be used overriding any EDIT REPLACE request for full edit capabilities The default value is 5000 records This CBLiINI option may be updated using the SDE CLI command SET LOADWARNING MaxCOBOLRC value The maximum acceptable COBOL compiler return code for which an SDE structure will be successfully generated This value is only applicable to execution of the SDE CLI command CREATE STRUCTURE with parameter FROM COBOL copybook The default value is 4 Where a COBOL return code greater than the MAXCOBOLRC value occurs the CREATE STRUCTURE operation fails with an error message This CBLiINI option may be updated using the SDE CLI command SET MAXCOBOLRC MaxPL1RC value The maximum acceptable PL 1 compiler return code for which an SDE structure will be successfully generated This value is only applicable to execution of the SDE CLI command CREATE STRUCTURE with parameter FROM PL1 copybook The default value is 4 Where a PL 1 return code greater than the MAXPL1RC value occurs the CREATE STRUCTURE operation fails with an error message This CBLiINI option may be updated using the SDE CLI command SET MAXPL1RC MaxStor n_bytes n_bytesK n_
233. lds in the List window FDB is primarily used as an aid to performing List window SELECT SORT and WHERE clause commands 2009 07 20 16 03 29 CBL Interactive CBLi 49 List Windows Field Descriptor Block FDB Cataloged atas View Back Forward FDB Edit Refresh Help Command gt Name Type Key Offset Length Title DispLen Digits Sc DataClas Char No 100 8 SMS Data Class 3 0 Deve Char No 52 4 Device Class 4 0 DSTupe Char No 66 14 Dataset type 14 0 Entry Char Yes 0 44 Entry name 36 0 EType Char No Y Catalog entry type 7 0 FSeq UTTE No 56 2 File Sequence number 2 0 MomtClas Char No 116 8 SMS Management Class 3 0 StorClas Char No 108 8 SMS Storage Class 3 0 Ip Char No 58 1 Catalog entry type code 1 o UnitName Char No 34 16 Unit name 16 a UnitType Hex No 30 4 Unit type 3 a Vol Char Yes 44 6 Volume serial number 6 0 vSeq UIE Yes 50 2 volume Sequence number 3 0 Figure 35 FDB for Catalog List window Name Specifies the field names that constitute the List window column headers These entries are used when selecting columns and sorting filtering rows to generate new list views Type The data format in which data for that column is stored Key Identifies whether or not the column is a key column If the column is a key column and is either the first column in the list or immediately follows another key column then it is always in view even when scrolling the list view left or right Offset The offset
234. le Search only VIEW specifies the single record type to be used in selecting records to be processed Only records that are assigned this record type for SDE edit will be passed for input to the FIND WHERE and or CHANGE conditions The record_type specification is identical to that supported by the SDE CLI command VIEW Default is the default record type definition It is recommended that a VIEW parameter is specified in order to avoid any ambiguity over record type selection This is particularly true when executing FSU with CHANGE UPDATE WHERE where_clause Specifies a where_clause condition to select only records that match the specified where_clause criteria FIND and WHERE are used to select records from the specified data set search chain If CHANGE is also specified then the CHANGE operations are executed against the selected records only e g FSU INPUT DEV TEST DATAX3 USING DEV TEST SDO SDDATAX3 WHERE JOBTITLE MANAGER OR SALARY gt 38000 CHANGE John W Smith c JWS 20 22 OR J W Smith c JWS 20 22 The where_clause condition is a combination of parameters supported by the SDE CLI command WHERE For Unstructured File Search i e no USING parameter where_clause may only reference field 1 or Record e g FSU INPUT DEV USERO1 JCL WHERE 1 gt gt AND 1 lt lt EXEC Fields referenced by field name or field reference number within a where_clause must exist within the record type
235. letype qualifier is Prefix Line Commands The following prefix line commands are available Command blank Prefix line command E The ENTER key must be pressed with the cursor on the line containing the required entry C Copy the entry Delete the entry User will be prompted to verify the deletion Open the CBLe text editor to edit this entry Open the file search window for the PDS Delete Kill the entry without prompting for verification Rename the entry Open the CBLe text editor to View edit read only this entr Open an Execute CBLVCAT window and issue a LISTVCAT operation for the entry Open a drop down menu containing valid prefix command functions for the list window entry Position the cursor on the required function and hit lt Enter gt to action the command Assigned to PF4 by default E F K C V V Open a new window containing a zoomed vertical display of the entry s fields Particularly useful for list windows that have a large number of displayed columns Assigned to PF2 by default 2009 07 20 16 03 29 CBL Interactive CBLi 65 List Windows List CMS Files Columns Displayed The data displayed is Fmt List Dataset Details The Dataset List window may be opened via the following e Select Dataset Details from the LIST menu in the CBLi Main Menu e Enter the CBLi command LD on the command line of any window For CMS the File List window is opened in place of the Catalog List or Dataset L
236. link opens a page on the CBL web site that contains the results for each emulator tested to date http www cbl com cbli3270 html Emulator configuration files and macros that are applicable to individual 3270 emulator packages have been generated and published on the CBL web pages for use with CBLi Please see the following http www cbl com cblidl htm Manipulating Windows Moving a window If a window has a title bar it can be moved with the following procedure 1 Place the cursor in the title bar of the window 2 Press the enter key The window border will be highlighted 3 Move the cursor to a new position 4 Press the enter key The window will move by an amount equal to the displacement of the cursor Also see CBLi command MOVEWINDOW and CBLe command SET WINPOS Resizing a window If a window has a border it can be resized with the following procedure 1 Place the cursor in the border of the window If the cursor is in the top or bottom border the window will have its depth changed If the cursor is in the left or right border it will have its width changed If the cursor is in a corner of the border it will have its width and depth changed 2 Press the enter key The window border will be highlighted 3 Move the cursor to a new position 4 Press the enter key The window will be resized by an amount equal to the displacement of the cursor wine ee CBLi commands SIZEWINDOW DRAGBORDERMINUS DRAGBORDERPLUS and CBLe comma
237. load the entire file into storage in order to display a page of records Parameters fileid The fileid of the file to be browsed fileid may be the DSN of a sequential or VSAM data set the member name with or without the library DSN of a PDS PDSE member or an HFS file name If member name is specified without a library DSN the DSN of the library member in the current edit view is used SDE BROWSE Opts See SDE BROWSE for supported parameters CALENDAR Syntax gt gt CALENDAR gt lt 1 CAL g Description Use the CAL command to open the Calendar Window The Calendar Window may also be opened via the Utilities entry of the CBLi main menu 2009 07 20 16 03 29 CBL Interactive CBLi 122 CBLi Command Line Interface CALENDAR Syntax gt gt CALCULATE gt lt tel CALE gt REXX_expression Description Use the CALC command to open the Calculator Window and optionally evaluate a REXX expression The Calculator Window may also be opened via the Utilities menu of the CBLi main window menu bar Parameters REXX_expression The Calculator will evaluate any valid REXX expression This may include the result of any REXX function built in to REXX or written by the user Examples CALC 1024 281 3 2 CALC c2x bitxor af x 44 x CBLI Syntax gt gt CBLI command gt lt Description Execute a CBLi command The speci
238. lume Table of Contents VTOC by physical extent This includes free extents and volume control areas such as the VTOC and the label area Note Not supported for VSE 2009 07 20 16 03 29 CBL Interactive CBLi 71 List Windows List VTOC Extents TOC Extent List CBLMO1 View Back Forward FDB Edit Refresh Help Command gt volume CBLMO1 Vol C HH CBLMO1 0 label Area CBL MODEL Y YTOC a pa le la ee Met CBL JCL ORIG SYS1 VVDS VCBLMO1 ONG CTL FILE DATAS S CEC SSC E Tees he Whale o B E ze 8 8 VOL KSDS DATA I PEPEE K A SCOCSCSOMLHWHWWUNEFS 4444400444 AO NNNNNOZARPR BODOG THREE NO00000mM 000 BEBEI NbONPRRRRRRRERRRROR E DIUNPRAODOLINRAOOOOrR E p 3 Figure 44 VTOC Extent List window displaying all extents on volume CBLMO1 Volume gt The 1 6 character volume id containing the required VTOC Prefix Line Commands The following prefix line commands are available blank Prefix line command M if entry is a PDS PDSE library prefix line command E otherwise The ENTER key must be pressed with the cursor on the line containing the PDS s Open the CBLe text editor to to perform SDATA BROWSE onthe entry le lcopytreeny gt o Delete the entry User willbe prompted to verify thedeletion S Open the FSU File Search Update Window to perform an advanced search and optionally update the contents of the entry L Open an IDCAMS Command window a
239. ly when the Dynamic SQL window is closed regardless of the AutoCommit field setting The commit value is reflected in the AutoCommit gt field of the Dynamic SQL window The default is YES sql_syntax Valid SQL syntax to be executed when the Dynamic SQL widow is opened The sg _syntax string is placed in the first SQL Statement line field of the Dynamic SQL window Examples SOL SSN DB8G select from dsn810 emp Display all entries in the table DSN810 EMP in sub systen DB8G 2009 07 20 16 03 29 CBL Interactive CBLi 164 CBLi Command Line Interface SQL SVC Syntax gt gt SVC gt lt Description For MVS only use the SVC command to display the CBLVCAT SVC window containing the current status of the CBLVCAT Interactive VCI SVC required for LISTVCAT operations The CBLVCAT SVC window may also be opened via the System menu of the CBLi main window menu bar YCII0171 Checking the status of the CBLYCAT Interactive SVC svc 109 esr 222 module IGKO0222 vYCII0181 SYC module IGKO0222 found in the static LPA EP 82BB3578 Address O02BB3578 Length 00000100 YCII0211 SYC module 16X00222 is the CBLYCAT interactive SYC Id CBLYSYC Assembled 2003 08 13 15 20 Level 010 VCIIO23I SYC module IGKO0222 is installed in the SYC table Figure 82 CBLVCAT SVC Window SYSAPF Syntax gt gt SYSAPF gt lt Description Use the SYSAPF command to open the APF List window The
240. mber of input records successfully read from the selected files FilesTot The total number of files that match the supplied fileid mask s Hits For RunType FIND this is the total number of occurrences of the FIND search string s found within the input records that satisfy the logical combination of FIND conditions e g FIND A AND B will increment the Hit total for every occurrence of A and B in records that contain both A and B For RunType NOUPDATE and UPDATE this is the total number of occurrences of the CHANGE search string s found within the selected input records i e input records that satisfy the VIEW WHERE and or FIND criteria RecordsHit For RunType FIND this is the total number of input records that satisfy the supplied WHERE clause and or FIND search string criteria For RunType NOUPDATE and UPDATE this is the total number of selected input records that satisfy the CHANGE search string criteria RecordsHit corresponds with the number of input records that are of the record type Hit Records and so are displayed in the report output FilesHit The total number of files that contains at least one record that includes a hit IOErrors The total number of files for which I O errors that have occurred during execution ChgErrors The total number of CHANGE errors e the total number of occurrences of a CHANGE search string within all selected records that cannot be updated with the CHANGE rep
241. mmand line Window Concepts Window types All windows exist in a hierarchy At the top of the hierarchy is the desktop window which is automatically created during initialisation The desktop window covers the whole screeen and cannot be moved resized or destroyed All other windows including the CBLi application main window are dependents of the desktop When an application creates a window the new window has to be dependent on an existing window the parent or owning window If the application does not supply an existing window then the desktop window is used by default This dependency relationship has 2 forms e Child window The dependent window is a child of the existing window which is called its parent The child window can only exist within the rectangle defined by its parent s client area Typically child windows are used for low level entities such as buttons and input fields e Owned window The dependent window is owned by the existing window which is called its owner The owned window can be moved all over the display surface but is always infront of cannot be obscured by its owner Typically owned windows are used for more complex entities such as dialog boxes and help windows When a window is destroyed so are all of its dependent owned and child windows N 2009 07 20 16 03 29 CBL Interactive CBLi Getting started with CBLi Screen Sizes Screen Sizes The CBL 3270 screen manager can handle any 3270 screen size
242. n PDS data set that matches the fileid mask one or more member masks should be specified between a single pair of parentheses Multiple PDS E member masks must be separated by a commma and or one or more intervening blanks If a volume serial mask is specified the search is restricted to only those data sets that match the specified fileid mask and also have extents that exist on the volume s that match the specified volume mask The volume serial mask is specified at the start of the fileid mask and is distinguishable from the rest of the fileid mask by an intervening colon and no embedded blanks e g Z9RES1 ADCD Z19 PROCLIB 2009 07 20 16 03 29 CBL Interactive CBLi 92 Utility Windows FSU File Search Update Window Wild card characters are supported as described for Volume Mask DSN Mask and Member Mask Examples Fileid Mask PE1 DEV SRC COBOL CRKSWO0 Fileid Mask SYS6 JNP Fileid Mask OEM TESTS CBLI BOX DST ALL Z9RES1 ADCD Volume Mask Optionally specify a volume serial id mask Not applicable to HFS files The search will be restricted to only those data sets that match the DSN mask and also have extents that exist on the volume s that match the volume mask The volume mask supports wild card characters as follow A single asterisk represents a complete volume name or zero or more characters within a volume name e g CBL RES A single percent sign represents exac
243. n PDS data set that matches the DSN mask one or more member masks should be specified Multiple PDS E member masks must be separated by a comma and or one or more intervening blanks e g BLOCK PROFILE BOXSEQ The search will be restricted to only those PDS E data sets that match the DSN mask and only members with a member name that matches any one of the supplied member masks A member mask supports wild card characters as follow A single asterisk represents an entire member name or zero or more characters within a member name e g CBL 5 BOX D T A single percent sign represents exactly one character within a member name mask e g H D R ESA HES HFS specific options that apply to all HFS path fileid masks specified in the INPUT field The HFS fields are as follow Recfm Specify the record format F or V to be used for all HFS files that match the HFS path fileid masks specified on the INPUT parameter V Fmt EOL Specify the EOLIN input end of line delimiter to be used for determining the end of a record for all HFS files that match the HFS path fileid masks specified in the INPUT field Note that if the RecFm field is not empty the contents of the V Fmt EOL field are ignored unless the value of the RecFm field is V In this case the contents of the V Fmt EOL field are used to specify comma separated offset 2009 07 20 16 03 29 CBL Interactive CBLi 93 Utility Windows FSU File Search Update Window
244. n indicates that exactly one character can occupy that position Up to 8 percent signs can be specified in each qualifier Unless the last character of the fileid mask is a wild card asterisk or a dot period then a default trailing wild card string is appended to the fileid mask as follows 1 If the fileid mask is a single qualifier or the last qualifier is length 8 a wildcard string of is appended e g DEV becomes DEV DEV OEM TRSPANOO becomes DEV OEM TRSPANOO DEV TRSPANOO becomes DEV TRSPANOO 2 A wildcard string of is appended e g DEV OEM CBL202 becomes DEV OEM CBL202 SYSs1 ZOS becomes SYS1 ZOS x The ammended entry string is placed in the Entry field of the Dataset List window catalog Specifies the catalog in which to search for the requested entry This is a catalog DSN Specifying a catalog DSN is unneccessary if an alias exists for the fileid mask high level qualifier HLQ in the master catalog In this case the appropriate catalog DSN will automatically be inserted in this field If the HLQ contains a wild card then all matching aliases are interrogated and the required catalogs are searched An asterisk may be specified to imply the default catalog name This need only be specified if the types parameter is to be used Default is the master catalog The catalog DSN searched is placed in the Catalog field of the Dataset List window types Specify the catalog
245. n menu bar or by executing the HELP line command at the CBLi main window command prompt Context sensitive help windows are displayed by performing either of these functions within the appropriate CBLi window e g Executing HELP in a Library List window opens the help window for the topic List Library Members AS ee A A ES Back Forward Home Close Source Text Help Command gt Location gt CBL Interactive CBLi Reference and User Guide CBLe Editor Structured Data Environment SELCOPY User Manual CBLWCAT User Manual SELCOPY_ 2 01 New Features SELCOPY_ 2 02 New Features CBLYCAT 2 12 New Features CBLi 1 60 New Features CBL Products Install Guide For MVS CBL Products Install Guide For CMS and VM 4VSE CEL Products Install Guide For VSE CBLi Update Guide For MYS CBLi INI CBL DIST CBLI HELP HIML CBLINDEX Figure 75 CBLi Main Help Menu window SELCOPY Interactive Main Window Back Forward Home Close Source Text Help Command gt Location gt previous next contents SELCOPY Interactive Main window Like the CBLe text editor SELCOPY Interactive is an MDI Multiple Document Interface application An MDI application comprises a parent frame window with a menu bar and a client area within which one or more MDI child windows are displayed ALL MDI child windows are confined to the parent window s client area The SELCOPY Interactive Main frame Window supports all MDI child windows supported by the CBLe frame wind
246. n the CBLi Main Menu CBLNAME Window System Windows GCBLPLANE DBS F00000 0000 WwIifrfoiLocococaccoajo onotdioococoooooNA Ioyiidocoococoococoooo INo 10000000000O ao fofofofofofofof Ta nuca ocococococooo cna yyocococoooooo Nocor ooc nococoooo oviyiobococomcocococoo R Laconococn oococooooaa anTooOeeoNooooo0000 TAooNoctocoooooo aoToUeeoooo000000 MMNSGLMTeToUeeoooo ocONFLONoococaoooa Nnocr oojqomococoaoo Nafodococmooooo Nioconoo 000000OA Doy iLocococooooo ofocNociLocococoo TITTOSCSLOCOoCOCOCoCoOS SNeeTeSedeoOoCoCoCooo Mao tooo fo fofofofof Ta ONeoeoececoo00000000 TOTTeSePeeeCeCoCCoCoooSo Nnacococococcoooo oTTTeceeeececoeoeocono Neoeeoeedeeooocooo0no OYy94Yvoocooocococoocoo Naco cocoocoooooo colirtocococooocoooo 000000000000 o0o0oO SANOTFINDOPoNTIADAwyL 000000000 coOcoocoo 000000000000 oOO 0000000000000 O0O 0000000000000 000Oo Ufo fofofofofofofofofofafofofa Ta D T A D M o M aT O AWL GO ANMA MCOMMMOMOMMMMMNMMNITTTT pa m D LO LD LO O D WWW mi E D 00 10 100 00 0 D 0 LO D O O LO LO O LO MOococococococcooco oooO Docococococcooooo 115 CBL Interactive CBLi Figure 74 CBLNAME window 2009 07 20 16 03 29 CBLi Interactive Help The CBLi Interactive Help windows are basic HTML browse windows started with links to the CBLi suite of HTML help files located via the CBLIINI variable Help DefaultPath The CBLi Main Help menu window is opened via the Help menu item of the CBLi window mai
247. name Description Use the LA List Allocated files command to open an Allocated Datasets List window and optionally list all MVS DD names VSE file labels or CMS FILEDEFs currently allocated to your job The Allocated Files window may also be opened via the List menu of the CBLi main window menu bar Note Not yet implemented for CMS Parameters ddname Select only the list entry for the specified MVS DD name VSE file name or CMS FILEDEF A partial name may be entered in which case only those allocated files that start with the string entered will be listed Datasets List window Examples LA SYS List all allocated files beginning with SYS LC Syntax e Open an MVS Cataloged Entries List Window gt gt LC Sa SS a Se Sa SS Se a SS SS a as gt lt i LISTCAT l entry 5 see ste ss See oe be FL l te catalog pee FILELIST ee L types ay e Open a CMS File List Window gt gt LC Porat eS es es 4 gt lt z LISTCAT i a at a lak OO i EL E L FILELIST a a LD LISTDATASET 2009 07 20 16 03 29 CBL Interactive CBLi 140 CBLi Command Line Interface LC e Open a VSE Catalog List Window gt gt LC 4 Homo gt lt a LISTCAT gt Catalog to 5 eee a de E 35 l ENTRY SaaS hese L FILELIST om Sn types
248. name mask are listed e g LL CBLLIB TEST 3 A library name sublibrary name and member name and type In this case the member name and type may be a mask containing asterisk wild cards The statistics for all members which fit the mask are listed e g LL CBLLIB TESTO1 2 This parameter is placed in the Library field of the Library List window Examples LL CBL JCL List all members of the CBL JCL PDS LL PRD2 CBL List all members of the PRD2 CBL LIBR sublibrary LL PRD2 List all LIBR sublibraries of PRD2 2009 07 20 16 03 29 CBL Interactive CBLi 146 CBLi Command Line Interface LL LP Syntax gt gt qe LP sesos O pap oS nt Se ee ee 1 sn gt lt AR LISTPATH ee i Jet R gt J hfs_path E a LISTP i Description The LP List Path entries command may be used to open an HFS Path List window to list information about entries that match the specified HFS path If no parameters are specified the list window will be opened with fields populated with parameters entered by the user for the last invocation of the HFS Path list window The HFS Path List window may also be opened via the LD command if the dataset specification begins with dot period or contains slash or via the List menu of the CBLi main window menu bar The LP command is not supported on CMS and VSE systems Parameters C Specify C or c to bypass case sensitivity for the name portion of the specified
249. nd Delete the entry User will be prompted to verify the deletion Delete Kill the entry without prompting for verification Rename the entry Open an Execute CBLVCAT window and issue a LISTVCAT TUNE DEFINE operation for the entry Open an Execute CBLVCAT window and issue a LISTVCAT operation for the entry O ET Open a new window containing a zoomed vertical display of the entry s fields Particularly useful for list windows that have a large number of displayed columns Assigned to PF2 by default Columns Displayed For MVS systems the data displayed is Entr Entry name Volume serial number VSeq Volume Sequence number DevC Device Class FSeq File Sequence number Catalog entry type code EType Catalog entry type DSType Dataset type UnitType Unit type 2009 07 20 16 03 29 CBL Interactive CBLi 63 2 List Windows List Catalog Entries For VSE systems the data displayed is se KueLKiMe onr merge KL BLK and IMB REP Values S imax onr Defined Maximum Record Length 2009 07 20 16 03 29 CBL Interactive CBLi 64 List Windows List CMS Files List CMS Files Supported for CMS systems only the File List window may be opened via the following e Enter the CBLi command FL synonym for LC or LD on the command line of any window For CMS the File List window is opened in place of the MVS VSE Catalog List or Dataset List windows and displays information about files residing on accessed disks View Back For
250. nd SET WINSIZE Maximising a window If a window has a maximise button it can be maximised by moving the cursor to the maximise button and pressing the enter key The window will then take up the whole of the 3270 screen The maximise button will change from a plus sign to a solid vertical bar representing restore Also see CBLi command MAXIMISE and CBLe command WINDOW MAX Minimising a window If a window has a minimise button it can be minimised by moving the cursor to the minimise button and pressing the enter key The window will then be removed from the display and replaced by a small iconic window showing just a portion of its title bar near the botton of the CBLi main window The minimise button will change from a minus sign to a solid vertical bar representing restore Also see CBLi command MINIMISE CBLe command WINDOW MIN Restoring a window When a window has been maximised or minimised it can be restored to its former position and size by moving the cursor to the maximise button or the minimise button which will now contain a solid vertical bar representing restore and pressing the enter key Also see CBLi command RESTORE CBLe command WINDOW REST Closing a window A window can be closed by moving the cursor to the close button and pressing the enter key Also see CBLi command CLOSE CBLe command WINDOW CLOSE 2009 07 20 16 03 29 CBL Interactive CBLi 3 Getting started with CBLi Window layout Window layout CBLi windows
251. nd field of the POWER Command Output window Note that some POWER commands are not supported for cross partition usage e g PDISPLAY STATUS Examples POWER D LST Display the POWER list queue POW PRELEASE RDR CBLTEST Release entry CBLTEST from the POWER reader queue PREVMAINWINDOW Syntax gt gt PREVMAINWINDOW gt lt Description This command sets the focus window to the previous main window i e one that is an immediate child of the desktop window e g instances of CBLe SELCOPY Interactive CBLVCAT Interactive or any list windows dialogs created directly from the desktop menu bar or command line The ring is maintained in creation sequence and wraps round from the first created to the last created Because MDI applications such as the CBLe editor and SELCOPY Interactive have many child windows of their own navigable with MDINext Prev commands this command is necessary to switch directly between CBLi applications By default PFO9 is set to MDINext By default PF21 is set to PrevMainWindow Shift PF9 See Also NEXTMAINWINDOW NEXTWINDOW PREVWINDOW MDIPREV MDIPREV PREVWINDOW Syntax gt gt PREVWINDOW gt lt Description This command sets the focus window to the previous window in the ring of all windows The ring is maintained in creation sequence and wraps round from the first created to the last created QUIT Syntax gt gt QUIT gt lt Description Us
252. nd issue an IDCAMS LISTCAT forthe entry m iine entry is a PDS PDSE open a Library List window Defaut Open the SDE BROWSE EDIT Dialog Window to browse or edit the entry s data within a Structured Data Environment window view Opens the general file utilities menu to ultimately generate specific line commands in a temporary CMX file Open the CBLe text editor to View edit read only this entry Open an Execute CBLVCAT window and issue a LISTVCAT operation for the entry Perform a compress of an MVS PDS library to reclaim disk space occupied by replaced back level members This action performs an IEBCOPY to itself No action is taken for PDSE entries however the IEBCOPY dialog is opened with an error message if executed against any non PDS E entry Open the volume statistics window for the volume containing the entry Open a drop down menu containing valid prefix command functions for the list window entry Position the cursor on the required function and hit lt Enter gt to action the command Assigned to PF4 by default Open a new window containing a zoomed vertical display of the entry s fields Particularly useful for list windows that have a large number of displayed columns Assigned to PF2 by default f 2009 07 20 16 03 29 CBL Interactive CBLi 72 List Windows List VTOC Extents Columns Displayed The data displayed is Vol Dsn Org Alu Nxt List MVS Allocated Files The Allocated Datasets m
253. nd library members containing at least one hit zLrecl The record length of the record within the data set zHits The total number of occurrences of the search string s within the record For all RunType FIND Hit records or RunType NOUPDATE UPDATE Hit records with zT field flag set to B this is the number of FIND search string occurrences For all RunType NOUPDATE UPDATE Hit records with zT field flag set to A this is the number of CHANGE search string occurrences ZErrs For RunType NOUPDATE and UPDATE only the total number of occurrences of a CHANGE search string within the record that cannot be updated with the CHANGE replace string For RunType FIND this field is omitted 2T For RunType NOUPDATE and UPDATE only the record flag which may be one of the following B Indicates that the record data that follows represents the record data Before the CHANGE operation s have been applied A Indicates that the record data that follows represents the record data After the CHANGE operation s have been applied Note that the record data will be unchanged if the values in the fields ZHits and zErrs are equal For RunType FIND this field is omitted zRecord The structure including all the record data fields For Unstructured File Search 8 Update the zRecord field contains the unexpanded record data as a single character field of length equal to the record length For Structured File Search amp
254. nd or LISTVTOC operation as appropriate for the entry Perform a compress of an MVS PDS library to reclaim disk space occupied by replaced back level members This action performs an IEBCOPY to itself No action is taken for PDSE entries however the IEBCOPY dialog is opened with an error message if executed against any non PDS E entry Supported in MVS environments only Open the DASD Volume Statistics window for the volume in the list entry Open a drop down menu containing valid prefix command functions for the list window entry Position the cursor on the required function and hit lt Enter gt to action the command Assigned to PF4 by default 2009 07 20 16 03 29 CBL Interactive CBLi 57 List Windows Prefix Commands gt Open a new window containing a zoomed vertical display of the entry s fields Particularly useful for list windows that have a large number of displayed columns Assigned to PF2 by default Command Cross Reference Prefix Commands DASD Volumes CATALOG List DATASET List MVS Allocated Datasets VSE Y Standard Lables Library Y ITYIYIYETYTEY PTY Y IYIYIYIY Y List Enqueue List Eng EE MEN eee eee alee ele File Y IY Y Y Y Y LY Y IYIYIYIY Y Search Legend VSE LIBR member list only ae MVS LIBR member list only 2009 07 20 16 03 29 CBL Interactive CBLi 58 List Windows List DASD Volumes List DASD Volumes The DASD Volumes List window may be opened via the followi
255. ndow The Storage Statistics window displays storage being used by CBLi at that moment in time The values in each field will vary as windows are opened and closed The storage allocated by CBLi is categorised internally as belonging to the Heap or the Stack Heap Heap storage contains structures such as lists control blocks etc Each structure is an element within the heap and may persist beyond the life of the function that generated it Each element exists within a fixed length heap storage block which itself may contain 1 or more elements When an element is released by CBLi the area within the storage block occupied by that element is freed If possible CBLi will utilise these free areas of storage for new elements However if an element is generated with a length that exceeds the available free area within existing storage blocks a new storage block is allocated from main storage Similarly if all the elements within a storage block are freed the block is released back to main storage Stack The stack is a fixed area of storage that contains the dynamic storage areas associated with each function that has been called A function acquires dynamic storage for local variables from the stack when it is called and frees this storage when it returns control to its caller Thus the amount of stack storage in use at any time depends on the number of levels of nested function calls and the amount of storage required by each function Th
256. ndow contains fields relevant to the object being defined The Models field allows the user to model the new object s values on an existing VSAM data set On entering a VSAM data set name in the Model field and hitting lt Enter gt all other fields are updated automatically to reflect the inherited values Select the appropriate Define VSAM Menu bar item to to process the form CBLe text editor also opens the Defin VSAM window when attempting to save a VSAM file with a data set name that has not yet been defined Name gt CBL SELCOPY DEMO1 KSDS Type K Model gt Reuse gt Y Catalog gt Span gt N Speed gt Y Avg rec len 70 Key length 6 Writecheck gt Y Max rec len gt 100 Key offset gt 0 Erase ove Buffer size gt Free space CI gt 0 Expiry gt Free space CA gt 0 SMS Data Class gt Region share option gt 1 SMS Stor Class gt CBLDFLT System share option gt 3 SMS Mgmt Class gt CBLDFLT ERE name gt CBL SELCOPY DEMO1 KSDS DATA volumes CBLMO4 Ordered gt N Space type gt TRACKS Primary gt 1 Secondary gt 1 CI Size gt 4096 name gt CBL SELCOPY DEMO1 KSDS INDEX Volumes gt CBLMO4 Ordered gt N Space type TRACKS Primary 1 Secondary T CI Size gt 512 Imbed gt N Replicate gt N Figure 31 Define VSAM KSDS window All Define VSAM windows have the following menu items Define Start the VSAM object definition Foreground Job Creates and edits the IDCAMS DEFINE statement including job control ready for submission to batch S
257. ng e Select DASD Volumes from the LIST menu in the CBLi Main Menu e Enter the CBLi command LVOL on the command line of any window The DASD Volumes window displays the attributes of DASD volumes defined to your system Volumes CBL View Back Forward FDB Edit Refresh Help Command gt UNIT VOL FREECYL FREETRK FREEXTN FREEDSCB MAXCYL MAXTRK VOLPCU VTOCPC _UAAO CBLMCT 2074 31134 645 1365 AE 38 0AA CBLMO1 137 2128 32 366 30 450 36 4 AAZ CBLMO2 554 8350 14 182 490 7362 84 T DAAS CBLMOS 136 2099 abe ae dla 13890 96 6 _ GAAS CBLMO4 30 SS 43 SS Tp 30 450 ENTE 6 OAAS CBLMOS 110 1824 Tr 250 31 a zi 6 0UAAG CBLMOE 445 63899 70 310 aa 3142 87 5 0AA CBLMO 1478 22274 Dr mbel 1472 22080 86 GAAS CBLMOS E Tooma ES 7242 733 11745 Ela OHER CBLMOS 3337 50055 al 697 3337 IIS al Figure 38 DASD Volumes window Volume gt Specify a volume id mask The mask supports the following wild cards An asterisk indicates that one or more characters within the volume id can occupy that position An asterisk can precede or follow a set of characters A single percent sign indicates that exactly one character can occupy that position Up to 6 percent signs can be specified By default a volume id mask that is less than 6 characters in length and does not contain an asterisk wild card will be treated as having an implied trailing wild card Prefix Line Commands The following prefix line
258. ns C as a substring or col3 is greater than 4 Note the quotes around the literal strings are not needed unless there are columns in the list with name A or C and that the blanks separating the elements of the expression are optional 2009 07 20 16 03 29 CBL Interactive CBLi 53 List Windows The Sort Order By Clause The Sort Order By Clause Syntax 4 A v Io gt gt SORT column_name D AAA ate ee gt ORDER BY D gt 4 4 4 4 gt lt SELECT Clause WHERE Clause Description Specified as a CLI command or as a parameter on SELECT or WHERE a SORT clause is used to modify the order in which the rows are displayed in the list Use of a SORT clause is not cumulative and is based on the list s default sort order Therfore any prevailing sort order is ignored The prevailing SELECT and WHERE clauses are unchanged Unlike SELECT and WHERE a SORT clause specified as a CLI command is not added to the View List Display drop down menu Parameters column_name Name of the List Window column on which to sort Column names must be supplied in the order in which they appear in the list heading or in the FDB The sort order is specified with a list of column sort specifications which consist of a column name followed by a sort direction
259. nt stream to loop It is possible however that the user may not know that the loop condition exists until SELCOPY processing has been restarted without a break point in which case since SELCOPY is executing in the foreground the 3270 session becomes unresponsive It is for this reason that the SELCOPY default break in facility exists to allow the user to pre define a default number of times that any control statement within the SELCOPY job stream may be executed before a virtual break point is encountered and processing is paused This break in threshold is controlled via the CBLiINI option SELCOPY LoopBreakin which has a default value of 1 000 000 When the break in threshold has been reached a pop up message window is opened and control is passed back to the user to continue debug investigation This means that there is no need to forcibly end the CBLi session and restart the SELCOPY debug process Note that a loop break in may occur even though a loop is not infinite e g the prime input file may have a number of records greater than the break in threshold SELCOPY Interactive Windows SELCOPY Interactive Main window Like the CBLe text editor SELCOPY Interactive is an MDI Multiple Document Interface application An MDI application comprises a parent frame window with a menu bar and a client area within which one or more MDI child windows are displayed All MDI child windows are confined to the parent window s client area The SE
260. ntry name as input Supported in MVS TSO or ISPF environments only F Open the FSU File Search Update Window to perform an advanced search and optionally update the contents of the entry Supported for MVS SELCOPY licensees only on all types of data set FO Open an SDE view to display browse the entry as output from the FSU File Search Update Window Supported for MVS SELCOPY licensees only FS Open the File Search window to search the contents of the entry Supported for MVS PDS PDSE CMS fileid VSE LIBR sub library and member entries only l Open an IDCAMS Command window and issue an IDCAMS LISTCAT for the entry J Submit the library member entry to batch Executes the CBLe CLI SUBMIT command using the entry name as input A CBLe frame window must be active for this operation to suceed Supported in MVS and VSE environments only K Delete Kill the entry without prompting for verification 2009 07 20 16 03 29 CBL Interactive CBLi 56 List Windows Prefix Commands L SD UT Open a Dataset List window for the entry Supported for Execute CBLVCAT windows only For VSE LIBR Library member list windows only lock the LIBR member Open a Library List window for the entry Supported for MVS PDS PDSE VSE LIBR library and sub library entries only List dataset enqueues major name SYSDSN for the entry Supported for MVS only Rename the entry Open the SDE BROWSE EDIT Dialog Window to edit or browse the entry s data
261. o or more characters in the OldName library member mask Default is men asterisk Specifies the Single Wild Card Character which represents one character in the OldName library member mask Default is percent Enter YES or NO to indicate whether the IEBCOPY SYSPRINT output is to be displayed Default is NO 2009 07 20 16 03 29 CBL Interactive CBLi 48 List Windows A list window is a window which displays information as a table of rows and columns The columns are described by data elements which have a name and data type The list of columns which make up the table are defined in a Field Descriptor Block FDB All list windows support common functions as well as those specific to the type of list The common functions are described in the following The List Window Menu Selecting Sorting and Filtering Sorting with the Cursor Prefix Commands List DASD Volumes List Catalog Entries List CMS Files List Dataset Details List VTOC Files List VTOC Extents List MVS Allocated Files List VSE Standard Labels List Library Members List MVS Enqueues List MVS Job Enqueues List HFS Path WON DOONDARWN A oe 14 15 16 The List Window Menu All list windows have the following menu items View This is a popup menu which lists all the views which have been made of the current list You can select a view from this menu Select the previous view Forward S
262. o submit the job to batch Note Unless already positioned on one of the window buttons Copy JCL Cancel or Help lt Enter gt will first position the cursor on the Copy button lt Enter gt a second time will select press the button to action the command Any non zero return code encountered using the foreground Copy option will open the Execute IEBCOPY output listing displaying the SYSPRINT output Unless the Output gt field value is YES if a zero return code is encountered no output window is opened and a message reporting the number of members copied is returned Execute ITEBCOPY Command gt PDSIn gt NBJ JCL PDSOut gt NBJ B090512 JCL The following are optional parameters OldName gt Old member name pattern NewName gt New member name pattern Replace gt NO Replace like named members Group gt NO Use COPYGRP to include Aliases MUCC gt Multiple wild card character SWCC gt Single wild card character Output NO View IEBCOPY output listing Figure 34 IEBCOPY Dialog window PDSIn gt Specify the DSN of the source PDS E library This may be a LOAD Library PDSOut gt Specify the DSN of the target PDS E library This may be the same library DSN specified for PDSIn Default is the value specified on the last invocation of the IEBCOPY dialog Otherwise the default is the PDSIn value OldName gt Source library member name mask identifying members to be copied Multiple character and single c
263. of the window is adjusted accordingly If relative mis an integer that may be prefixed by plus or minus to indicate a positive or negative adjustment to the number of columns displayed The number of columns displayed is increased or decreased by m columns and the right border of the window is adjusted accordingly There is no default value for m If omitted the width is unchanged Examples SIZEWINDOW TO D 21 Window is resized to display 21 rows SZW TO D 14 W 33 Window is resized to display 14 rows and 33 columns SZW BY D 8 Y 4 eN Window is resized to display an additional 8 rows and 4 columns less 2009 07 20 16 03 29 CBL Interactive CBLi 163 CBLi Command Line Interface SIZEWINDOW Syntax gt gt SQL O an RR pS Sa a ee gt pol SSN ssn_name PLAN plan_name LIMit n_rows EXec Immediate COmmit Yes lol gt Ho Ho gt lt Io pol EXec Delay COmmit No sql_syntax Description Use the SQL command to open the Dynamic SQL window The Dynamic SQL window may also be opened via the File menu of the CBLi main window menu bar The Dynamic SQL window connects the user to the DB2 subsystem using the DB2 subsystem name and plan specified in the CBLNAME load module Note Not implemented for CMS or VSE Parameters SSN ssn_name The DB2 sub system to be the target of the CONNECT Thi
264. of the input record SDE determines the record type to be associated with each record based on the record s length and any user defined USE record_type WHEN conditions applied to the SDO See documentation on SDE for further information on RTO record association Records are treated as comprising a number of data fields of pre determined lengths and of various data types Each field within the record may be referenced independently allowing the user to be more descriminate when selecting records for find and update For Unstructured File Search amp Update only those records that are associated with a single specified RTO are included for search and update All other records are bypassed The single RTO is specified by the VIEW parameter or defaults to the RTO that occurs first within the SDO To avoid confusion over which RTO is being used the dialog window makes user specification of a VIEW argument mandatory when USING is enabled SDOs are generated using the SDE CREATE STRUCTURE CLI command usually from an existing COBOL or PL1 copy book that is associated with the file data For more information on SDE and edit of data sets containing structured data please refer to the CBLi SDE Manual 2009 07 20 16 03 29 CBL Interactive CBLi 91 Utility Windows FSU File Search Update Window Menu Items Run PF4 Select this item or hit PF4 to begin immediate execution of FSU engine using the parameters entered by the user GenerateCLI PF2 Select
265. of the record data VERIFY provides the user with the opportunity to execute a dry run to examine the FSUUNDO output report for any errors before proceeding with an execution for UPDATE It is strongly recommended that FSUUNDO is executed with VERIFY prior to performing a run for UPDATE Use of VERIFY will be indicated at the start and end of the FSUUNDO report with the additional record beginning Verify Only 2009 07 20 16 03 29 CBL Interactive CBLi 102 Utility Windows FSUUNDO UPDATE will update records in the FSU reported data sets so undoing the changes made by the FSU execution Default is VERIFY TERSE EXTENDED Specifies whether FSUUNDO is to output a brief TERSE or verbose EXTENDED report In a terse report output data sets or PDS E members that have been updated without error are represented by a single report line and data sets that have already been updated by a previous FSUUNDO run are not reported However more detailed report output is generated if unexpected data is found and so an error condition flagged Extended report output will generate output for every successful or unsuccessful record update See FSUUNDO Report Output for more details Default is TERSE DIAGNOSE Required only if a SELCOPY run time error occurs during execution of FSUUNDO DIAGNOSE will remove the SELCOPY NOPRINT option and so write diagnostic report information to SYSPRINT If executing with parameter FOREGROUND the SYSPRINT outpu
266. omplete the changes to the control file should be saved before executing RERUN to begin debugging the new SELCOPY statements If the SELCOPY control fileid does not already exist then for MVS systems the Allocate NonVSAM dialog will be opened before the save is actioned When SELCOPY Interactive starts the Execute SELCOPY main window is opened together with a CBLe edit view for the control statement SYSIN SYSIPT input If the SYSIN SYSIPT file name was specified as an explicit fileid DSN which is not locked ENQ d by another process and the user has sufficient authority the file is edited Read Write Where the SYSIN SYSIPT input file name was specified as a previously allocated filename DD FILEDEF DLBL then the data is edited Read Only The SELCOPY program is then executed and stopped following control statement analysis but before actioning the first executable statement The user may then begin debugging and stepping through the statements Note that interactive execution of SELCOPY using statement stepping and or break points is not supported if the SELCOPY control file contains the SELCOPY option NOPRINT NOP or NOPCTL to suppress print of the SELCOPY control statements If any of these options are specified prior to the first control statement then the job will run to completion without stopping Any required SELCOPY input or output files must be allocated before execution of SELCOPY Interactive This excludes SYSIN and SYSPRINT which are
267. or MVS the Dataset parameter is the DSN of a PDS E library to be searched which may optionally include a member name mask to identify a subset of members to be searched 2009 07 20 16 03 29 CBL Interactive CBLi 88 Utility Windows File Search Window A member name mask supports the following wild cards A single asterisk represents an entire member name or zero or more characters within a member name mask oe A single percent sign represents exactly one character within a member name mask Up to 8 percent signs can be specified in each member name mask If specified the member name mask must immediately follow the PDS E DSN and be enclosed in parentheses A member name mask that is less than 8 characters in length and does not contain an asterisk wild card will have a trailing wild card automatically appended e g To search all members of CBP PGMLIB whose names start CBLA CBL PGMLIB CBLA 0 For VSE the Dataset parameter is the name of the LIBR library and sub library to be searched The sub library name member name and member type may include the wild card to represent zero or more characters e g To search all members of OEM2 CBL OEM2 CBL 0 For CMS the Dataset parameter is a CMS fileid mask in standard CMS format denoting the files to be searched The file name file type and file mode may each include the wild card to represent zero or more characters e g To search all EXEC fil
268. ow No translation Translate as EBCD a Translate as ASCI Show address Hide address word per words per words per words per Hexadecimal offsets Decimal positions Figure 80 Storage Window Popup The mark against items in the menu identifies the current status of the storage display window No translation Translate as EBCDIC Translate as ASCII Defines the interpretation of the hexadecimal data in the character field i e ASCII or EBCDIC If No translation is selected then the character field is suppressed Show address Hide address Defines whether the field containing the address in storage of each row of data is displayed or suppressed 1 2 4 8 words per row Defines the number of words length 4 bytes are displayed in each row of data Hexadecimal offsets Decimal Positions Defines whether the numeric field displaying the displacement of each row of data relative to the first byte of data in the storage window is presented as a hexadecimal offset or as a decimal position 2009 07 20 16 03 29 CBL Interactive CBLi 161 CBLi Command Line Interface SHOWPOPUPMENU e g row displayed as hexadecimal offset X 0000f0 is equivalent to decimal position 241 Close Closes the storage display window Parameters winname The name of the storage window for which the popup menu will apply If not supplied then the name of the window in which the command is issued via a command line or a function key
269. ow including SDE Edit Lie see Cory Interactive frame window is actually a CBLe frame window with additional features and characteristics specifically relating to SELCOPY execution These features are discussed in this section whereas details on CBLe frame window features may be found in the CBLe Text Edit documentation The SELCOPY Interactive Main window must always contain the Control Cards Output Listing and TRACE Windows Closing any of these windows will quit the SELCOPY main window and so end the Interactive session When a session is started these 3 child windows are automatically opened together with a work area storage window at fixed locations within the main window client area The position and size of each window have been pre determined so that the contents of each window are easily visible when used with terminals of width greater than 80 bytes Where the terminal of 106 of 34 Filas CBL DIST CBLI HELP hteml wir Figure 76 Help window for SELCOPY Interactive 2009 07 20 16 03 29 CBL Interactive CBLi 116 CBLi Interactive Help CBLi Interactive Help Back Display the HTML page that occurs immediately prior to the current page in the stack of viewed pages Forward Display the HTML page that occurs immediately after the current page in the stack of viewed pages Home Display the defined Home page Close Close the current HTML browse window Refresh Refresh reload the current HTML page Find Open a dialog win
270. ow displays storage in the exactly same way as the Work Area Current Input Record window with the exception that the start address of the displayed data is a position in storage evaluated by a valid SELCOPY POS expression instead of position 1 of the work area Like the Work Area window the appearance of the POS expression window may be updated using the storage display window options popup menu The options available and methods used to display this menu are documented under the CBLi CLI command SHOWPOPUPMENU The POS expression is re evaluated at each break in the SELCOPY execution and the data at the new position displayed in the POS window The POS window title contains the POS expression and the evaluated position in the work area in parentheses If the evaluated position falls outside the work area then Not in WorkArea is displayed instead Any number of POS windows may be opened Pos MARR MARRE cWork rea POS Command 1 ESCSDSD6 ESD6C640 40404040 40404040 MAMA 17 40404040 40404040 40404040 40404040 33 40404040 40404040 40404040 40404040 49 40404040 40404040 40404040 40404040 65 40404040 40404040 40404040 40404040 Figure 12 POS Window inside work area 2009 07 20 16 03 29 CBL Interactive CBLi 20 Executing SELCOPY POS Expression Window Not in WorkaAres 1 FOFS61FO Fi61F1F9 40F1F77A F1F37AF1 FOSBF290 E6656495 35A25451 AS4OF1F4 A33540D1 51954451 994594040 40F2FOFO F961FOF1 F9940E692 TAFOF240 00009592 D000F226 E
271. ow in the CBLi window list PF10 Left Cursor Scroll the display to the left so that the current focus column becomes the last column of the display PF11 Right Cursor Scroll the display to the right so that the current focus column becomes the first column of the display PF12 Retrieve the last command issued and place it at the command line eE SOO OOU U UO PE C O 2009 07 20 16 03 29 CBL Interactive CBLi 8 Getting started with CBLi CBLi Main Menu Peis ft Issue command at the cursor position if not prefixed by lt less than otherwise place text on the command line Beaz Pd Pes td eeo Pd EA ee LO AA ooo O The CBLi TitleBars function keys are assigned to the following A E A EZ E eee Pro F12 AAA AAA o F13 OOO F14 pO F15 Ooo O E16 Oooo OSOS F17 A E18 Oooo SOS F19 OOOO F20 OO F21 OEA F22 pd F23 pO F24 Oooo O CBLi Main Menu The CBLi main menu is listed in the menu bar at the top of the CBLi main window You select a menu item by tabbing the cursor to the menu item and pressing the enter key Menu items can also be activated with commands entered on the command line The main menu consists of the following items Execute SELCOPY Open the Execute SELCOPY debug window debug Execute CBLVCAT Open the Execute CBLVCAT VCI window Open the CBLe text edit window DB2 Dynamic SQL Open the DB2 Dynamic SQL window 2009 07 20 16 03 29 CBL Interactive CBLi 9 Allocate NonVSAM Open the Alloca
272. ractive CBLi 156 CBLi Command Line Interface RIGHT Description Scroll the view of the data within the specified window right towards the last column of the displayable data The extent by which data is scrolled is determined by the CURSOR DATA HALF PAGE MAX or n_cols parameter which may be specified using any one of three methods determined in the following order of precedence 1 The scrolling command verb RIGHT and one of these scrolling parameters is explicitly specified on the command line 2 The scrolling parameter is specified on the command line and a PFKey assigned to RIGHT is actioned Note that the contents of a command line are appended to the command stream assigned to a PFKey when that PFKey is actioned 3 No scrolling parameter is specified so the current value of the Scroll gt field is used 4 No scrolling parameter is specified and no Scroll gt field is present so a defualt of one column is used List windows may contain fields that have KEY attribute YES defined in the Field Descriptor Block Fields with this attribute are always in view and may not be scrolled right or left If the cursor is positioned in a column belonging to this type of field then for LEFT CURSOR and RIGHT CURSOR the cursor is considered to be outside the display area All columns of data that do not belong to a KEY field are scrollable using LEFT and RIGHT By default this command is assigned to function key PF11 Parameters windownam
273. record data at the required record number within the data set or member does not match the record data as it was following the FSU update i e the data has been altered since the FSU update was executed This message is repeated for each mis matching record within a data set or member For both EXTENDED and TERSE output up to 100 bytes of the found record data followed by up to 100 bytes of the expected record data is also printed on the report lines that follow Return Code 112 is set and the error count is incremented by one for each missing record lt lt lt Already Undone gt gt gt This message is generated for EXTENDED report output only TERSE report output does not report instances where no record update is required The record data at the required record number within the data set or member matches the record data as it was prior to the FSU update i e the record has already been restored This message is repeated for each already restored record within a data set or member and the records already undone count is incremented by one Up to 100 bytes of the record data is also printed on the following report lines Record Data For EXPANDED output or where a data mismatch error has occurred record data is reported in the FSUUNDO output The data lines are preceded by a brief description of the record Where two contrasting records are to be displayed the description line also reports the position within the record data of
274. rectly using the VIEW command thus avoiding the Enqueue Failed window W EDTO1SE File CBL CMX SDE is being edited by user JGE Edit in Read Only mode OK Figure 79 Enqueue Failed Window Parameters fileid The fileid of the file to be viewed For MVS fileid may be the DSN of a sequential or VSAM data set the member name with or without the library DSN of a PDS PDSE member or an HFS file name If member name is specified without a library DSN the DSN of the library member in the current edit view is used For VSE fileid is the member name of a LIBR library in lib sublib mn mt format For CMS fileid is a CMS fileid Note that if fileid is not specified then the CBLIINI variable System CmdTEXT is used If System CmdTEXT has not been set then no action is taken PROFILE macroname The REXX edit macro to be executed as the profile when editing the file This macro overrides use of the default profile macro defined by the CBLIINI Edit option DEFPROFILE macroname and or the CBLe command SET DEFPROFILE default PROFILE The macro name must exist in a library within the CBLe macro path The PROFILE option only affects the profile for the file currently being added to the ring and does not affect the profile to be used when additional files are added to the edit ring later in your edit session NOPROFILE Suppresses use of a profile macro when editing the file The NOPROFILE option only affects the file currently b
275. rogram TRSMAIN to unpack a tersed data set Relevant INFILE and OUTFILE ddnames must be allocated before executing this command See the CBLe command ALLOCATE TASK MYPROG LIB A SYS4 USER ROUTINES X01323 Include the specified libraries at the start of the load library search chain then execute program MYPROG TOP Syntax gt gt TOP gt lt Description Use the TOP command to display the top lines of the data in the focus window The first line of the data becomes the first line of the display area UP Syntax gt gt UP dE a gt lt be windowname a CURSOR DATA HALF MAX PAGE n lines Description Scroll the view of the data within the specified window upwards towards the top of the displayable data The extent by which data is scrolled is determined by the CURSOR DATA HALF PAGE MAX or n_lines parameter which may be specified using any one of three methods determined in the following order of precedence 2009 07 20 16 03 29 CBL Interactive CBLi 168 CBLi Command Line Interface UP 1 The scrolling command verb UP and one of these scrolling parameters is explicitly specified on the command line 2 The scrolling parameter is specified on the command line and a PFKey assigned to UP is actioned Note that the contents of a command line are appended to the command stream assigned to a PFKey when that PFKey is actioned 3 No sc
276. rolling parameter is specified so the current value of the Scroll gt field is used 4 No scrolling parameter is specified and no Scroll gt field is present so a defualt of one line is used By default this command is assigned to function key PF7 Parameters windowname The window name of the window in which the display is to be scrolled If not supplied then the window in which the command is issued via a command line or function key is assumed CURSOR The line on which the cursor is positioned becomes the last line of the scrolled display If the cursor is positioned outside the display area or on the first line within the display area then UP PAGE is executed instead DATA Scroll up to display one page display window depth less one line of data The first line in the current display area becomes the last line of the scrolled display HALF Scroll up half a page of data The line that is half way down the page of data in the current display area becomes the last line of the scrolled display MAX Scroll up to display the first page of data The first displayable line becomes the first line of the scrolled display PAGE Scroll up to display the next whole page of data The line before the first line of the current display area becomes the last line of the scrolled display n_lines Scroll up a specified number of lines The line that is n_lines lines above the current line becomes the first line of the scrolled display VCAT Synta
277. s 2009 07 20 16 03 29 CBL Interactive CBLi 51 List Windows The Select Clause columname Name of the list window column to select Multiple column names must be separated by commas and or one or more blanks Column names may be specified in any order and any number of times Display all remaining column names that have not already been selected in their default order of display This is the same as ALL if no other column names are specified WHERE Clause Any valid WHERE clause used to filter list rows SORT Clause Any valid SORT clause used to sort list rows The Where Clause Syntax gt gt Where WHERE Clause A 3 333 3 e gt gt poo oo asconon A a pS SS ona aS gt lt SELECT Clause SORT Clause WHERE Clause pS A AND OR v asas pesssasess A a tsar Filter Expr pap gt NOT Filter Expr a Tiet COl gt Pa qn Epa SEPING gt gt gt to fos Saas Ho NX NOT Description Specified as a CLI command or as a parameter on SELECT or SORT the WHERE clause is used to restrict the rows displayed in the list Only those rows which satisfy the where clause are displayed in the view of the list Use of a WHERE clause is not cumulative and so will replace any prevailing filter of rows in the display It also resets any prevailing SOR
278. s is a catalog DSN Specifying a catalog DSN is unneccessary if an alias exists for the fileid mask high level qualifier HLQ in the master catalog In this case the appropriate catalog DSN will automatically be inserted in this field If the HLQ contains a wild card then all matching aliases are interrogated the required catalogs are searched and the last catalog searched placed in the Catalog gt fields Default is the master catalog Types gt Specify the catalog entry types required Default is all types One or more of the following types may be specified with no intervening blanks Bo o oO 0 MVS Generationdatagroup MVS Generation dataset MVS Generation data set VSAM PATH Alias A MWg O W ___________ lUsercatalog connector entry Ls Tape volume catalog library entry MVS Tape volume catalog volume entry Prefix Line Commands The following prefix line commands are available Command blank Prefix line command M if entry is a PDS PDSE library prefix line command E otherwise The ENTER key must be pressed with the cursor on the line containing the Open the CBLe text editor to to perform SDATA BROWSE on the entry Copy the entry Delete the entry User will be prompted to verify the deletion Open the CBLe text editor to edit this entry Open the FSU File Search Update Window to perform an advanced search and optionally update the contents of the entry FO Open an SDE view to di
279. s is required then use the GenerateCLI PF2 menu bar item to edit the FSU CLI command and make the relevant additions In order to be include Start Col and End Col in the FSU operation the fields must also be enabled by entering in the activation field End Col Specifies the end position or field column within the input records beyond which no part of the change search string will be found Only positions or field columns between the Start Col and End Col will be searched Record data in positions or columns following the end column is not searched and so is unaffected by the CHANGE condition 2009 07 20 16 03 29 CBL Interactive CBLi 95 Utility Windows FSU File Search Update Window SELECT WHERE USING oF format of the value entered in this field i e position or field reference must match that entered for the Start ol field If no End Col is entered then the default is the Start Col entry so defining a search range width of 1 position or field column Prefix Suffix Word If the condition is to include one of the parameters PREFIX SUFFIX or WORD then enter in the appropriate parameter field Note that these fields are mutually exclusive Definitions of PREFIX SUFFIX and WORD are the same as for FIND If none of these fields are selected the CHANGE search string may be found anywhere within the data being searched Immediate UPDATE If changes are to be actioned and so update all data sets in which a c
280. s parameter is placed in the DB2 Subsystem gt field of the Dynamic SQL window Default is that defined by the CBLIINI option DB2 SSN otherwise the sub system name specified in the DB2SubSys field of the CBLNAME load module is used PLAN p1an_name The SELCOPY DB2 plan name which has been bound to the DB2 sub system This parameter is placed in the Plan gt field of the Dynamic SQL window Default is that defined by the CBLIINI option DB2 Plan otherwise the plan name specified in the DB2Plan field of the CBLNAME load module is used LIMIT n_rows Limit the number of rows to be displayed in the Dynamic SQL window following a SELECT transaction Once the limit threshold has been reached a pop up message window is displayed and no further attempt is made to retrieve selected rows of data The n_rows value is placed in the Select Limit gt field of the Dynamic SQL window The default limit is that defined by the CBLiINI option DB2 SelectLimit otherwise no limit is implied EXEC IMMEDIATE DELAY Determine whether the SQL command is to be executed immediately when the Dynamic SQL window is opened or simply placed on the SQL Statement command line The default is IMMEDIATE COMMIT YES NO Determine whether a COMMIT is to be automatically issued following every transaction AutoCommit If COMMIT NO then the user should issue COMMIT manually to commit any changes made to the data A commit is executed automatical
281. se gt Caselgn gt gt Specify the absolute or relative HFS path name The name portion of the HFS path is the character string at the end of the path that follows the last slash of the fileid or is the entire path name if is not specified The following wild cards may only be specified within the name portion of the HFS path A single asterisk represents zero or more characters A single percent sign represents a single character Enter YES to recursively list the contents of all sub directories found within the HFS path specification Default is NO Enter YES to bypass case sensitivity for the name portion of the specified HFS path Default is NO Prefix Line Commands The following prefix line commands are available 2009 07 2 0 16 03 29 CBL Interactive CBLi 82 List Windows List HFS Path Command blank Perform the default action for the list entry on which the cursor is positioned when lt Enter gt is pressed Default action depends on the list entry as follows e For a directory entry or a symbolic link to a directory open a new List HFS list window to display the the contents of the directory e For all other entries a CBLe text editor view is opened to edit the data Equivalent to prefix command E Open the CBLe text editor to to perform SDATA BROWSE on the entry Delete the entry file link or directory User will be prompted to verify the deletion Open a CBLe text editor view
282. splay browse the entry as output from the FSU File Search Update Window F Open the File Search window for the entry Open an IDCAMS Command window and issue an IDCAMS LISTCAT for the entry T jm T g n 2009 07 20 16 03 29 CBL Interactive CBLi 67 List Windows List Dataset Details la llLstdatasetenqueues major name SYSDSN forthisentry R Rename the entry S E Open the SDE BROWSE EDIT Dialog Window to browse or edit the entry s data within a Structured Data Environment window view Open an Execute CBLVCAT window and issue a LISTVCAT TUNE DEFINE operation for the entry UT Opens the general file utilities menu to ultimately generate specific line commands in a temporary CMX file Open the CBLe text editor to View edit read only this entry VC Open an Execute CBLVCAT window and issue a LISTVCAT operation for the entry Perform a compress of an MVS PDS library to reclaim disk space occupied by replaced back level members This action performs an IEBCOPY to itself No action is taken for PDSE entries however the IEBCOPY dialog is opened with an error message if executed against any non PDS E Open the volume statistics window for the volume containing the entry Open a drop down menu containing valid prefix command functions for the list window entry Position the cursor on the required function and hit lt Enter gt to action the command Assigned to PF4 by default Open a new window containing a zoomed vertic
283. ssSseee gt lt o LISTDATASET entry gt Catalog types t Description For CMS only the LD and LC commands are synonyms for the FL command and so opens the File List window Refer to documentation for LC FL for syntax and parameter specification The LD command is not supported on VSE systems For MVS the LD List Dataset details command is used to open a Dataset List window and optionally list entries in the catalog together with the details of their geometry obtained either from the catalog or the VTOC This is a more detailed list than that generated by the LC command Where entry is identified as being an HFS path i e begins with or contains the HFS Path list window is opened instead The Dataset List window may also be opened via the List menu of the CBLi main window menu bar Parameters entry Specifies the fileid mask used to identify required catalog entries The fileid mask represents a DSN mask that supports the following wild cards A single asterisk indicates that either a qualifier or one or more characters within a qualifier can occupy that position An asterisk can precede or follow a set of characters A double asterisk indicates that zero or more qualifiers can occupy that position A double asterisk cannot precede or follow any characters it must be preceded or followed by either a dot or a blank A single percent sig
284. t command prompt ready for edit and submission by the user Track expression Invoke the SDBTRACK edit macro which issues the SELCOPY Interactive CLI command TRACK expr to start or stop tracking a position in storage referenced by the POS expression Track entries exist for POS expressions determined as for Show Pos If a Track entry is selected another popup menu is opened prompting the user to select the colour to be used for tracking this POS expression or alternatively to turn off tracking for this POS expression Colour Turquoise Yellow White Figure 19 SELCOPY TRACK Colour Popup Menu Window 2009 07 20 16 03 29 CBL Interactive CBLi 23 Executing SELCOPY Point and Shoot Popup Menu Track expression lt edit gt Same as the Track entry but instead the generated SDBTRACK expression macro invocation is placed at the edit command prompt ready for edit and submission by the user Track List Open a popup menu displaying a list of all POS expressions that are being tracked The user can then select an entry to switch off tracking for that POS expression or select All to switch off tracking of all the POS expression entries BARR green GARR MARRE blue LRECL Z0 pink Figure 20 SELCOPY TRACK List Popup Window Break lt toggle gt Toggle a break point on and off for the SELCOPY operation at the focus position Window Layout Invoke the SDBWINX edit macro which opens a popup menu enabling the user to control
285. t displays all open windows and their associated window names including MDI window names Window Class All the windows defined by a CBL3270 application are members of a window class A window class represents a set of windows with the same behaviour and appearance Window classes are identified by a 1 to 8 character name CBL3270 uses the window class name to associate a processing module called the Window Procedure with the window All windows in the same class are managed by the same window procedure The window procedure is called by CBL3270 whenever an event occurs which affects the window It is the window procedure s responsibility to 1 Paint the window client area 2 Process any data entered into the window 3 Respond to any commands issued from the window s menu or command line Window List The Window List window may be opened via the following e Select Window from the CBLi Main Menu e Enter the CBLi command WINDOWLIST on the command line of any window The Window List window displays all open windows and their associated window names and allows the user to place focus on a specific window The ENTER key should be pressed with the cursor on the line containing the required window The hierarchy of parent child windows is illustrated by indentation of the entries in the list 2009 07 20 16 03 29 CBL Interactive CBLi 5 Getting started with CBLi Window List NECE A A A E W CIWMAIN CBLi for TSO 1 6B Build
286. t is automatically displayed in a CBLe edit view with a DSN equal to the FSU output report DSN but with the additional low level qualifier LIST e g NBJ2 DEV FSU D2008346 T162607 LIST FSUUNDO Report Output Report output is generated on every execution of FSUUNDO If FSUUNDO is executed with parameter BACKGROUND JCL to generate JCL output then the output report is written to SYSPRINT when the job is submitted By default SYSPRINT is allocated to SYSOUT Furthermore if DIAGNOSE parameter was specified then the SYSPRINT output will also contain diagnostic information for the SELCOPY run before and after the printed report output If FSUUNDO is executed with parameter FOREGROUND to execute in TSO then an output report data set is opened in a CBLe edit view and report records are inserted The DSN of this data set is equal to the FSU report DSN with the additional low level qualifier UNDOV for VERIFY reports or UNDO for UPDATE reports e g NBJ2 DEV FSU D2008346 T162607 UNDO If this data set already exists then the report records will be appended to the existing report data and the edit display positioned at the start of the latest report output On exit of this data set the user will be prompted to save and if necessary allocate the data set with suitable space attributes Report Fields Dataset The up to 44 character DSN of the data set or PDS E processed Member For PDS E libraries only the name of the member bein
287. tatement in the Control Card window By default BREAKPOINT is assigned to PFO6 If a break point is set at a particular control statement then processing will be paused on the next attempt to execute that statement Any number of concurrent break points may be active during job execution Parameters BREAKPOINT has no parameters Description Use the EOJ command to force SELCOPY to immediately execute a GOTO EOJ operation The SELCOPY job will end without processing any further control statements and will generate its output summary in the SYSPRINT window Parameters EOJ has no parameters Description Use the GO command to continue processing of the control statements By default GO is assigned to PF04 Processing will continue until a break point or End of Job is encountered at which point processing is paused or stopped respectively Parameters GO has no parameters 2009 07 20 16 03 29 CBL Interactive CBLi 25 Executing SELCOPY RERUN Syntax gt gt 4 RETuUn 4 25 2 222 2 gt gt lt RR Description GO Use the RERUN command to Re Run the job from the beginning No further statements will be executed from the existing job run Storage is cleared and values and break points set during control statement analysis are re initialised All existing breakpoints are cleared Parameters RERUN has no parameters STEPINTO Syntax Description Use the STEPINTO comman
288. te List HFS Path is not supported for CMS or VSE View Back Forward FDB Edit Refresh Help Command gt SG mou Ly Csr HFS Path gt etc Recurse gt NO Caselgn gt NO lt Name T SzL Modified Permission Path Owner hfsc f a 2885 06403 IL A RS ASS ADCD etc START2 booksru d 8192 19997 05712 17 437 oe FUE XP ADCD etc START2 bpa d 8192 19997 01719 165108184 FPUXF xP X ADCD etc 2134 SS cmx d 8192 1999 81 19 16 02 04 ruxer xr x ADCD etc 2134 DE eshe Mis Pu lla f 1119 2008706723 15 21141 ruxPuxr x ADCD etc NBJ _ dce d 8192 1999 08 24 14 47 53 rwxr xr x ADCD etc 2134 dts d 8192 1999708724 14 47 53 PruxPr xr x ZADCDZetc 2134 __ hostsx k 34 2005 05 12 23 16 38 rwxrwxrwx ZADCD etc START2 httpd conf f 127910 2000 05 03 14 09 04 rwxr xr x ADCD etc START2 httpd envvars f ela Ae kaera lo A AMO SO 2 ADCD etc STARTZ ES ics pics conf f Aller AA Ela She a la AMO oe ADCD etc START2 __ imoisinf f AS bei alec mkA l pth eb E ZADCD etc START2 _ inetd conf F 1585 a Re ISS tale by A it ADCD etc STARTZ inmatad piad f 18 20893704727 BSS 26 12 AO SS S ADCD etc STARTZ Se imie OPE LONS f 2587 19997 10721 1898 52 50 gt gt ADCD etc START2 __ ioepdcf l 22 1999 10 23 22 43 24 rwxrwxrwx ZADCD etc START2 javelin conf f 1357ra RADA SATA VMS Vr US ey ADCD etc START2 Line 1 of 35 GaU s O1 Views 1 E Lect Name T Figure 53 HFS Path List window HFS Path Recur
289. te NonVSAM dialog Getting started with CBLi Storage Display Window T Window Window Listin swaptist Displayed only if ISPF is the 3270 screen manager Execute ISPF SWAPLIST p command Hep f Open the help top level window Storage Display Window Storage display windows provide a view of an area of storage in dump format Supported items that utilise storage diaplay windows are e CBLNAME Window e SELCOPY Interactive Workarea windows e SELCOPY Interactive POS windows e CBLe HEX Windows Window Display Format The length of storage data displayed may be restricted by the type of window opened e g The amount of data displayed in a CBLe HEX window is restricted to be the length of the focus line Each row of a storage display window has the following format Field Width Hex Address in storage of the displayed data Displacement from the start address of the displayed data 8 16 32 or 64 Hex Data in storage in hexadecimal format 4 8 16 or 32 bytes depending upon window size 8 Data in storage in character format Field width adjusts automatically to match hexadecimal display width 2009 07 20 16 03 29 CBL Interactive CBLi i Z l A o o e mM 10 Getting started with CBLi Storage Display Window The format of the display may be updated using the options popup menu which may be opened using the SHOWPOPUPMENU command or via the system menu button of the storage displ
290. te table Parameters ttref A colour highlight style pair referencing a cell in the translate table ttval A colour highlight style pair to be inserted into the translate table cell referenced by ttref Where CBLi uses the ttref colour highlight style combination the ttval colour highlight style is displayed instead Examples SETCOLOUR BD BR Blue Default will be displayed as Blue REVVideo SC RR YB PD TU Red REVVideo will be displayed as Yellow Blink and Pink Default will be displayed as Turquoise Underline 2009 07 20 16 03 29 CBL Interactive CBLi 160 CBLi Command Line Interface SETFOCUS SETFOCUS Syntax gt gt SETFOCUS gt lt gt SE e windowname Description Use the SETFOCUS command to change the focus window Parameters windowname The name of the window to receive the focus If not supplied then the window in which the command is issued via a command line or function key is assumed SHOWPOPUPMENU Syntax gt gt SHOWPOPUPMENU EA A Description The SHOWPOPUPMENU command displays the options popup menu for the current storage display window Storage display windows include SELCOPY Interactive Work Area and POS windows CBLe Hex display windows and the CBLNAME window By default the SHOWPOPUPMENU command is assigned to PF5 in storage display windows The options popup menu may also be opened via the system menu button of the storage display wind
291. ter field then string is treated as a character string with blank padding on the right Check the field Type in the FDB to determine whether the field contains numeric or character data If the data type of the test value is not compatible with ist_co then an error will be returned NOT The symbols tilde not sign and Y backslash represent the logical NOT operator and reverses the TRUE or FALSE condition established by the comparison operator lt op gt lt op gt Comparison operator specified as one of the following Equals o rot Equal S AAA AAA Less than or equals ooo y O Less than or equals Greater than or equals Contains This operator applies to character columns only and returns TRUE if string is a sub string of list_col Begins This operator applies to character columns only and returns TRUE if string is a sub string at the start of list_col string The string argument to be tested against the contents of ist_col string is always case insensitive and need only be enclosed in apostrophes or quotation marks if it is the same as a list column heading or if it contains any of the comparison operators or blanks SELECT Clause Any valid SELECT clause used to select column headers SORT Clause Any valid SORT clause used to sort list rows Example where coll A and col2 lt lt C or col3 gt 4 List only those rows for which col1 is equal to A and either col2 contai
292. terrogated the required catalogs are searched and the last catalog searched placed in the Catalog gt fields For VSE systems this is a disk label assigned to the VSAM catalog for which entries are to be listed If no catalog file label is specified the Catalog List window displays all user catalogs cataloged in the master catalog Default is the master catalog Types gt Specify the catalog entry types required Default is all types One or more of the following types may be specified with no intervening blanks a hon VSAM or VSAM SAM data set MVS Generation data group Alternate Index MVS Generation data set Boo how PATH Kip u Jusercatalog connector entry MVS Tape volume catalog library entry MVS Tape volume catalog volume entry Prefix Line Commands For MVS systems the following prefix line commands are available blank Prefix line command M if entry is a PDS PDSE library prefix line command E otherwise The ENTER key pressed with the cursor on the line containing the PDS Open the CBLe text editor to to perform SDATA BROWSE on the entry Copy the entry 2009 07 20 16 03 29 CBL Interactive CBLi 62 List Windows List Catalog Entries lo Delete the entry User will be prompted to verify the deletion Open the CBLe text editor to edit this entry Open the FSU File Search Update Window to perform an advanced search and optionally update the contents of the entry
293. the command Assigned to PF4 by default Open a new window containing a zoomed vertical display of the entry s fields Particularly useful for list windows that have a large number of displayed columns Assigned to PF2 by default For VSE systems the following prefix line commands are available 2009 07 20 16 03 29 CBL Interactive CBLi 89 Utility Windows File Search Window p____ Delete the entry User will be prompted to verify the deletion Submit the entry to batch Executes the CBLe CLI SUBMIT command using the entry name as input A CBLe frame window must be active for this operation to suceed Open a drop down menu containing valid prefix command functions for the list window entry Position the cursor on the required function and hit lt Enter gt to action the command Assigned to PF4 by default Open a new window containing a zoomed vertical display of the entry s fields Particularly useful for list windows that have a large number of displayed columns Assigned to PF2 by default Columns Displayed The data displayed is ALPair Member i HitNo int Hitmumber File record D oO Q O o gt Fr U 2 File Search 8 Update Utility File Search amp Update is a more advanced utility than File Search utility which supports only a single string search on members of a single PDS E library There is often a requirement to locate and optionally change strings of data in multiple data sets and
294. the first difference found Furthermore if this difference occurs beyond the record description and within the first 100 bytes a marker gt lt is positioned above the mis matching character The record data follows the description line for a length equal to the lesser of the record length value and 100 The data is displayed in both character and vertical hexadecimal notation Equivalent to SELCOPY s TYPE B print output A scale line is written following the record data Record Found lst Diff at Pos 049 gt lt EDTFCLRO 0720 MEMFLSTE gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt AZZElement Test 3 117ADA10 117BFAC8 00000 CCECCDDF4FFFF4DCDCDEEC46666666666CEEC98989A44444E8AA44444444444444444444444F4FFECCCEF4FFFCCCCFAFFFFE 54363390007200454632350EEEEEEEEEE1995354553000003523000000000000000000000003011714110011726138000000 Record Expected EDTFCLRO 0720 MEMFLSTE gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt AZZElement 3 117ADA10 117BFAC8 00000 CCECCDDF 4FFFF4DCDCDEEC46666666666CEEC98989A44444444444444444444444444444444F4FFECCCFFAFFFCCCCFAFFFEF 54363390007200454632350EEEEEEEEEE1995354553000000000000000000000000000000003011714110011726138000000 PR O NN NN ES E EE NA RN Figure 61 Record Data Output Summary Block The summary block reports the totals of 1 Records undone 2 Records already undone 3 Files updated 4 Errors Where FSUUNDO errors have occured the Errors total has the additional eye catcher following 2009 07 20
295. the message line Otherwise output is displayed in a popup message window USS GETCWD is equivalent to the USS shell command PWD 2009 07 20 16 03 29 CBL Interactive CBLi 173 USS commands USS GETCWD Parameters USS GETCWD has no parameters USS LINK Syntax Description Create a hard link to an existing HFS file USS LINK is equivalent to the USS shell command LINK Parameters old_hfs_path An HFS path name representing a file This may be the HFS file name another hard link or a symbolic link If old_hfs_path is a symbolic link a hard link is created to the file that results from resolving the symbolic link new_hfs_path The HFS path name of the new hard link to the file data USS MKDIR Syntax gt gt USS MKDIR hfs_path gt lt Description Create a new HFS directory USS MKDIR is equivalent to the USS shell command MKDIR but without the additional options Parameters hfs_path An HFS path name representing a directory USS REALPATH Syntax Description Display the absolute HFS path name for the specified relative HFS path name 2009 07 20 16 03 29 CBL Interactive CBLi 174 USS commands USS REALPATH Parameters hfs_path Any HFS path name USS RENAME Syntax gt gt USS RENAME lt old_hfs_path new_hfs_path gt lt Description Rename an existing HFS file hard link symbolic link or directory name USS RENA
296. the same functionality when executing as a VTAM application as it does when running under TSO Therefore the CBLIVTAM module and VTAM applid may be installed on a recovery volume to perform data editing data set allocation and system navigation if ISPF is unavailable Couple this with SELCOPY which is usually installed in the same load library as CBLi the systems programmer is provided with a powerful set of tools to aid the data recovery process General Functionality CBLi allows the user to generate operate on and manipulate data within windows that may contain e DASD Volume lists e VTOC Data set and member lists e Interactive SELCOPY execution e Interactive CBLVCAT execution e CBLe windowed text editor e DB2 SQL interface e Sequential file or VSAM object definition CBLi Environment CBLi provides a full screen 3270 interface which supports the following windows style features e Drop down and popup menus e Resizable and movable windows e Multiple overlapped views of file and volume lists e Multiple overlapped Interactive SELCOPY execution windows e Multiple overlapped Interactive CBLVCAT execution windows e Access to services such as job submission and the ISPF or CMS editor 2009 07 20 16 03 29 CBL Interactive CBLi 1 Getting started with CBLi 1 Starting the CBLi program 2 Window Concepts 3 CBLi Main Window 4 Security Considerations 5 CBLi Clipboard Starting the CBLi program Befor
297. the search string within the entire width of selected record data and is not subject to the position within that record of a previous successful FIND or CHANGE operation Where the length of the search string is different to that of the replace string then the following occurs If the replace string length is greater than the search string length then words to the right of the replaced string will be shifted right with multiple consecutive blanks being absorbed to leave at least one blank between each word If the search string length is greater than the replace string length then text to the right of the replaced string will be shifted left However if more than one blank exists before a word to the right of the replaced string then additional blanks are inserted to maintain that word s position in the record 2009 07 20 16 03 29 CBL Interactive CBLi 134 CBLi Command Line Interface FSU FSU performs an update in place for a data set record altered by a CHANGE operation Therefore any change that would result in a change to the record s length will fail For Structured File Search any fields referenced by field name or field reference number within a change_parms combination must exist within the record type specified by the VIEW parameter or default record type if VIEW is not specified Similarly referenced fields must also exist within the subset of fields specified by the SELECT parameter CHANGE is mandatory if FIND an
298. then key in JCLCMX from the edit command line to generate command files containing ALLOC commands that correspond to the DD statements CALL commands that correspond to EXEC statements and SELCOPY commands that correspond to EXEC PGM SELCOPY statements A control file name containing the SELCOPY source statements must be provided as SYSIN SYSIPT input to the SELCOPY Interactive window either as a parameter on the SELCOPY command or via the Run SELCOPY dialog window The control file may be specified as a complete fileid DSN or as a previously allocated filename DD FILEDEF DLBL which may be a concatenation of data sets e g selcopy ctl cbl ssc ctl ssdemo01 Enter SELCOPY run command parameters CtlFile gt cbl ssc ctl ssdemoDi1 ArgString gt PamName gt SELCOPY SELCOPY load module name will override INI file LoadLib gt gt gt IMS parameters PSBName gt IMSId gt BMP gt Y N AGN gt Hel Figure 4 Run SELCOPY Dialog Window If the specified control file is empty or does not yet exist then SELCOPY Interactive opens an empty SYSIN SYSIPT CBLe text edit view and on performing its initial control statement analysis reports ERROR 14 NO INPUT FILE in the SYSPRINT SYSLST view with pop up message SDB002E SELCOPY has ended with control card errors Return Code 52 Having selected OK to continue the user may proceed by adding SELCOPY control statement records to the control file SYSIN SYSIPT window When c
299. tion Use the FS command to open the File Search Window and optionally perform a file search The File Search window may also be opened via the Utilities menu of the CBLi main window menu bar Parameters filemask The file mask of the MVS PDS and member the VSE LIBR lib sublib and member or the CMS file name type and mode to be searched This parameter is placed in the Dataset field of the File Search window string The search string This parameter is placed in the Search String field of the File Search window Examples FS Open the File Search window with both the Dataset and Search String fields left blank FS CBL Q6930 JCL Vv PGM CBLV Search PDS members beginning VV for string PGM CBLV 2009 07 20 16 03 29 CBL Interactive CBLi 132 CBLi Command Line Interface FS FS PRD2 CBL htm1L lt H1 gt Search VSE PRD2 CBL library members of type HTML for string lt H1 gt FS EXEC A SELCOPY Search CMS EXEC files on the A minidisk for string SELCOPY Syntax 1 gt gt FSU t 3 ses o a Ss ea gt pol po ToS SSS A SDE Opts HFS Opts V INPut fileid_mask t SHS toss SSeS SSS Sea SS ee SS ee A O gt 3 2 panacee AND WHere where clause 2 Vv Find find paras t 4 See OR S Vv find pares Y A 4 gt lt 3 faasa AND NO
300. tly one character within the volume mask e g Z9DB9 XV3 ES 5 DSN Mask The data set name mask to be used to identify data sets to be searched Not applicable to HFS files A DSN mask is mandatory if a Fileid Mask is not specified A pre allocated DDNAME may be specified in the DSN mask field to represent one or more concatenated data set and or library All sequential VSAM and PDS E data sets that match a specified DSN mask are selected for input If one of these data sets is a PDS E library then all members of that library will be searched DSN mask must not be enclosed in quotes TSO prefix is not used DSN mask supports wild card characters as follow A single asterisk represents a DSN qualifier or zero or more characters within a DSN qualifier e g e g DEV CBLINS JCL DEV CBLINS TEST ISP LIB DEV CBLINS Double asterisk represents zero or more qualifiers within a DSN Double asterisk must be preceded or followed by either a dot period or a blank It cannot precede or follow an alphanumeric character e g DEV CBLINS DEV CBLINS CBLE ry g A single percent sign represents exactly one character other than dot period within a DSN qualifier e g DEV CBLINS TEST0 JCL DEV CBLI TEST06 CBLI Member Mask Optionally specify one or more PDS E member name mask In order to restrict the search to PDS E libraries and so exclude any no
301. to repeat the search for the remaining list entries FIND string is only valid if the first column in the display is defined as being a character key field Check the FDB for Type Char and Key Yes Note that key fields area highlighted and remain at a fixed position within the display when scrolling left and right If multiple key field columns exist within the list then changing the order of the key fields using a SELECT clause will allow the user to execute FIND RFIND on the contents of an alternate key field column Parameters string A character search string used in the compare against data within fields in the first column of the display LOCATE Command Syntax gt gt Locate string SS gt lt Description Starting at the first entry and proceding downwards LOCATE will compare string against data at the start of each field in the the first column of the display until either a match is found or the field data is greater than string If the strings are equal then the display is scrolled so that this list entry becomes the first row in the display Otherwise if the list entry field data is greater than string the display is scrolled so that the first row in the display is that which immediately precedes this list entry LOCATE string is appropriate only if the first list column is in ascending sort order and is only valid if the first column in the display is defined as being a character key field Check th
302. trol Cards Output Listing trace and log windows This allows the user to edit the data in these windows and to issue CBLe commands and macros such as ALL LOCATE CHANGE and SAVE In addition to the standard SELCOPY Interactive windows the user can open a CBLe edit view for any other file e g the input data sets etc thus giving SELCOPY Interactive all the features provided by the CBLe text editor Also if MDILIST is ON default any LIST window opened from a SELCOPY Interactive child window will itself be a child window of SELCOPY Interactive By default PF9 is assigned to CBLi CLI command MDINext and is used to pass focus between the SELCOPY Interactive child windows SYSIN Window The SYSIN window is opened automatically when SELCOPY Interactive is started It may also be opened via the following e Select Control Cards from the View menu in the SELCOPY Main Menu e Enter the SELCOPY Interactive CLI command WINDOW CTL The SYSIN window is an edit view that contains the control statement source file as required for execution of SELCOPY Interactive This window highlights the current operation and allows the user to set and unset break points By default SELCOPY Interactive attempts to edit the SYSIN file read write If this is not possible the user is prompted to continue the session with the file edited in read only mode In either case the edit profile macro is executed when the file is loaded If the CBL supplied macro PROFIL
303. umns respectively e g To determine the number of rows columns of text that would be displayed on resizing a CBLe edit view deduct 2 from the depth value title bar command line and if SCALE is set on deduct an extra 1 for the scale line If PREFIX is set on deduct 6 columns from the width value for the prefix area The current position of the window is unchanged following a SIZEWINDOW command A window may also be resized by dragging the border of the window Parameters windowname The window name of the window to be resized If not supplied then the window in which the command is issued via a command line or function key is assumed TO Indicate that an absolute depth and or width follows BY Indicate that a relative depth and or width follows D n Define the window depth change If absolute n must be a positive integer The number of rows displayed is equal to n and the bottom border of the window is raised or lowered accordingly If relative n is an integer that may be prefixed by plus or minus to indicate a positive or negative adjustment to the number of rows displayed The number of rows displayed is increased or decreased by n rows and the bottom border of the window is raised or lowered accordingly There is no default value for n If omitted the depth is unchanged W m Define the window width change If absolute m must be a positive integer The number of columns displayed is equal to m and the right border
304. unctions for the list window entry Position the cursor on the required function and hit lt Enter gt to action the command Assigned to PF4 by default Open a new window containing a zoomed vertical display of the entry s fields Particularly useful for list windows that have a large number of displayed columns Assigned to PF2 by default For VSE systems the following prefix line commands are available when a list of VSE sublibrary members is displayed Command blank Prefix line command E The ENTER key must be pressed with the cursor on the line containing the member Delete the entry User will be prompted to verify the deletion Open the CBLe text editor to edit this entry Open the File Search window to search the contents of this entry Not supported for VSE LIBR library entries Submit the entry to batch Executes the CBLe CLI SUBMIT command using the entry name as input A CBLe frame window must be active for this operation to suceed LOCK the member ooo Open a drop down menu containing valid prefix command functions for the list window entry Position the cursor on the required function and hit lt Enter gt to action the command Assigned to PF4 by default E FS U V Open a new window containing a zoomed vertical display of the entry s fields Particularly useful for list windows that have a large number of displayed columns Assigned to PF2 by default 2009 07 20 16 03 29 CBL Interactive CBLi 78
305. up to a total area of 16384 16K with a maximum width or depth of 255 This 16K area limit is imposed by the 14 bit address format of the 3270 data stream used by CBLi The 255 width or depth limit is the result of some components using just 1 byte to store these dimensions Most 3270 emulation software packages allow the user to configure a 3270 session to emulate hardware terminal models 2 3 4 5 having rows x columns screen sizes of 24x80 32x80 43x80 and 27x132 respectively Some 3270 emulators also support the ability to define non standard terminal sizes IBM DYNAMIC TN3270 terminals that allow users to obtain 3270 screen sizes with dimensions much larger than the standard hardware models Note To configure non standard screen sizes IBM DYNAMIC TN3270 terminal definitions must first be defined to VTAM and then made available to users via the TN3270 server Whenever possible users should use the largest screen size available to take full advantage of CBLi s ablility to display multiple overlapping windows containing a variety of data At CBL screen sizes of 62x160 are regularly used for TSO maximum supported by ISPF and screen sizes of up to 86x190 for CMS and VTAM MVS or VSE A selection of popular 3270 emulator packages have been installed at CBL to determine whether support is included for IBM DYNAMIC terminals as well as some other additional features considered useful for use with CBLi execution Keyboard macros etc The following
306. ut will be reported as an error Processing will continue with input of the next Hit record pair Records that have already been restored as a result of a previous execution of FSUUNDO UPDATE will be reported as a match and no error returned If SELCOPY ends with a return code other than 0 zero successful execution no error conditions or 112 errors condition s detected then re run with option DIAGNOSE to establish the cause of the SELCOPY error The most likely cause of an unxpected return code will be if a selection run time error RC 44 has occured Usually caused by an OPEN error for an input data set e g if an exclusive ENQ already exists for the data set In this event SELCOPY processing ends immediately and all data sets opened by SELCOPY are automatically closed 2009 07 20 16 03 29 CBL Interactive CBLi 101 Utility Windows FSUUNDO Syntax 1 Panel gt Verify Io gt gt FSUUNDO Ho ho do ho Ho gt fsurep Foreground Update Background tm Tero gt s 2222 2 o 2222 See SSeS se see gt lt I Extended Diagnose Notes 1 Parameters may be entered in any order Description Use the FSUUNDO command to restore records updated by a previous File Search amp Update run referenced by the specified FSU output report Record data belonging to an entry flagged as A After in the zT field o
307. ward FDB Edit Refresh Help Command gt File A SS A A gt SORT eS SeeES TimeStamp _ EIPLESA PROC AS Tire as Si 1 1997 06 04 16 00 HENFSHH H HNAMES Al 64 F 64 1 204 5 83 275 25 cvea djh tab Al 256 F 1 1 2000 04 07 13 24 _ hello MODULE Al 3704 Y 3 o MS t_umOdt MODULE Al 5144 Y 3 2 2006 07 25 17 58 _ A ADMP N AL 134 Y 24 1 2004 08 03 17 29 A MACRO Al 80 F 4497 98 2007 84 65 25769 ABC ZAP AS CIS 10 1 2004 03 30 16 18 __ ADDLBL JCL AS A Lar 2 2007 03 14 16 30 _ AM HIST AS a 16 ISSO SS Sits AMPMEML EXEC AS 64 Y 31 ak llo ol ebek hie __ AMPMEML EXECA Al 66 Y 31 dlls lolo rl __ AMSITE EXEC AS 64 Y 53 IAS STA __ AMSITE EXECA Al 66 Y 53 LA E era ___ AMUPDC EXEC AS 108 Y TLT L1 2002 02 14 15706 AMUPDC EXECA Al EA A 1 2006 09 06 17101 APEAYDET RUN Ai 30 Y TETS ae o SE ral SIE 818 a A is bys tere L Lews 1i select Ft em Figure 41 CMS File List window displaying all files on mini disk A File gt Specify the CMS fileid mask The fileid mask may consist of up to 3 qualifiers representing a filename filetype filemode combination where qualifiers are separated by one or more blanks or a dot period A single asterisk wild card may be used to represent an entire qualifier or zero or more characters at a particular position within the qualifier Wild card may be specified more that once anywhere within a qualifier men Default filemode qualifier is A default fi
308. window The LPA Modules window may also be opened via the System menu of the CBLi main window menu bar Note Not valid for CMS and VSE SYSMENU Syntax gt gt SYSMENU gt lt windowname 2009 07 20 16 03 29 CBL Interactive CBLi SYSCOMMAND 166 CBLi Command Line Interface SYSMENU Description Use the SYSMENU command to open the System Menu for the specified window The System Menu may also be opened via the System Menu button of a window Parameters windowname The window name of the window for which the system menu is to be opened If not supplied then the window in which the command is issued via a command line or function key is assumed SYSPGM Syntax gt gt SYSPGM gt lt Description Use the SYSPGM command to open the Loaded Programs window The Loaded Programs window may also be opened via the System menu item of the CBLi main window menu bar SYSSTOR Syntax gt gt SYSSTOR gt lt Description Use the SYSSTOR command to open the Storage Statistics window The Storage Statistics window may also be opened via the System menu of the CBLi main window menu bar SYSTASK Syntax gt gt SYSTASK gt lt Description Use the SYSTASK command to open the Task List window The Task List window may also be opened via the System menu of the CBLi main window menu bar Note Not implemented for CMS and VS
309. window including selecting sorting and filtering of row and column data and point and shoot sorting on column headers 2009 07 20 16 03 29 CBL Interactive CBLi 21 Executing SELCOPY Equates Window Equates H View Back Forward FOB Edit Refresh Help Command gt EQUName EQUValue INi CBL SSC CTL CBL SSC CTL FS0 UNM UNML 100 1 10 19800 TOT TOTL MARR MARRL 000 PDSIN PDSINL MAT MATL 4 Figure 15 SELCOPY EQUates Window Columns Displayed EQUName EQUValue Equated value PCB Window The PCB window may be opened via the following e Select PCB from the View menu in the SELCOPY Main Menu e Enter the SELCOPY Interactive CLI command WINDOW PCB This window shows the PCB which was used to execute the most recent IMS call The PCB displayed will change if different PCBs are used in the SELCOPY program Psb DFSSAMOS3 PSBName PCES DBDName Segment Status 40404040 40404040 Figure 16 SELCOPY PCB Window TRACE Window The TRACE window is opened automatically when SELCOPY Interactive is started It may also be opened via the following e Select Execution trace from the View menu in the SELCOPY Main Menu e Enter the SELCOPY Interactive CLI command WINDOW TRACE The TRACE window is a CBLe edit view that contains all the SELCOPY control statements at which processing has been stopped i e a break point was set and encountered Each logged statement begins with the statement s s
310. wner 1D d in Group p Changed File Stat Chg Timestamp 2009 07 20 16 03 29 CBL Interactive CBLi 83 OQ Mm iw cz T v JN a lo N L x 2 m List Windows List HFS Path ole Opaque attributeflags 7 2009 07 20 16 03 29 CBL Interactive CBLi 84 List Windows List HFS Path Ctime Micro_Seconds SecLabel Security Label 2009 07 20 16 03 29 CBL Interactive CBLi 85 Utility Windows CBLi supports a number of general purpose utilities each operating in their own window To date these utilities are 1 Calculator Window 2 Calendar Window 3 File Search Window The Utilities menu also contains items to launch the ISPF Utilities menu and SDSF Calculator Window The Calculator window may be opened via the following e Select Calculator from the Utilities menu item of the CBLi main menu e Enter the CBLi command CALC on the command line of any window The calculator window allows you to enter a calculation and displays the result of the calculation In fact the calculator is a REXX function interpreter You enter a valid REXX expression and the calculator evaluates it You are not restricted to numerical calculations You can enter any valid REXX expression including for example the conversion functions Calculator Use this window to perform any calculation that can be expressed in REXX syntax Enter the expression below Note ALL the normal arithmetic functions are available together with conversion fun
311. x gt gt VCat gt lt cblv_syntax pos 6 eblm_ockl F Description Use the VCAT command to open the Execute CBLVCAT window and optionally execute CBLVCAT control statements The Execute CBLVCAT window may also be opened via the File menu of the CBLi main window menu bar Parameters cblv_syntax Valid CBLVCAT syntax to be executed when the Execute CBLVCAT window is opened Refer to the CBLVCAT User Manual for command reference Note The separator character which by default is exclamation mark may be used to enter multiple CBLVCAT operations on a single control statement Currently CBLVCAT control statements are restricted to a maximum length of 71 characters This parameter is placed in the first VCAT command line field of the Execute CBLVCAT window 2009 07 20 16 03 29 CBL Interactive CBLi 169 CBLi Command Line Interface VCAT lt CBLVCAT input control statements will be passed from the data set referenced by cblv_ctl to the Execute CBLVCAT window for CBLVCAT execution cbhlv_ctl The data set name of an MVS sequential data set or PDS and member VSE LIBR lib sublib and member or CMS fileid containing CBLVCAT control statements This parameter together with lt is placed in the first VCAT command line field of the Execute CBLVCAT window Examples V q cblname Generate CBLVCAT Query CBLNAME report V option pw 133 report vcat dsn type component alloc3
312. xclusive 2009 07 20 16 03 29 CBL Interactive CBLi 94 Utility Windows FSU File Search Update Window PREFIX A successful match only if the search string is found at the start of a word and does not constitute the entire word CHANGE A successful match only if the search string is found at the end of a word and does not constitute the entire word A successful match only occurs the search string constitutes an entire word If none of these fields are selected the search string may be found anywhere within the data being searched For a detailed description of FIND parameters and their effects please refer to the SDE CLI FIND command documentation Insert arguments to be translated into a single SDE CHANGE operation In order to include a CHANGE operation and hence any of the other fields associated with CHANGE within the FSU operation the CHANGE field must be enabled by entering in the activation field If enabled only those input records that satisfy VIEW WHERE and FIND filtering are passed to the CHANGE operation otherwise CHANGE operates on all input records Each of these records are displayed twice in the UPDATE NOUPDATE output report showing the appearance of data before and after the CHANGE operation For Structured File Search amp Update numeric search and replace CHANGE strings are treated as signed numeric values For numeric data fields an arithmetic compare will occur against a numeric search string
313. ystem operator console In MVS this is achieved using the MODIFY F JES command and the appropriate job name as follows MODIFY CBLIVTAM command In VSE this is achieved via an operator communications OC exit using the attention routine AR command MSG for the partition running CBLIVTAM e g MSG F8 DATA command Command Description_ OOOO MESSAGE Send a text message to one or more users logged on to CBLIVTAM QUERY Query the CBLIVTAM environment STOP Stoo CBLIVTAM MESSAGE Syntax gt gt MESsage user text gt lt MSG t pas de Description Send a text message to a single user or all users logged on to CBLIVTAM The message text will appear in a pop up window at the user s terminal when a 3270 AID key is hit e g Enter any PFKey etc Parameters user The user id of the user to whom the message is to be sent If asterisk is specified then the message is sent to all users who are logged on to CBLIVTAM text The message text Examples F CBLIVTAM MSG JOHNB Please browse CBL CMX SKEL MSG F8 DATA MESSAGE Please logoff CBLIVTAM will be stopped at 10 00 QUERY Syntax Users gt gt Query SSS i ROSS gt lt Description auy information about the CBLIVTAM environment CBLi currently supports only one parameter i e USERS users logged on to BLIVTAM Parameters USERS Display information about users who are logged on to CBLIVTAM

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

manual de usuário  Guía de Entrenamiento Usuario  Télécharger la documentation Saisie Manuelle  Amethyst iPig  user`s manual model: 5203 projected vertical field  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file